Home

Sun StorEdge 3000 Family CLI 2.4 User`s Guide

1. Sas lt ELEMENT value PCDATA gt 238 Sun StorEdge 3000 Family CLI 2 4 Users Guide March 2007 lt EE KKK K Kk K Kk k K V V K H KEK KEK K K K KKK KEK V HI KKK KKK K Kk K Vk ck k KKK K ko ko ko ko ko ko ko ES lt event trigger operation enables element gt lt kckckckokckck KK K K K K ck kc K K K KF K VK K VE KKK K K Kk KH K K E ck K K KH V Kk K V H K K V K Kk K ck K K gt lt ELEMENT event trigger operation enables controller failure battery backup unit failure UPS AC power loss power supply failure fan failure lt gt lt network_protocol element gt lt KEK KKK KKK KKK KEK KE KKK KEK KKK KKK KKK KKK KEK KEK KEK KKK KK KKK KEKE ko ko ko ko ko gt lt ELEMENT network protocol identifier status port_number gt lt KR KKK KKK KKK KEK KEK KE KKK KEK KKK KKK KKK KKK K K KKK KKK Kk ko K KKK K ko ko ko ko ko ko ko gt lt peripheral device element gt lt KEK KKK KKK K K KEKE K K KKK KEK K KKK KKK KEK KEK Kk kH K K k K k k k KKK KEKE k ko
2. ES lt ELEMENT disk ch target status manufacturer model serial number product revision capacity remaining size rpm ld id ld idx wwnn Speed Appendix C Show Configuration Command Output 235 lt KY EK KKK K K k k RK RE K K Kk K K K ERK RE Kk Kk HK K Kk Kk k K K K ERE RE RARE RE k kk K K Kk gt wwnn element lt Kk KYK X K KK K K X k K K K K k K K K K K kc kockokokchckok K K k K K K kok Kk Kk K X k KY Kk Kk k Kk kk LL lt ELEMENT wwnn PCDATA gt lt KEK KKK KKK KKK KKK KEK KKK KKK Kk K k k Kk K k K k XY H Kk K R K K HK Kk k k ck k K k ko d Kk k SS lt ch element gt lt KR KKK KEK KKK KKK Hk KKK KKK KKK KKK KKK KKK Y X K KK Kk Kk ck ck KH kK k K kx ko KEKE gt lt ELEMENT ch PCDATA gt lt KEK KKK KKK KKK k K HK K kk K K KH KEK KEK KEK KEK KEK KEK KKK KK KKK KKK KEKE ko ko ko K k Kk gt lt target element gt lt KEK KKK KKK KKK H KK KE KKK KEK K K Kk kK I KKK KK KKK KKK K K KKK ck ko ck KK ko ko ko ko koX Sia lt ELEMENT target PCDATA gt lt KEK KEKE KKK KEK KEK KEK KEKE KKK KKK KKK KEK KEK KEK KEK k k k KKK ck kx k k ko ko ko ko ko ko k x x gt lt serial_number element gt lt KEK KKK KKK KKK KKK KKK KKK KKK KKK K WEH IK K Y k K H K KKK ck K k XK
3. um temperature exceeded delay element gt Zh EXAARERAREXARE RRE ARE RAR kck K RE RARE RARE RAR KA k k RAR KA RARE gt lt ELEMENT temperature exceeded delay PCDATA gt Output The following pages show a sample of the show configuration command output in XML format for the Sun StorEdge 3511 SATA array The following output is specific to that configuration Each configuration varies based on how the array is set up Regardless of the file format xml or txt or onscreen the output content is the same 240 Sun StorEdge 3000 Family CLI 2 4 Users Guide March 2007 lt raidbaseview gt lt raidsystem gt lt name gt StorEdge 3511 A A Array SN 0927C0 lt name gt lt status gt Online lt status gt lt manufacturer gt SUN lt manufacturer gt lt model gt StorEdge 3511 lt model gt lt firmware_version gt 421C lt firmware_version gt lt bootrecord_version gt 1 31H lt bootrecord_version gt lt mac_address gt 00 c0 ff 09 27 c0 lt mac_address gt lt ip gt 10 1 74 212 lt ip gt lt netmask gt 255 255 255 0 lt netmask gt lt gateway gt 10 1 74 1 lt gateway gt lt primary_sn gt 8027229 lt primary_sn gt lt secondary_sn gt 8027194 lt secondary_sn gt lt controller_name gt lt controller_name gt unique id 0x927C0 unique id id of nvram defaults 421C 3
4. a total_ses_devices element gt 1 The RAID system total SAFTE device gt number gt Sis ELEMENT total_ses_devices PCDATA gt V dokkdkkokdckckokckok Kk ERE RRE RRE RRE RRE RARE k ko kk k K k k RARE RARE cache size element The cache size in binary MB gt S ELEMENT cache size PCDATA gt DT gt cpu element The CPU type of the RAID system gt 1 KAKXKKKKKKKKKKKKXKKKXKKKXKKKXKKKXKKKXKKKXKKKXKKKXKKXKXXkx x gt ELEMENT cpu PCDATA gt De FEXERXEREFARERERERE RE RE RE RARE K RARE RARE RE RARA XK XK X K K K Xk k XK K K K gt fru element The FRU info of one part of the RAID system gt It includ
5. Sa lt partition element The partition info includes gt les idx 1 effective size lt VE offset gt lt mapping gt lt K K K Kk EHK K kK K ck k H K K kok K k K H KH k K RRA RARE RER ER kc k kok kk kk k k ko Ak eM lt ELEMENT partition idx effective size offset mapping filter_mapping gt lt KE KKK k k k k k k k k k k k k k k k k k k k k k k k k k k k k k k k k k k k k k k k k k k k k k k k k x i lt effective size element in MB lt kkk k k k kK k k k k k k k k k k k k k k k k k k k k k k k k k k k k k k k k k k k k k k k k k k k k k k x gt lt ELEMENT effective size PCDATA gt lt kkk k k k kK k k k k k k k kK k k k k k k k k k k k k k k k k k k k k k k k k k k k k k k k k k k k k k k x LEE lt offset element in MB gt lt ami ELEMENT offset PCDATA gt lt KEK k k k k k k k k k k k k k k k k k k k k k k k k k k k k k k k k k k k k k k k k k k k k k k k k k k x gt lt mapping element F lt kkk k k k k k k k k k k k k k k k k k k k k k k k k k k k k k k k k k k k k k k k k k k k k k k k k k k x
6. gt fru number element kckckckckckck kok A kckck kckokok AKokckck kok kck kokck k kchckok K K k ok VK K K K Kk K K koh c kck K K ko ko K H K gt lt ELEMENT fru number PCDATA gt xus E lt safte_status element gt xu lt ELEMENT safte_status idx power status summary power supply status fan status summary fan status temperature status lt KEK KKK KK KK KKK KE KK KKK RAEk kk kk KKK ko ko ck k ko ko ko ko ko ko ko kx Kx gt lt power_status_summary element gt lt KEK KKK KKK KEK KEK KEK KEK KKK kkk KE KKK KKK k kk KEKE KKK k K K k k kK ck k X ko k k ko ko ko x k gt IELEMENT power status summary PCDATA gt lt gt
7. If no command is specified basic usage information is displayed Examples The following example shows the help text for the show channels command sccli gt help show channels show channels display channel configuration Description The quit command exits the interactive mode You can also use the exit command to exit the Sun StorEdge CLI Syntax Chapter 2 System Function Commands 19 select Description The select command selects a new device to which subsequent commands are issued If no device is specified and more than one choice exists a menu of choices is displayed This command should not be used on the command line because a select command is automatically executed if no device name is specified Syntax select device Examples The following example selects an out of band FC device Sccli select 199 249 246 28 sccli selecting se3000 199 249 246 28 58632 SUN StorEdge 3510 SN 000187 The following example selects an inband SCSI device sccli gt select c15t0d0 sccli selected dev rdsk c0t5d0s2 SUN StorEdge 3310 SN 00028E version Description The version command displays the version number of the Sun StorEdge CLI Syntax version Examples In the following example version 2 1 0 is displayed 20 Sun StorEdge 3000 Family CLI 2 4 User s Guide March 2007 sccli version Sccli selected se3000 199 249 246 28 58632 SUN StorE
8. gt lt KEK KEK KEK KKK k K kkk k k k k k KKK Kk k KKK KKK KKK k kx ck Kk k ko ko ko KEKE gt lt ELEMENT physical drive PCDATA gt lt FTE RR K K k kH K K K K Kk Kk k BERR e Rok ER Kk K EER RARA RARE RARA k kx 25 gt lt size element in MB gt lt KEK X H K K KY KKK X K E KH K TE GK H KY KKK KEK EF K KH K H K K KX C u KH KH ko ko ko koX ELEMENT size PCDATA gt lt gt lt ses element The SES device info includes gt lt idx index number gt lt ch channel number gt id SCSI ID gt 1 chassis 1 vender product id gt rev gt pld gt Se wwnn gt bec wwpn topology gt lt eu lt ELEMENT ses idx ch id chassis vender product id rev pld wwnn wwpn topology gt AE ockokckck ko kchok ckokokcok Kokchckockok kcok Ko koh ERRE RARA REA k k k kk k kx kk kc
9. lt ELEMENT mapping PCDATA gt kkk k kK k kK k k k k k k k k k k k k k k k k k k k k k k k k k k k k k k k k k k k k k k k k k k k k k k x My lt filter mapping element gt lt ELEMENT filter mapping PCDATA gt 234 Sun StorEdge 3000 Family CLI 2 4 Users Guide e March 2007 lt KEK ERE KEK Kk Kk ERE RE RARE REA K K Ko ckoko ok kok K K VK k F kc K kc Kk VK hokok 3 K H K K F K kk K gt lt logical_volume element The Logical Volume info include gt lt lv id gt lt lv idx gt lt assignment gt 1 status 1 size 1 logical drive gt lt total_partitions gt 1 partition gt lt kb KKK KK KKK KEKE KK KKK KEK KEK KEK KEK KEK KEK KEK KEK KEK KEK KEKE ck ko k Kk Kk ko ko ko ko ko k Kk Kx k gt lt ELEMENT logical volume 1v id lv idx assignment status size logical drive total partitions write policy partition gt lt KKK KK OR Re IRR EK KE K V VT RRA RARE RE KR EER BERR ARE RARA Kk Kk 25 gt lt lv_id element gt lt ZH TX Y Re K Y T K he ook HKH T des ie K dec esa EHK he ee E de hcc T RELE H KY C U H KH KH K SUE gt
10. In the preceding device name code X controller number Y SCSI target number Z logical unit number s2 slice 2 of the logical disk Usually slice 2 is specified when identifying a disk for administrative purposes but any slice number between 0 and 7 if the slice exists works An example of the device name in Solaris is dev rdsk c2t0d0 10 Sun StorEdge 3000 Family CLI 2 4 User s Guide March 2007 To access a JBOD enclosure services device using Solaris specify the device name as shown in the following example or use the disk option and specify the name of a disk device within the enclosure dev es sesn For Windows operating systems the device name is specified using the Windows internal device name for the physical device where N corresponds to the disk number displayed in the Disk Administrator PhysicalDriveN For example PhysicalDrive3 Note If no device is specified on the command line and more than one array is connected to the host a menu of devices is presented with one device file name for each array If there is only one Sun StorEdge 3000 family array device connected to the host that device is selected automatically Note If inband management access has been disabled by Sun StorEdge CLI the firmware application or Sun StorEdge Configuration Service and a user attempts to use inband management the message RAID controller not responding
11. Note For information on resetting drive status using the firmware application refer to the Sun StorEdge 3000 Family RAID Firmware User s Guide Syntax set logical drive ld index Id id write policy assignment status good degraded Sun StorEdge 3000 Family CLI 2 4 User s Guide March 2007 Arguments TABLE 5 15 Arguments for set logical drive Argument Description ld index Specify the logical drive index number For example 143 Id id Specify the logical drive ID For example 71038221 write policy Set the write policy for the logical drive Valid values write back write through default If you do not specify a write policy or if you specify default the logical drive uses the write policy specified for the controller If the write policy changes for the controller the write policy automatically changes for the logical drive as well To set the controller write policy use the set cache parameters command For details see set cache parameters on page 73 assignment Specify the controller assignment for the logical drive If no value is specified the logical drive is assigned to the primary controller by default Valid values include primary and secondary status Specify to reset the logical drive status Valid values include degraded for failed redundant RAID sets and good for failed non redundant RAID sets Caution In a single controller configuration if y
12. gt lt controller_name Controller Name gt 1 unique id Unique ID of the RAID System gt lt id_of_nvram_defaults gt lt total_logical_drives gt lt total_partitions gt lt total_physical_drives Total Physical Drivers gt lt total_ses_devices gt 1 cache size gt lw cpu gt 1 fru Controller FRU info gt lt optional gt 1 channel RAID System Channel info gt network network channel info gt Appendix C Show Configuration Command Output 215 1 optional ITE com port RAID System COM port info gt lt cache_param Cache parameter gt lt array_param Disk Array parameter gt 1 drive param Disk side parameter lt host_param Host side parameter gt lt redundant_param is system in redundant model gt 1 logical volume Logical Volumes gt 1 optional logical drive Logical Drivers gt ee optional gt lt ses the SES device info gt optional lt port_wwn port wwn info optional gt lt inter_controller_link controller internal link info gt lt optional gt lt battery_status Battery status gt lt optional cum lt config_components Di
13. Identifier number International Electrotechnical Commission The process of writing a specific pattern to all data blocks on all drives in a logical drive This process overwrites and destroys existing data on the disks and the logical drive Initialization is required to make the entire logical drive consistent at the onset Initialization ensures that any parity checks performed in the future are executed correctly Just a Bunch of Disks A storage device that consist of drives with no controllers Local area network Logical drive A section of disk storage space also referred to as a LUN that is presented to the host operating system as a single physical drive A logical drive might be located on one or more physical drives Each controller can manage one to eight logical drives Glossary 281 LUN LUN mapping LUN masking LVD management port Mbyte media scan mirroring RAID 1 multiple block striping with distributed parity NDMP NVRAM N port OBP 282 logical unit number The major and minor device numbers make up the logical unit numbering sequence for a particular device connected to a computer The ability to change the virtual LUN as presented to the server from storage This enables such benefits as the ability of a server to boot from the SAN without requiring of a local disk drive Each server requires LUN 0 to boot The characteristic that enables an administrator to dynamically ma
14. Note icl can be substituted for the keywords inter controller link Arguments TABLE4 7 Arguments for show inter controller link Argument Description upper lower Specify the upper or lower controller slot in the chassis to which the command is directed channel ch Specify the channel number of the inter controller link 118 Sun StorEdge 3000 Family CLI 2 4 User s Guide March 2007 Examples The following example shows the inter controller links for channels 0 1 4 and 5 sccli 111 1 111 11 show inter controller link inter controller link upper inter controller link lower inter controller link upper inter controller link lower inter controller link upper inter controller link lower inter controller link upper inter controller link lower 0 00 FR Rr O connected connected connected connected connected connected connected connected Chapter 4 Channel Commands 119 120 Sun StorEdge 3000 Family CLI 2 4 User s Guide March 2007 CHAPTER 5 Logical Drive Partition and Logical Volume Commands This chapter provides the available Sun StorEdge CLI commands with sample code for logical drives partitions and logical volumes Topics covered in this chapter include m Logical Drive Commands on page 122 m Partition Commands on page 153 m Logical Volume Commands on page 163 Note To prevent unauthorized access to administrative functions
15. ELEMENT lv id PCDATA gt lt KEK KKK KKK KKK KKK KEK Kk kY KKK KKK KKK KEK KKK KKK KEK KKK KKK ck ko ko ko ko ko ko koX m lt number of logical drive element LV include LD number gt lt POT ck RIOR OK KK H Kk EH K HK KEIR K K KH K KKK K K H Kk K V Kk K YF H K V Kk K H EERE gt lt ELEMENT number_of_logical_drive PCDATA gt Vitis eckokckok de deck KE RRR RR RE k kk KER kck Kk kchckok RA RARE RA RARA kkk kx kx kk K gt lt lv idx element gt ev c KEK KKK KK KKK KEK KEK KKK kk ck ok kk ck ok KEK k k k kk k k K k k k k xk kx Kk kx ko ko ko ko ko x k Kx Kx lt ELEMENT lv idx PCDATA gt gt lt config components element gt a rer ees lt ELEMENT config components disk gt a kckckokckckck kcok ko K K K kc KE RK Kk k K KV H K k hok ok kchckok K K Kk k kok kc K K Kk a K Kk Kk ck K Kk kk K K K S Disk element gt QU
16. TABLEB 1 Gun StorEdge CLI Error and Status Messages Continued Error and Status Messages Failed to get controller network interface Failed to get controller redundant mode Failed to get controller statistics Failed to get ctrl param in upload config command Failed to get drive statistics Failed to get fru id in upload config command Failed to get host statistics Failed to get 1d and lv info in upload config command Failed to get logical drive partition Failed to get logical drive status Failed to get loop map Failed to get lun map in upload config command Failed to get offset in enclosure page for specified element type Failed to get peripheral configuration Failed to get peripheral device status Failed to get pld register raw data Failed to get pld rev Failed to get redundant controller configuration Failed to get scsi drv info in upload config command Failed to get ses page Failed to get sfp bypass information Failed to get write policy Failed to issue a lip Failed to map logical volume Failed to map logical volume filter Failed to map partition to host channel Failed to mute controller beep Failed to parse ses configuration page Failed to partition logical drive volume Failed to partition logical volume 200 Sun StorEdge 3000 Family CLI 2 4 User s Guide March 2007 TABLEB 1 Gun StorEdge CLI Error and Status Messages Continued Error and Status Messages Failed to program fru
17. fru sn fru sn fru sn Appendix C Show Configuration Command Output 253 component type diskslot unit 3 status OK fru pn 370 6775 fru sn 07ECE4 gt lt addr gt 3 lt addr gt lt led gt off lt led gt lt component gt component type diskslot unit 4 status OK fru pn 370 6775 fru sn 07ECE4 gt lt addr gt 4 lt addr gt lt led gt off lt led gt lt component gt component type diskslot unit 5 status OK fru pn 370 6775 fru sn 07ECE4 gt lt addr gt 5 lt addr gt lt led gt off lt led gt lt component gt lt component type diskslot unit 6 status 0K fru pn 370 6775 fru sn 07ECE4 gt lt addr gt 6 lt addr gt lt led gt off lt led gt lt component gt component type diskslot unit 7 status OK fru pn 370 6775 fru sn 07ECE4 gt lt addr gt 7 lt addr gt lt led gt off lt led gt lt component gt lt component type diskslot unit 8 status OK fru pn 370 6775 fru sn Q7ECE4 gt lt addr gt 8 lt addr gt lt led gt off lt led gt lt component gt component type diskslot unit 9 status Absent fru pn 370 6775 fru sn 07ECE4 gt lt addr gt 9 lt addr gt lt led gt off lt led gt lt component gt lt component type diskslot unit 10 status OK fru pn 370 6775 fru sn Q7ECE4 gt lt addr gt 10 lt add
18. gt lt ELEMENT fan_status idx status gt lt Kkk kk kk k k k k k kK k k k k k k k k k k k k k k k k k k k k k k k kK k k k k k k k k k k k k k kK k X kX X kk gt lt enclosure element include below elements gt 1 mgmt device component 2 lt Kkk kk k k kK k kK k k kK k kK k k k k k k k k k k k k k k k k k k k k k kK k k k k k k k k k k k k k k k ck kX X kk gt lt ELEMENT enclosure mgmt_device component gt ZT kkk k k k k k k k k k k k k k k k k k k k k k k k k k k k k k k k k k k k k k k k k k k k k k k k k k k k k x lt mgmt device element N ee kkk k k k k k k k k k k k k k k k k k k k k k k k k k k k k k k k k k k k k k k k k k k k k k k k k k k k k x Ss lt ELEMENT mgmt_device idx name gt m rem c component element gt m mm um lt ELEMENT component addr led temp gt lt ATTLIST component fru pn CDATA REQUIRED fru sn CDATA REQUIRED Status CDATA REQUIRED type CDATA REQUIR
19. lt The RAID system secondary controller serial number gt lt It is optional for some systems may have only gt one controller gt lt RT KK K k k Re KH K VK V ER ER KEK K V K RE kc kk ko Kk I K NARA RARE H IK ARE RARA H K 25 gt lt ELEMENT secondary_sn 4 PCDATA gt lt KEK KKK KKK KKK KKK KEK KKK KEK KKK KKK KKK KKK KEKE KKK ck k kk Kk kk k ko k k k Kk gt lt controller_name element gt lt The RATD system controller name gt lt KEK KKK KKK KKK KKK KEK KEK KEK KKK Y k H K E H K KEKE K HY KKK KK KH K ko ko k PEN S lt ELEMENT controller name PCDATA gt lt KEK KKK KKK KKK KKK KKK KKK KKK KKK KKK KKK KKK KKK KKK KKK KEK ko ko ko ko ko koX ee lt unique_id element gt lt The RAID system Unique ID gt lt KEK kk kk k k k k k k k k k k k k k k k k k k k k k k k k k k k k k k k k k k k k k k k k k k ko k k xk x gt lt ELEMENT unique id PCDATA gt lt KEK K Kk K K K V V FX RA RELE RARA k k K kckckck Kk kK K RA RARA RRA RARE RARA K K lt id_of_nvram defaults element gt lt KEK KKK K k X K kx X KKK KEK KK kX KEK K k k X K KEK Kk Kk KEK K k KEK K k X K k Xk kX K KK ko ko k k kk gt lt ELEMENT id of nvram defaults PCDATA gt lt kkk KKK k k k k k k k k k k k k k k k k k k k k k k k k k k k k k k k k k k k k k k k k k k k k k ko xk x Ems lt tota
20. m Unique ID The Controller Name output shows m Controller name The Network Parameters output shows IP Address Netmask Gateway Mode The Host Parameters output shows m LUNs per host m Queue depth m Fibre connection m Inband management The Drive Parameters output shows SCSI Motor Start up Power up SCSI Reset Disk Access Latency SCSI I O Timeout Tag Count Per Drive Drive Check Time Period Enclosure Polling Period Auto detect Drive Check Drive SMART Auto Global Spare Appendix C Show Configuration Command Output 209 The Redundant Controller output shows Controller configuration Cache synchronization Host channel failover mode Local Remote redundant mode Write through data synchronization Secondary RS232 port status Communication channel type The Redundancy output shows Role Primary Controller Serial Number Redundancy Mode Redundant Status Secondary Controller Serial Number The Cache Parameters output shows Write policy mode m I O optimization m Synchronization period The RS 232 Parameters output shows m Port baud rate The Channel output shows Channel ID Channel type Media type PID SID Current Clock Speed Current Width The Disks output shows Channel Number Target Number Status Manufacturer Model Serial Number Product Revision Capacity Size Remaining Speed LD ID 210 Sun StorEdge 3000 Family CLI 2 4 User s Guide March 2007 The Logical Dr
21. 5 0 RAID LOOP A Bypassed H The following example is sent on channel 2 and shows the bypass information for a Sun StorEdge 3511 SATA array on loop A sccli gt show bypass sfp ses channel 2 loop 1oopa PORT ENCL ID ENCL TYPE LOOP BYP STATUS ATTRIBUTES eee IS cee ld masc ee ge Stee SH Sieg e a Dt 0 RAID LOOP A Unbypassed 0R 0 RATD LOOP A Unbypassed 1L 0 RAID LOOP A Not Installed 1R 0 RATD LOOP A Not Installed 2 0 RAID LOOP A Bypassed H 3 0 RAID LOOP A Not Installed 4 0 RAID LOOP A Not Installed 5 0 RAID LOOP A Bypassed H AL 1 JBOD LOOP A Unbypassed AR 1 JBOD LOOP A Unbypassed gt BL 1 JBOD LOOP A Unbypassed BR 1 JBOD LOOP A Bypassed H Returned Values The Port returned values indicate the type of device FC or SATA that is attached to the loop m Ona Sun StorEdge 3510 FC RAID IOM board from left to right there are six ports channel 0 channel 1 channel 2 3 Left channel 2 3 Right channel 4 and channel 5 Valid values for the Sun StorEdge 3510 FC RAID IOM board include 0 1 4 5 L and R 56 Sun StorEdge 3000 Family CLI 2 4 User s Guide March 2007 m Ona Sun StorEdge 3510 FC JBOD IOM board from left to right there are two ports Left and Right Valid values for port include L and R m OnaSunStorEdge 3511 SATA RAID IOM board from left to right there are eight ports channel 0 left channel 0 right channel 1 left ch
22. Fault One or more of the FRU components is exhibiting a fault condition Absent No FRU is located in the device N A Not applicable Note In a dual controller configuration if one controller has been removed the surviving controller will show a Fault status because SES sensors on the removed controller are not available The surviving controller SES will lose heartbeat to the other controller and thus detect fault status show peripheral device status Description The show peripheral device status command displays the status for all controller environmental sensors For environmental status of the chassis the SAF TE or SES chassis components see show enclosure status on page 38 The threshold ranges for peripheral devices are set using the firmware application If a device exceeds the threshold range that was set its status displays Over upper threshold If a device does not meet the threshold range its status displays Under lower threshold For information on how to set the threshold ranges refer to the Sun StorEdge 3000 Family RAID Firmware User s Guide Syntax show peripheral device status Chapter 2 System Function Commands 47 48 Examples The following example shows the sensor status for a Sun StorEdge 3510 FC array sccli gt show peripheral device status Item Value status CPU Temp Sensor primary 41 50C within safety range Board1 Temp Sensor primary 46 00C within saf
23. Library database data not valid Library database update error Local spare can not be assigned to NRAID or RAIDO Logical drive rebuild failed Logical drive volume expand failed Logical drive volume expand only applicable on raid0 raid1 raid3 raid5 Logical error of operation on ses LUN map exist Maximum error status value Mixed drive type for a logical drive operation Mixed drive type in the raid system Network traffic No available disk to create logical drive No controller network interface Appendix B Error and Event Messages 203 TABLEB 1 Gun StorEdge CLI Error and Status Messages Continued Error and Status Messages No No No No No No No No No No No No No No No No No No No No No No No No OK disk clone found firmware data for download logical drive logical volume mux board found path found to inquiry sr 1216 sr 1216 found valid data returned valid safte target found valid ses target found valid target found a device mapped on primary controller a drive channel a host channel a primary controller a qualified channel a spare drive a supported SAFTE target a supported SES target a valid target an existing channel an existing target spare drive valid as spare drive Only offline creating can be aborted Only offline expanding can be aborted Open file failure Open inband outband device error Operation not val
24. abort clone clone configure global spare scan disk set disk array set led show clone show disk array show disks show led status unconfigure global spare For details on downloading disk firmware see download disk firmware on page 177 abort clone Description The abort clone command stops the cloning of the specified disk drive To clone a disk use the clone command For details see clone on page 91 To view the progress of a clone use the show clone command For details see show clone on page 97 90 Sun StorEdge 3000 Family CLI 2 4 User s Guide March 2007 clone Syntax abort clone disk dest Arguments TABLE3 6 Arguments for abort clone Argument Description disk dest Specify the disk to stop cloning Examples The following example aborts the clone disk drive operation for ID 5 on channel 2 sccli c2t0d0 abort clone d2 5 Description The clone command uses a destination disk to copy and replace a drive that is suspected of failing The disk that you are replacing must be a member of a logical drive The clone command is not supported for NRAID arrays The clone command might be issued in response to a self monitoring analysis and reporting technology SMART warning To enable SMART see set drive parameters on page 108 Note You cannot create a logical drive composed of Sun StorEdge 3510 FC drives and Sun StorEdge 3511 SATA drives If you try t
25. lt Appendix C Show Configuration Command Output 223 lt ELEMENT network idx mac address static address transfer speed configurable current transfer speed supported transfer speed mac address configurable lt KR KKK KEK KKK KKK KEK KKK KKK KEK KKK KKK KEK KKK KKK KEK KKK KKK ck ck ko ko ko ko ko koX lt mac_address element Mac address lt format is lt KEK VAD K KKK KEK KKK KEKE KKK KE KKK KEK KEK KKK KEKE KK KKK K H F VH K k KKK KK ko ko H V k K lt ELEMENT mac_address PCDATA gt lt KEK KEKE KKK KEK k Kk kk Kk k k k KKK KEK KEK k Kk Kk KKK k k k Kk KX KKK ck k k k k k ko ko ko k x k lt transfer_speed_configurable element lt KEK KEKE KKK KKK KEK KEKE KEKE KKK KEK KKK KR KKK KEK KEKE KKK ck k k k k ko ko ko ko k k k x lt ELEMENT transfer_speed_configurable PCDATA gt lt KEK KKK KKK Y X H Ik KH K F KH K KKK KKK H H X H FK K K Kk kk H K K ck X H k ck KK ko ko ko K koX lt current_transfer_speed element in MB lt KEKE KKK k k k k k k k k k k k k k k k k k k k k k k k k k k k k k k k k k k k k k k k k k k k k k xk x x lt ELEMENT current_transfer_speed PCDATA gt lt KEK KKK K K k Kk K V KKK K k KKK KKK
26. man pages accessing 4 map partition command 155 maximum drive expand capacity 135 media scan 127 multiplexer MUX boards downloading code to 181 viewing 171 mute command 71 N netmask viewing 28 network parameters configuring 21 viewing 28 nvram downloading 49 uploading file 62 O oob option 2 8 optimization random I O stripe size 131 optimization settings 73 options list of xii 185 out of band communication device names 11 management functions 21 P parameters list of xii 185 parity check performing 128 viewing 148 partitions configuring 154 deleting 154 mapping 155 sizing 154 unmapping 160 viewing 159 viewing mapped 117 158 password command 71 password option 10 path controller firmware downloading 181 Index 289 peripheral devices chassis sensor status 38 controller sensor status 47 persistent events viewing 65 physical disk syntax 12 point to point mode viewing 115 port bypass circuit status 118 protocols configuring 21 displaying 30 restricting 25 Q quit command 19 R random I O optimization stripe size 131 RARP 22 rebuild command 137 reset controller command 72 Reverse Address Resolution Protocol 22 router firmware downloading 182 viewing 172 RS 232 configuration setting 78 RS232 configuration viewing connection 31 running CLI 3 S SAF TE component status 38 downloading firmware 180 viewing 170
27. C type temp unit 7 temp C type temp unit 8 temp C status 0K status 0K status OK status OK status OK status OK status 0K status 0K status 0K status 0K status 0K status 0K status 0K status 0K status 0K idx 0 gt lt mgmt_device gt idx 1 gt lt mgmt_device gt fru pn 370 6775 fru pn 370 6775 fru pn 370 6775 fru pn 370 6775 fru pn 370 6775 fru pn 370 6775 fru pn 370 6774 fru pn 370 6774 fru pn 370 6774 fru pn 370 5398 fru sn fru pn 370 5398 fru sn fru pn 370 5398 fru sn fru pn 370 5398 fru sn fru pn 370 5398 fru sn fru pn 370 5398 fru sn fru sn 07ECE4 fru sn 07ECE4 fru sn 07ECE4 fru sn 07ECE4 fru sn 07ECE4 fru sn 07ECE4 fru sn GG0042 gt fru sn GG0042 gt fru sn GG0045 gt Appendix C Show Configuration Command Output 251 component type temp unit 9 status OK fru pn 370 6774 fru sn GG0045 gt lt temp gt 32 lt temp gt lt component gt component type temp unit 10 status OK fru pn 370 5398 fru sn 115884 gt lt temp gt 22 lt temp gt lt component gt component type temp unit 11 status OK fru pn 370 5398 fru sn 114536 gt lt temp gt 25 lt temp gt lt component gt component type voltage unit 0 status OK fru pn 370 5398 fru sn 115884 gt lt voltage gt 5 1
28. Description Note This command should only be used by support personnel during troubleshooting procedures Sun StorEdge 3000 family FC and SATA arrays only The show bypass SFP command displays the bypass status of all small form factor SFP transceivers on a specified loop Note Loop A and Loop B refer to the redundant FC loops that each device is connected to The SES device in the top slot of the chassis is connected to Loop A which is the first drive channel The bottom SES device is connected to Loop B which is the second drive channel Syntax show bypass sfp ses channel channel loop 1oopa 1oopb Arguments TABLE 2 18 Arguments for show bypass SFP Argument Description ses channel Specify the drive channel number of the FC port from which to send channel the command The channel must be configured as a drive channel loop Specify the drive loop of the SFP for which the bypass information is displayed Valid values 1oopa 1oopb a or b Chapter 2 System Function Commands 55 Examples The following example is sent on channel 2 and shows the bypass information for Loop A sccli gt show bypass sfp ses channel 2 loop 1oopa PORT ENCL ID ENCL TYPE LOOP BYP STATUS ATTRIBUTES mec MP i a SH See ne M Rea s AG 0 0 RAID LOOP A Unbypassed 1 0 RATD LOOP A Not Installed L 0 RAID LOOP A Bypassed H R 0 RAID LOOP A Not Installed 4 0 RAID LOOP A Not Installed
29. Disabled transfer speed configurable current transfer speed negotiating 100M current transfer speed supported transfer speed 10M 100M supported transfer speed mac address configurable Disabled mac address configurable network network protocol identifier TELNET identifier lt status gt enabled lt status gt lt port_number gt 23 lt port_number gt lt network_protocol gt lt network_protocol gt lt identifier gt HTTP lt identifier gt lt status gt enabled lt status gt lt port_number gt 80 lt port_number gt lt network_protocol gt lt network_protocol gt lt identifier gt HTTPS lt identifier gt lt status gt disabled lt status gt lt port_number gt 443 lt port_number gt lt network_protocol gt Appendix C Show Configuration Command Output 245 network protocol lt identifier gt FTP lt identifier gt lt status gt enabled lt status gt lt port_number gt 21 lt port_number gt lt network_protocol gt lt network_protocol gt lt identifier gt SSH lt identifier gt lt status gt disabled lt status gt lt port_number gt 22 lt port_number gt lt network_protocol gt lt network_protocol gt lt identifier gt PriAgent lt identifier gt lt status gt enabled lt status gt lt port_number gt 58632 lt port_number gt lt network_protocol gt lt network_protocol gt lt identifier gt SNMP lt identifier gt lt status gt disabled
30. ELEMENT port wwns port_wwn gt REN gt KR KKK KEK KKK KKK KKK KKK KEK KEK KEK KEK KEK KEK k kkk kk kkk ko ck ck ck ck ko k k k k k k x ko k x gt lt port wwn element include gt idx ch gt 1 id lt J wwnn gt S lt ELEMENT port wwn idx ch id wwnn gt 232 Sun StorEdge 3000 Family CLI 2 4 User s Guide March 2007 lt EE K k ERE RE H K Kk F K KX K ERE k k K K H kk K Kk I H K kk Kk K k K 3 RE EEK Te ek gt lt hostwwns element include gt 1 hostwwns gt lt kckckckckckckckok ko kokok deckckok ck ck ko kc kok kok kockckok ckokckcok ko kkk o kok kok ko kh kck Kk A kk k k k kx kx Kx gt lt ELEMENT hostwwns hostwwns lt es lt hostwwn element include gt e wwn gt name gt lt KEK KKK KKK KEK KEK KEK KEK KEK KEKE KKK KEK KEKE KK KKK KEK k k kkk KK k k k k k Kk ko ko ko ko ko gt lt ELEMENT hostwwn wwn name
31. ID IEC initialization JBOD LAN LD logical drive An Arbitrated Loop Hub is a wiring concentrator Arbitrated means that all nodes communicating over this Fibre loop are sharing a 100 Mbyte sec segment Whenever more devices are added to a single segment the bandwidth available to each node is further divided A loop configuration allows different devices in the loop to be configured in a token ring style With a Fibre hub a Fibre loop can be rearranged in a star like configuration because the hub itself contains port bypass circuitry that forms an internal loop Bypass circuits can automatically reconfigure the loop once a device is removed or added without disrupting the physical connection to other devices Field replaceable unit Gigabyte Gigabit Interface Converter A hot swappable input output device that plugs into a Gigabit Ethernet port or Fibre Channel A spare drive that is available to all logical drives in an array Spare drives can be part of automatic logical drive rebuild A group is a data object that enables multiple servers to be contained under a single category Groups are similar in concept to domains and enable you to organize servers Host bus adapter A drive in a RAID 1 or RAID 5 configuration that contains no data and acts as a standby in case another drive fails The ability of a field replaceable unit FRU to be removed and replaced while the RAID array remains powered on and operational
32. Mirror 2 10 Ei Chapter 3 Controller and Disk Commands 99 Note All device capacity is displayed in powers of 1024 For details see Device Capacity on page 15 Returned Values Returned values include channel number disk SCSI ID size speed megabytes per second logical drive assignment status drive model ID firmware revision serial number and device node name If the b option is specified the drive buffer size and drive serial number are displayed Logical drive assignment values include m Global global spare m None unassigned Speed values include m Async SCSI Asynchronous m SYNC SCSI Synchronous m 20MB SCSI Ultra m 40MB SCSI Ultra Wide m 80MB SCSI Ultra2 m 160MB SCSI 160 m 320MB SCSI Ultra3 m 100MB FC 1GB s m 200MB FC 2 GB s Status values include Online in good condition Global global spare Stand By standby for global or local spare Initing initialization in progress Rebuild rebuild in progress Adding adding disk in progress In Clone drive is in process of cloning another drive Forclone drive is a valid clone of another drive Copying drive is in process of copying from another drive New new disk that has not been configured Used contains RAID meta data Bad failed disk Absent disk does not exist Missing configured disk is missing SB Miss configured spare drive is missing FRMT drive was pa
33. The following example returns information for the disks being cloned on the specified device sccli gt clone d2 5 d0 5 sccli start clone 2 5 to 0 5 sccli gt show clone Ch ID Status 0 5 2 complete show disk array Description The show disk array command displays the disk array parameters including the logical drive rebuild priority and the hard drive settings for verifying the written data for initializing rebuilding and writing normal I O data Syntax show disk array Chapter 3 Controller and Disk Commands 97 Examples The following example returns the disk array parameter information sccli gt show disk array init verify disabled rebuild verify disabled normal verify disabled rebuild priority low show disks Description The show disks command displays information about the disk drives in the array enclosure and any expansion chassis Information returned includes the following channel and ID negotiated speed associated logical drive capacity size status vendor information mirror output and worldwide node name WWNN Note Mirror output is valid only for RAID 1 logical drives Syntax show disks disk list channel ch free all b buffer size Arguments TABLE3 12 Arguments for show disks Argument Description disk list Shows specific disks Use any of the following formats ch id ch idm n ch is physical device channel
34. delete To delete a partition specify the delete keyword All partitions in the logical drive or logical volume must be unmapped for this argument to take effect Note All device capacity is displayed in powers of 1024 For details see Device Capacity on page 15 Note Changes to a partition cause the next higher numbered partition to shrink or grow Any change in the size of one partition causes the dimensions of the partition next to it to change as well invalidating whatever data might be stored on both partitions Before implementing a new partition layout the layout is displayed and the user is warned that data in the old partitions will be lost The user is prompted to continue 154 Sun StorEdge 3000 Family CLI 2 4 User s Guide March 2007 Examples The following example creates a partition for a logical drive with a logical drive index number of 2 partition number of 2 and partition size of 4000 Mbyte and leaves the remaining capacity for the next partition sccli c2t0d0 configure partition 1d2 02 4000MB The following example creates a partition for a logical drive with a logical drive ID of 1D2F34AA partition number of 2 and partition size of 4000 Mbyte and leaves the remaining capacity for the next partition sccli c2t0d0 configure partition 1D2F34AA 02 4000MB This example deletes a partition from logical drive 0 sccli c2t0dO configure partition 1d0 0 delete
35. device statistics device statistics lt channel gt 3 lt channel gt lt id gt 9 lt id gt lt type gt SDISK lt type gt lt reset gt 0 lt reset gt lt LinkFail gt 0 lt LinkFail gt lt SyncLoss gt 0 lt SyncLoss gt lt SignalLoss gt 0 lt SignalLoss gt lt PrimitiveSequence gt 0 lt PrimitiveSequence gt lt InvalidTransWords gt 0 lt InvalidTransWords gt InvalidCRC 0 InvalidCRC device statistics device statistics lt channel gt 3 lt channel gt lt id gt 10 lt id gt lt type gt SDISK lt type gt lt reset gt 0 lt reset gt lt LinkFail gt 0 lt LinkFail gt lt SyncLoss gt 0 lt SyncLoss gt lt SignalLoss gt 0 lt SignalLoss gt lt PrimitiveSequence gt 0 lt PrimitiveSequence gt lt InvalidTransWords gt 0 lt InvalidTransWords gt InvalidCRC 0 InvalidCRC device statistics device statistics channel 3 channel lt id gt 11 lt id gt lt type gt SDISK lt type gt lt reset gt 0 lt reset gt lt LinkFail gt 0 lt LinkFail gt lt SyncLoss gt 0 lt SyncLoss gt lt SignalLoss gt 0 lt SignalLoss gt lt PrimitiveSequence gt 0 lt PrimitiveSequence gt Appendix C Show Configuration Command Output 269 lt InvalidTransWords gt 0 lt InvalidTransWords gt InvalidCRC 0 InvalidCRC device statistics device statistics lt channel gt 3 lt channel gt lt id gt 13 lt id gt lt type gt RAID lt type gt lt reset gt 0 lt reset
36. disks with IDs 0 to 5 on channel 2 one of which is reserved as a global spare for this logical drive sccli c2t0d0 create logical drive raid5 size 10gb global spare 2 0 5 The following example creates a logical drive as RAID 1 with disks 1 3 and 4 on channel 2 on the primary controller Channel 2 ID 0 is assigned as the global spare and each disk drive uses 1000 Mbyte capacity to build the RAID sccli c2t0d0 create logical drive 1 2 1 2 3 2 4 primary global spare 2 0 max disk capacity 1000MB delete logical drive Description The delete logical drive command deletes the specified logical drives and disassociates all disks that are assigned to the logical drive Caution Any time logical drives are created or deleted the numbering of logical drive indexes might change After creating or deleting logical drives issue a show logical drive command to view an updated list of logical drive indexes Or use logical drive IDs which do not change over the lifetime of the logical drive rather than logical drive indexes For more information see Logical Drive Syntax on page 13 Note Before you can delete a logical drive you must unmap all assigned LUNs To review LUN maps see Show lun maps on page 158 Syntax delete logical drive ld index Id id 134 Sun StorEdge 3000 Family CLI 2 4 User s Guide March 2007 expand Arguments TABLE 5 12 Arguments for delete l
37. displays when a command is run If this occurs use out of band management to access Sun StorEdge CLI For details see Device Names for Out of Band Communication on page 11 Device Names for Out of Band Communication To access a RAID array using its out of band network interface rather than using the SCSI or FC host bus adapter HBA with which the array is connected to the host specify the oob option This option accesses the device using a local HBA only briefly to retrieve the array s network address and all subsequent access is done over the network Out of band communication is useful when heavy SCSI I O makes inband access slow It can also be used when the host has no path to the primary controller but can still retrieve the IP address of the array from a logical unit number LUN mapped from the secondary controller Chapter1 Overview 11 Alternately if the host on which the Sun StorEdge CLI is running is not connected to the array with a SCSI or FC HBA a URL can be specified to indicate that the Sun StorEdge CLI should connect to the remote array over the network In out of band management the device name is typically specified as a URL in the format se3000 hostname or address port TABLE1 3 Out of Band Device Name Syntax Syntax Description se3000 Optionally use this prefix to ensure that the string that follows is interpreted only as a host name and not as a device name hostname or a
38. f or force command to download the firmware unconditionally This procedure can be performed live without resetting the controller However the updated firmware version number might not correctly display in the firmware Telnet or serial menu interface until the controller is reset Syntax download safte firmware f force filename Arguments TABLE6 4 Arguments for download safte firmware Argument Description orce Specify the firmware is downloaded unconditionally regardless of the version detected filename Specify the firmware file name for the file that you want to download Examples The following example downloads SAF TE firmware to the SAF TE device in the RAID controller sccli c2t0d0 download safte firmware saftefw 3310 1180 bin The following example downloads SAF TE firmware to the SAF TE device in the JBOD sccli dev es ses2 download safte firmware saftefw 3310 1180 bin Sun StorEdge 3000 Family CLI 2 4 User s Guide March 2007 download sata path controller firmware Description Sun StorEdge 3000 family SATA devices only The download sata path controller firmware command downloads the path controller microcode that resides on the multiplexer MUX boards behind the SATA router Before downloading the SATA path controller firmware the Sun StorEdge CLI checks the redundancy of all SATA routers If the configuration is redundant then a live upgrade hot download
39. gt aves cgkckckck EK ERE KR KER EK RR ERK K K Kk K K K k K RARA RENA ERRE RARA k k K K KX ok o lt wwn element c eu KEH KK ERE c kckokck K kckckckck K K Ck H E KH koh kck k RARE RARA kokck K H Kk H ko RARA Kk Kk kx mA lt ELEMENT wwn PCDATA gt lt gt lt inter controller link element include gt eue idx lt slot gt Slas ch gt lt ch_mode gt lt bypass_status gt cc VK K H F V E K V V E VT VH V V HK F V kck koK kockckcok Kok kok V V He VX Ve K H X Ve Ve Te VK KH kc k V K H Ve K Ve k a lt ELEMENT inter_controller_link idx slot ch ch mode bypass status lt KEK KKK KKK KEK KEK KEK KEK KEK KEK K VD KKK V F K KKK V K H KKK K K K Ek KKH ko ko ko Kk k k lt slot element gt lt H Te XR H Fe VH V Ve V Zl Ve Ve Ve H V V V RE ERE V deck K FC Ve K Ve dec he LE e K Eod H E KH e T k RAE gt lt ELEMENT slot PCDATA gt lt ckckckock ko kckokckchckok KK k KKK kockck K K K kc hckck K kK kK ok XK K kckck K XK K K k K K K K k K Kk K k Sos lt ch_mode element gt eu FREE K Kk k K VK K kok Kc kckckckck o kck V K K V KH K K V Kk KH
40. id is the SCSI ID of the device and m to 7 represents a contiguous range of IDs on the same channel For example 2 0 2 3 or 2 2 5 channel ch Shows all disks on the specified channel all Shows all disk drives free Shows all unassigned disks b buffer Shows the disk buffer size size 98 Sun StorEdge 3000 Family CLI 2 4 User s Guide March 2007 Examples The following example returns information for disks ID 0 ID 3 and ID 7 on channel 2 sccli c2t0d0 show disks 2 0 2 3 2 7 The following example returns information for disks on channel 2 for disks 3 through 7 and for channel 1 disk 4 sccli c2t0d0 show disks 2 3 7 1 4 The following example shows all disk information sccli gt show disks Id Ch 10 Size Speed LD Status IDs Rev 33 92GB 200MB NONE FRMT SEAGATE ST336752FSUN36G 0205 S N 3ETONOV000007303 WWNN 20000004CFAB138F Mirror 2 3 33 92GB 200MB 1d0 ONLINE SEAGATE ST336753FSUN36G 0349 S N 3HX0YEJT00007349 WWNN 2000000C50332BFD Mirror 2 6 33 92GB 200MB 1d0 ONLINE SEAGATE ST336753FSUN36G 0349 S N 3HX0Y6J300007349 WWNN 2000000C503335DC Mirror 2 7 33 92GB 200MB 1d0 ONLINE SEAGATE ST336753FSUN36G 0349 S N 3HX0YC1Y00007349 WWNN 2000000C503334A Mirror 2 8 33 92GB 200MB 1d0 ONLINE SEAGATE ST336753FSUN36G 0349 S N 3HX0Y7W100007349 WWNN 2000000C50332BBE Mirror 2 9 33 92GB 200MB NONE FRMT SEAGATE ST336753FSUN36G 0349 S N 3HX0YAQF00007349 WWNN 2000000C50333AB8
41. is performed Caution All download commands are potentially dangerous If the configuration is not redundant the user cannot perform a live upgrade Since routers can cause critical damage to the RAID system in a non redundant configuration the controller must be shut down before the download and must be reset after the download In single controller and non redundant configurations the Sun StorEdge CLI prompts the user to continue If the user specifies v at the prompt the Sun StorEdge CLI shuts down the controller performs the download and then resets the controller When the controller shuts down the host is prevented from performing I O for several minutes Note To manually check the array redundancy run a show sata router command Two routers are assigned to the same chassis in a redundant configuration The Encl SN column displays the same chassis serial number for both routers For details on the show sata router command see show sata router on page 172 Syntax download sata path controller firmware filename Arguments TABLE6 5 Arguments for download sata path controller firmware Argument Description filename Specify the firmware file name for the file that you want to download Chapter 6 Firmware Show and Download Commands 181 Examples The following example downloads the path controller firmware to all SATA routers sccli 192 168 0 1 download sata path controll
42. ld id gt lt 1 ld idx gt 1 assignment gt status lt raid_level gt lt number_of_drives lt physical_drive gt 1 size gt lt total_partitions gt xe partition gt lt gt lt ELEMENT logical drive ld id ld idx assignment status raid level number of drives physical drive Size total partitions partition write policy block size lt KEK KKK KK KKK KEKE KKK KEK KKK KK KKK KEK KEK KKK KKK KKK KKK KKK KK ko ko ko ko koX gt lt write_policy element lt K VI H TK K KKK KEK KEKE KKK KEK KKK KK KKK KEK H HH VK Ve H KKK H K VK ck KF k kK HHF ko ko ko Kk K E lt ELEMENT write policy PCDATA gt lt KEK KKK k k k k k k k k k k k k k k k k k k k k k k k k k k k k k k k k k k k k k k k k k k k k k x xk x lt block size element lt KEK KKK KKK KKK KKK KEK KEK KEK KEK KEK KEK KEK KEK KKK KKK kkk kk KKK k k kk kx ko ko k k kx k gt lt ELEMENT block_size PCDATA gt lt KEKE KKK KKK KKK KKK KKK KEKE KKK KKK Y K H Y H F K YH KKK K Kk ck ck K ko ck ko K k ko ko K koX gt lt 1d_id element lt KEK V
43. page 86 show rs232 display serial port X X X X configuration on configuration page 31 show safte device display status of SAF TE X X on page 170 devices show sata mux on display the SATA MUX X page 171 board information for all drives show sata router display all accessible SATA X on page 172 routers behind the RAID controller show ses devices display status of SES devices X X on page 173 including the PLD revision show shutdown display the controller X X X X status on page 86 shutdown status Appendix A Summary of Sun StorEdge CLI Options and Commands 193 TABLEA 2 Platform support for RAID Array Commands Continued Sun Sun Sun Sun StorEdge StorEdge StorEdge StorEdge 3510 FC 3511 SATA 3310 SCSI 3320 SCSI Command Page Number Function Array Array Array Array show stripe size display the valid stripeblock X X X X list on page 150 size list for the specified RAID level show unique display subsystem six digit X X X X identifier on unique identifier page 87 shutdown shut down controller X X X X controller on prepare for power off page 88 shutdown logical shut down force offline a X X X X drive on page 151 logical drive anconfigure unconfigure a global spare X X X X global spare on drive page 102 unconfigure local unconfigure a local spare X X X X spare on page 152 drive unfail on page 89 restore deassert a failed X X X X controller unmap partition unmap a l
44. status gt lt device gt lt device gt lt name gt Boardl Temp Sensor secondary lt name gt lt value gt 48 00C lt value gt lt status gt within safety range lt status gt lt device gt lt device gt lt name gt Board2 Temp Sensor secondary lt name gt lt value gt 55 00C lt value gt status within safety range lt status gt lt device gt lt device gt lt name gt 3 3V Value secondary lt name gt lt value gt 3 352V lt value gt lt status gt within safety range lt status gt lt device gt lt device gt lt name gt 5V Value secondary lt name gt lt value gt 5 072V lt value gt lt status gt within safety range lt status gt lt device gt lt device gt lt name gt 12V Value secondary lt name gt lt value gt 12 199V lt value gt lt status gt within safety range lt status gt lt device gt lt device gt lt name gt Battery Backup Battery secondary lt name gt lt value gt 00 lt value gt lt status gt N A lt status gt lt device gt lt peripheral_device_status gt 248 Sun StorEdge 3000 Family CLI 2 4 User s Guide March 2007 array param verify on init Disabled verify on init verify on rebuild Disabled verify on rebuild verify on normal Disabled verify on normal rebuild priority Low rebuild priority array param drive param sgcsi motor spin up Disabled scsi motor spin up disk
45. 0 encl_sn 07ECE4 ch 2 slot upper rev DP0579 boot_rev 0548 csb 0500 hw_rev 11 st_rev 0552 gt lt sata_router gt sata router encl_id 0 encl_sn 07ECE4 ch 3 slot lower rev DP0579 boot_rev 0548 csb 0500 hw_rev 11 st_rev 0552 gt lt sata_router gt lt total_sata_mux gt 23 lt to lt sata_mux ch 3 id 0 pc150_boot 0300 gt lt sa lt sata_mux ch 3 id 1 pc150_boot 0300 gt lt sa lt sata_mux ch 3 id 2 pc150_boot 0300 gt lt sa lt sata_mux Ch 3 id 3 pc150_boot 0300 gt lt sa lt sata_mux ch 3 id 4 pc150_boot 0300 gt lt sa lt sata_mux ch 3 id 5 pc150_boot 0300 gt lt sa lt sata_mux ch 3 id 6 pc150_boot 0300 gt lt sa lt sata_mux ch 3 id 7 pc150_boot 0300 gt lt sa lt sata_mux ch 3 id 8 pc150_boot 0300 gt lt sa lt sata_mux ch 3 id 9 pc150_boot 0300 gt lt sa tal_sata_mux gt mux sn n a mux_type A A pc150_rev BB0OD ta mux mux sn n a mux type A A pc150_rev BB42 ta mux mux sn 001C16 mux type A A pc150_rev BB42 ta mux mux sn 0014EB mux type A A pc150_rev BB42 ta mux mux sn n a mu type A A pc150_rev BB42 ta mux mux Sn 000AD4 mux type A A pc150_rev BB42 ta mux mux sn n a mu type A A pc150_rev BB42 ta mux mus Sn 001EOA mus type A A pc150_rev BB42 ta mux mux sn n a mu type A A pc150_rev BB42 ta mux mux sn 00D7FB mux typ
46. 3 channel lt id gt 14 lt id gt lt type gt SDISK lt type gt lt SignalLoss gt 0 lt SignalLoss gt lt InvalidTransWords gt 0 lt InvalidTransWords gt InvalidCRC 0 InvalidCRC sata device statistics gata device statistics channel 3 channel Appendix C Show Configuration Command Output 275 lt id gt 16 lt id gt lt type gt SDISK lt type gt lt SignalLoss gt 0 lt SignalLoss gt lt InvalidTransWords gt 0 lt InvalidTransWords gt lt InvalidCRC gt 0 lt InvalidCRCc gt lt sata_device_statistics gt lt sata_device_statistics gt lt channel gt 3 lt channel gt lt id gt 17 lt id gt lt type gt SDISK lt type gt lt SignalLoss gt 0 lt SignalLoss gt lt InvalidTransWords gt 0 lt InvalidTransWords gt InvalidCRC 0 InvalidCRC sata device statistics sata device statistics lt channel gt 3 lt channel gt lt id gt 18 lt id gt lt type gt SDISK lt type gt lt SignalLoss gt 0 lt SignalLoss gt lt InvalidTransWords gt 0 lt InvalidTransWords gt InvalidCRC 0 InvalidCRC sata device statistics sata device statistics lt channel gt 3 lt channel gt lt id gt 19 lt id gt lt type gt SDISK lt type gt lt SignalLoss gt 0 lt SignalLoss gt lt InvalidTransWords gt 0 lt InvalidTransWords gt InvalidCRC 0 InvalidCRC sata device statistics sata device statistics channel 3 channel lt id gt 20 lt
47. Any time logical volumes are created or deleted the numbering of logical volume indexes might change After creating or deleting logical volumes issue a show logical volumes command to view an updated list of logical volume indexes Or use logical volume IDs which do not change over the lifetime of the logical volume rather than logical volume indexes 14 Sun StorEdge 3000 Family CLI 2 4 User s Guide March 2007 Note In contrast in the firmware application the LG number on the View and Edit Logical Drives menu is not dynamic After a logical volume is deleted you see an empty placeholder This example lists logical volumes using the local volume identifier 52AD5DEB 472C1397 E2054317 This example lists logical volumes using the local volume index number 1v0 1v1 1v2 Device Capacity In the Sun StorEdge CLI all device capacity is displayed in powers of 1024 1 Kbyte 1024 bytes 1 Mbyte 1024 Kbyte 1 048 576 bytes 1 Gbyte 1024 Mbyte 1 073 741 824 bytes 1 Tbyte 1024 Gbyte 1 099 511 627 776 bytes Chapter1 Overview 15 16 Sun StorEdge 3000 Family CLI 2 4 User s Guide March 2007 CHAPTER 2 System Function Commands This chapter provides the available system function commands with sample code Topics covered in this chapter include Basic Commands on page 18 Network Commands on page 21 Component Status Commands on page 31 Configuration Commands on page 49 Event Mess
48. Appendix C Show Configuration Command Output 227 lt gt lt array_param element The RAID system array info includes gt verify on init gt Sos verify on rebuild gt lt verify_on_normal gt 1 rebuild priority gt lt mS lt ELEMENT array param verify on init verify on rebuild verify on normal rebuild priority lt KEK KEKE KKK KEK KEK KEK KE KKK KE KKK KE KKK KEKE KKK KEK KEK KKK ko ck k k Xk X k Kk ko kk k Kx x gt lt verify_on_init element can be Enable Disable gt lt KEK KKK KKK kk k k KEK KEKE KKK k Kk k k k k k k k k k gt k k k k Kk K k k k ck k k ck ko Kk ko ko ko k x k E lt ELEMENT verify on init PCDATA gt lt XK EK KKK K K k kk H X K K K Kk k Kk KHK kK Kk k K Kk K K kk kK K K K RARE RARA RE RA RR Des lt verify on rebuild element can be Enable Disable gt lt KR KKK KKK XK X KEKE Hk K KKK K k HK k KKK KEK X K K Y KKK KH k k c
49. Commands 149 150 Examples The following example shows the progress of the media check sccli gt show media check Ch ID Iteration Status 2 complete 2 complete 2 complete 2 complete show stripe size list Description The show stripe size list command displays the valid stripe block size list for the specified RAID level To set the stripe size for an individual logical drive use the create logical drive command For details see create logical drive on page 131 Note Once data is written to logical drives the only way to change the stripe size is to back up all data to another location delete all logical configurations of drives reconfigure the logical drive with the stripe size and reboot the array Syntax show stripe size list raid level Arguments TABLE 5 19 Arguments for show stripe size list Argument Description raid level Specify the RAID level to display the corresponding stripe block size Valid values raid0 raid1 raid3 raidb5 Sun StorEdge 3000 Family CLI 2 4 User s Guide March 2007 Examples The following example shows the stripe block list for RAID5 sccli gt show stripe size list raid5 raid5 stripe sizes 16KB 32KB 64KB 128KB 256KB raid5 stripe size default 128KB shutdown logical drive Description The shutdown logical drive command guarantees that all the data is written to the disk drives so the disk drives can be saf
50. Controller Initialization Completed Thu Apr 10 05 53 33 2003 Primary Notification LG 0 Logical Drive NOTICE Starting Parity Regeneration To show the last 10 events for a controller type sccli c2t0d0 show events last 10 show persistent events Description Out of band connections only The show persistent events command displays the events recorded in disk reserved space When a controller is reset or power cycled all events are moved to disk reserved space and can only be viewed with this command Unlike regular events in the controller cache that display with the show events command persistent events are not erased from the cache when the controller is reset or power cycled However only 512 events can be stored This command must be issued out of band For details see Device Names for Out of Band Communication on page 11 To view current events or any events that have occurred since the last reset or power cycle use the show events command For details see show events on page 64 Syntax show persistent events from date to date Chapter 2 System Function Commands 65 Arguments TABLE2 22 Arguments for show persistent events Argument Description date Specify the date for the events you want to display in the format MMDDhhmmYYYYss or mm dd yy If no DD value is entered the default value is 1 If no hh mm or ss value is entered the default value is 0 If no YYY is entered the
51. I O parameters X X X X parameters on page 117 show host wwn display all registered HBA X X names on page 27 WWNs in the controller for host channels show inquiry data display SCSI inquiry data for X X X X on page 82 selected device Appendix A Summary of Sun StorEdge CLI Options and Commands 191 TABLEA 2 Platform support for RAID Array Commands Continued Sun Sun Sun Sun StorEdge StorEdge StorEdge StorEdge 3510 FC 3511SATA 3310 SCSI 3320 SCSI Command Page Number Function Array Array Array Array show inter display status of inter X X controller link on controller link on specified page 118 channel show ip address display the controller s IP X X X X on page 28 network address show led status display the status of the LED X X X X on page 101 adjacent to the specified disk drive slot in the array enclosure or expansion chassis show logical display logical drives X X X X drive on page 142 show logical display the status of disks X X X X drives add disk on that are being added to a page 144 logical drive show logical display the progress of the X X X X drives expanding logical drive expansion on page 144 show logical display the progress of the X X X X drives RAID controller initialization initializing an page 145 show logical display information about X X X X drives logical for all logical drives in a volume on page 146 specified logical volume show logical dis
52. K H K K koh RARA Kk RARA K Kk gt lt ELEMENT ch mode PCDATA gt zi dede ZH AH SE Oa ZV Ze V VEIR Re Ze Ve V F lt V Xxx DAD RFE de KHK K H V de d K Z K ES lt bypass_status element gt Te gt lt ELEMENT bypass status PCDATA gt Appendix C Show Configuration Command Output 233 Ckkckckck ck ck ckck kckck k k k k k k kX k k k k k k k k k k k k k k k k k k k k kK k kK k k kX k k k k k k k X K kk gt lt battery_status element battery status info includes gt 1 name gt lt type gt 1 manufacturing date gt lt placed_in_service gt lt lt ELEMENT battery_status name type manufacturing_date placed_in service lt KEK KKK k k k k k k k k k k k k k k k k k k k k k k k k k k k k k k k k k k k k k k k k k k k ko k xk xk x lt placed in service element gt lt KEK KKK KKK KKK KKK kkk k Kk kx k XK Kk k k kK k k kx Kk Kk k KEKE Kk k K KKK KKK ck k k ko ko ko k koX LEA lt ELEMENT placed in service PCDATA gt lt
53. Messages Abort checking media failed Abort checking parity failed Abort clone failed Abort creating logical drive failed Abort expanding logical drive failed Abort rebuilding logical drive failed Access device failure Adding disk failed Adding disk only applicable on raid0 raidl raid3 raid5 Another disk or logical drive operation under progress or not applicable operation for current disk or logical drive status Assigned Bad connection to the Primary Agent Bad data returned from controller Bad event data Bad firmware data for download Bad fru id data 197 TABLE B 1 Sun StorEdge CLI Error and Status Messages Continued Error and Status Messages Bad logical drive channel number Bad logical drive id in library database Bad logical drive index in library database Bad logical host channel number Bad logical volume id in library database Bad logical volume index in library database Bad parameter specified Bad parameters specified Bad physical channel number Bad ses configuration page Bad socket error Bad status returned Battery board does not exist Battery board FRU ID not programmed Battery type too old Can not configure SIDs on single controller environment Check media failed Check parity failed Check parity only applicable on raidl raid3 raid5 Clear events failure Clone failed Clone only applicable on raid0 raidl raid3 raid5 Close file failure Close inband outband device error Confi
54. RAID CTLR 512MB MEM BATT Part Number 370 5403 Serial Number 007725 Revision 02Revision 02 Initial Hardware Dash Level 02 FRU Shortname 370 5522 Manufacturing Date Wed Jul 16 19 24 30 2003 Manufacturing Location Milpitas California USA Manufacturer JEDEC ID 0x0301 FRU Location PRIMARY CONTROLLER SLOT Chassis Serial Number 002A4C FRU Status OK Name SEC RAID CONTROLLER Description SE3310 LVD RAID CTLR 512MB MEM BATT Part Number 370 5403 Serial Number 006550 Revision 02 Manufacturing Date Thu Jul 17 19 24 47 2003 Manufacturing Location Milpitas California USA Manufacturer JEDEC ID 0x0301 FRU Location SECONDARY CONTROLLER SLOT Chassis Serial Number 002A4C FRU Status OK 7 FRUs found in chassis SN 002A4C at ch 0 id 14 Name RAID CHASSIS BKPLN Description Minnow BOX RAID LVD Chassis Bkpln Part Number 370 5524 Serial Number 002A4C Revision 01 Manufacturing Date Thu Jun 26 15 15 17 2003 Manufacturing Location Milpitas CA USA Manufacturer JEDEC ID 0x0301 FRU Location SCSI RAID MIDPLANE SLOT Chassis Serial Number 002A4C FRU Status OK 46 Sun StorEdge 3000 Family CLI 2 4 User s Guide March 2007 Returned Values The returned status values for the show frus command are described in the following table TABLE2 15 FRU Status Values Status Description OK All subcomponents of this FRU have a status of OK
55. SATA devices downloading path controller firmware for 181 downloading router firmware for 182 MUX boards 171 router 172 scan disk command 93 SCSI inquiry data 82 security disabling protocols 25 for inband access 110 select command 20 SES device component status 38 downloading firmware 183 viewing 173 set auto write through trigger command 32 set cache parameters command 73 set controller date command 76 set controller name command 77 set disk array command 94 set drive parameters command 108 set host parameters command 110 set inter controller link command 112 set led command 95 set logical drive command 138 set logical volume command 165 set protocol command 25 set rs232 configuration command 78 set unique identifier command 80 show access mode command 33 show auto write through trigger command 34 show bypass device command 51 show bypass RAID command 54 show bypass SFP command 55 show cache parameters command 81 show channels command 19 113 show clone command 97 show configuration command 57 207 show controller date command 81 show controller name command 82 show disk array command 97 show disks command 98 show disks logical drive command 140 show drive parameters command 115 show enclosure status command 38 show events command 64 show frus command 45 show host parameters command 117 show host wwn names command 27 show inquiry data command 82 show ip address command 28 sh
56. StorEdge 3510 FC 3511 SATA 3310 SCSI 3320 SCSI Command Page Number Function Array Array Array Array abort clone on stop the cloning of the X X X X page 90 specified disk drive abort create on stop the creation of alogical X X X X page 122 drive abort expand on stop the expansion of a X X X X page 123 logical drive abort media check stop a media check on X X X X on page 124 specified disks or all member disks of the specified logical drive abort parity stop the parity check on the X X X X check on page 125 specified logical drive abort rebuild on stop the rebuilding of a X X X X page 126 logical drive about on page 18 display program version and X X X X copyright info add disk on add one diskoralistofdisks X X X X page 126 to the specified logical drive check media on check specified disks or all X X X X page 127 member disks of the specified logical drive check parity on check device parity X X X X page 128 clear events on clear the event log X X X X page 63 clone on page 91 use a destination disk to X X X X copy and replace a drive that is suspected of failing configure channel configure a host or drive X X X X on page 106 channel configure global configure a disk as a global X X X X spare on page 92 spare configure local configure a disk as a local X X X X spare on page 130 spare for a specific logical drive 186 Sun StorEdge 3000 Family CLI 2 4 User s Guide March
57. Transfer Protocol A protocol for sending email messages between servers and from mail clients to mail servers The messages can then be retrieved with an email client using either POP or IMAP Simple Network Management Protocol A set of protocols for managing complex networks SNMP works by sending messages called protocol data units PDUs to different parts of a network SNMP compliant devices called agents store data about themselves in Management Information Bases MIBs and return this data to the SNMP requesters Making use of the firmware s striping capability to stripe data across two otherwise independent RAID logical drives The two spanned logical drives are presented to the operating system as one logical drive A drive that is marked as a spare to support automatic data rebuilding after a physical drive associated with a logical drive fails For a standby drive to take the place of another drive it must be at least equal in size to the failed drive and all of the logical drives dependent on the failed disk must be redundant RAID 1 1 0 3 and 5 The current operational status of a disk drive a logical drive or controller The RAID array stores the states of drives logical drives and the controller in its nonvolatile memory This information is retained across power interruptions This is the amount of data in kilobytes that is striped across each physical drive in a logical drive Generally large stripe sizes are mor
58. Ve H V KKK KEK KKK KKK KEK KKK H k KKK Kk X KF k kk HK k kX ko ko ko k HEY gt lt ELEMENT time_zone PCDATA gt Appendix C Show Configuration Command Output 217 kkckckckck ck kk k k k k k k k k kK k k k k k k k k k k k k k k k k k k k k k k k k k k k k k ck k k Kk k kk lt boot_time element lt BERK KEK Y K K K V K KKK RE RAREXA ck Kk K V K Kq K kc ck F K ko k kok Kk Kk H K X H K K kckckok k kk lt ELEMENT boot_time PCDATA gt lt KEK KKK KK KKK KKK KKK KEK KKK KEKE KKK KEK KEK KKK KK KK KKK KEK KKK KK ko ko ko ko koX lt name element lt kkk KKK k k k k k k k k k k k k k k k k k k k k k k k k k k k k k k k k k k k k k k k k k k k ko k xk xk x lt ELEMENT name PCDATA gt lt bE KKK KKK KKK KKK KEK KEK KEK KEK KEK KEK KEK Xk KEK KEK KEK kk k ko ck k k k kk xk ko ko ko k Kx k lt status element lt It may be one of Online Offline 1 Critical Degraded lt KEK KKK KKK KKK KKK KEK KEK KEK KEK KEK KEK KEK KEK KEKE KR KEKE KKK ck ko Kk k ck ko ko ko ko ko ko kx Kx lt ELEMENT status PCDATA gt a kzkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkk lt manufacturer element lt KEKE KK KEK KKK K kK k K K KKK Kk K X K K k XK k k K K K KKK kK RK KKK kx k k K ko K k k H ko k lt ELEMENT manufacturer PCDATA gt KEK KKK KKK Ek Kk Kk KEK KEK KEK KEK K K Kk H Kk K KKK KEK KEK K H KKK KKK KKK KK KE KEKE lt model elemen
59. WWNN WWPN Topology The Port WWN output shows m Channel m Channel ID m WWPN The Inter Controller Link ICL output shows m Channel Number m Bypass Status 212 Sun StorEdge 3000 Family CLI 2 4 User s Guide March 2007 The Battery Status output shows Name Type Manufacturing Date Placed In Service Date Expiration Date Status The SAF TE output shows Channel ID Chassis Serial Number Vendor Product ID Revision Package Revision The Enclosure Status output shows SAF TE or SES package and revision information Fan status Power supply status Temperature sensor status Disk slot status EMU status SCSI channel type The SATA router output shows Enclosure ID Enclosure serial number Channel Slot Revision Boot revision CSB revision Hardware revision The SATA MUX output shows Channel ID MUX serial number MUX type Path controller PC150 revision Path controller PC150 boot revision Appendix C Show Configuration Command Output 213 The Host WWN output shows m Host WWN The FRU information output shows Name Description Part Number Serial Number Revision Initial Hardware Dash Level FRU Shortname Manufacturing Date Manufacturing Location Manufacturer JEDEC ID FRU Location Chassis Serial Number Status The Access Mode output shows m Access mode The Controller Date output shows m Boot time m Current time m Time zone The Disk Array output
60. be required to bring it back online Are you sure yes sccli 1d3 offlined logical drive sccli gt show logical drive LD ID Size Assigned Type Disks Spare Failed Status 0043BF50 101 01GB Primary RAIDO 3 0 0 Good 025E42E1 33 67GB Primary RAID1 2 3 0 Good 05CC1F19 67 34GB Primary NRAID 2 0 0 Good 52AD5DEB 33 67GB Primary NRAID 1 0 0 ShutDown unconfigure local spare 152 Description The unconfigure local spare command removes a local spare disk as a dedicated spare disk for the specified logical drive Caution Any time logical drives are created or deleted the numbering of logical drive indexes might change After creating or deleting logical drives issue a show logical drive command to view an updated list of logical drive indexes Or use logical drive IDs which do not change over the lifetime of the logical drive rather than logical drive indexes For more information see Logical Drive Syntax on page 13 Sun StorEdge 3000 Family CLI 2 4 User s Guide March 2007 Syntax unconfigure local spare disk ld index ld id Arguments TABLE 5 21 Arguments forunconfigure local spare Argument Description disk Specify the disk to unconfigure For example specify the disk with target ID 1 on channel 2 as 2 1 ld index Specify the logical drive index number For example 143 Id id Specify the logical drive ID For example 71038221 Examples The following example unconfigures disk
61. channels on display channel X X X X page 113 configuration show clone on display the progress of disk X x X X page 97 cloning show display the RAID enclosure X X X X configuration on page 57 device s configuration 190 Sun StorEdge 3000 Family CLI 2 4 User s Guide March 2007 TABLEA 2 Platform support for RAID Array Commands Continued Sun Sun Sun Sun StorEdge StorEdge StorEdge StorEdge 3510 FC 3511 SATA 3310 SCSI 3320 SCSI Command Page Number Function Array Array Array Array show controller display the boot time and X X X X date on page 81 date of the RAID controller show controller display controller name X X X X name on page 82 show disk array display the disk array X X X X on page 97 parameters including the logical drive rebuild priority and the hard drive settings for verifying the written data for initializing rebuilding and writing normal I O data show disks on display information for array X X X X page 98 disks show disks display information for array X X X X logical drive on disks in a logical drive page 140 show drive display drive parameters X X X X parameters on page 115 show enclosure display the status for all X X X X status on page 38 chassis components including the fan power supply temperature sensor and drive slots show events on display the controller event X X X X page 64 log show frus on display FRU ID information X X X X page 45 show host display host
62. ck ckck ck kck ck k k k k k k k k k k kX k k k k ck k k k k k k kX k k k k k k k k k k kK kX kX k k k k kK k kk gt lt gateway element gt lt REE REE K k k K K K Kk k Kk K Kk Kk k RR RRA Kk k RE RENA RRE RARA k RARA K k k k gt lt ELEMENT gateway PCDATA gt e s lt com_port element The RS 232 port info gt lt It includes these elements gt lt idx the index gt lt max_bps gt lt min_bps gt lt default_bps gt current bps gt lt KEK KKK KK KKK KE KKK KEK KEKE KKK KKK KKK KEK KEK k ck ck k K kk k k KK k ko ko ko ko k Kx lt ELEMENT com_port idx max_bps min_bps default_bps current_bps gt lt KEK KKK KKK TV K KKK KEK KKK KKK KEK KKK KKK KKK Ve K HF KH Kk H K KKK ck ko ko ko ko ko ko H K HS lt max_bps element Max baud rate in BPS gt lt KEK KHK KK k K K K KKK KEK V K KKK KKK Ve H KKK V H K KH K KH VK KHK X KF k k H K k k k K k k KK cT ELEMENT max bps PCDATA gt lt KEK KKK KKK KEK KEK KEK KEKE KKK KKK k k k k kk kkk k Kk k K k k k x k k Kk k k ko ko ko k ko ko koX gt lt min bps element Min baud rate in BPS gt lt EXAAER
63. default value is the current year Examples The following example displays the events from October 26 to October 27 No persistent events occurred on October 26 sccli 206 6 181 214 show persistent events from 1026 to 1027 Sccli selected se3000 206 6 181 214 58632 SUN StorEdge 3310 SN 000001 Wed Oct 27 11 28 42 2004 Primary Notification Controller Initialization Completed Wed Oct 27 11 28 43 2004 Secondary Notification Controller Initialization Completed The following example shows all events from November 24 2004 sccli 206 6 181 214 show persistent events from 11 24 04 Sccli selected se3000 206 6 111 111 58632 SUN StorEdge 3310 SN 000001 Wed Nov 24 14 18 57 2004 Primary Notification SAF TE Device 0 NOTICE Fan Back On Line Idx 1 Wed Nov 24 14 18 57 2004 Primary Notification SAF TE Device 0 NOTICE Power Supply Back On Line Idx 0 66 Sun StorEdge 3000 Family CLI 2 4 User s Guide March 2007 CHAPTER 3 Controller and Disk Commands This chapter provides the available controller and disk commands with sample code Topics covered in this chapter include m Controller Commands on page 68 m Disk Commands on page 90 Note To prevent unauthorized access to administrative functions of the RAID controller the Sun StorEdge CLI requires superuser or system administrator privileges for inband access and uses the controller password to authorize users of
64. docs Network Storage Solutions Workgroup If you have technical questions about this product that are not answered in the documentation go to http www sSun com service contacting To initiate or check on a USA only service request contact Sun support at 800 USA 4SUN To obtain international technical support contact the sales office of each country at http www sun com service contacting sales html Preface xv 508 Accessibility Features The Sun StorEdge documentation is available in Section 508 compliant HTML files that can be used with assistive technology programs for visually impaired personnel These files are provided on the Documentation CD for your product as well as on the web sites identified in the previous Accessing Sun Documentation section Additionally the software and firmware applications provide keyboard navigation and shortcuts which are documented in the user s guides xvi Sun Welcomes Your Comments Sun is interested in improving its documentation and welcomes your comments and suggestions You can submit your comments by going to http www sun com hwdocs feedback Please include the title and part number of your document with your feedback Sun StorEdge 3000 Family CLI 2 4 User s Guide part number 817 4951 17 Sun StorEdge 3000 Family CLI 2 4 User s Guide March 2007 CHAPTER 1 Overview This chapter introduces the Sun StorEdge Command Line Interface Sun StorEdge CLI a
65. drive ID 5 on channel 2 as a local spare for the logical drive with index number 2 sccli c2t0d0 unconfigure local spare 2 5 1d2 The following example unconfigures disk drive ID 5 on channel 2 as a local spare for the logical drive with ID 2C33AAEA sccli c2t0d0 unconfigure local spare 2 5 2C33AAEA Partition Commands The following commands are explained in this section configure partition map partition show lun maps show partitions unmap partition Chapter 5 Logical Drive Partition and Logical Volume Commands 153 configure partition Description The configure partition command specifies how much disk space to assign to the partition or deletes a specified partition When a logical drive or logical volume is created it is automatically assigned to partition 0 Syntax configure partition partition size delete Arguments TABLE 5 22 Arguments for configure partition Argument Description partition ID Specify a combination of LD ID LV ID and partition number in XXXXXXXX PP format where XXXXXXXX represents the Logical Drive Volume ID or a combination of LD LV Index and partition number in ld X Iv X PP format where LD LV Index is the Logical Drive Volume Index number PP is a two digital hexidecimal number that represents the partition number Size Specify the partition size in MB such as 4000MB To delete a partition specify a size of 0 Or use the delete keyword
66. file systems that are mounted from the array In redundant controller configurations these commands affect all LUNs on both controllers After running a reset command to stay in prompt mode run the select command to reselect the device Note If the value 0 is specified it is interpreted as a request to set the controller unique ID to match the chassis serial number which is obtained from the enclosure services device in the chassis Syntax set unique identifier number Examples The following example sets the controller unique identifier as 0x1234 sccli c2t0d0 set unique identifier 0x1234 The following example sets the controller unique identifier to the default value based on the chassis serial number This command must be followed by the reset controller command before the change takes effect sccli c2t0d0 set unique identifier 0 Sun StorEdge 3000 Family CLI 2 4 User s Guide March 2007 show cache parameters Description The show cache parameters command displays the RAID controller parameters that influence the performance of the read write cache Returned values include write policy write through or write back optimization mode random or sequential periodic cache synchronization period and current global write policy write through or write back For details on setting the cache parameters see set cache parameters on page 73 Syntax show cache parameters Examples
67. following example specifies that the DHCP protocol be used to establish an IP address sccli c2t0d0 configure network interface Lann dhcp host wwn name Description Sun StorEdge 3000 family FC and SATA devices only The create host wwn name command creates a list of Host ID worldwide name WWN entries to associate a symbolic name with a host worldwide port name WWPN This enables the user to use the symbolic name instead of the numeric WWPN when creating host LUN filters To review the available WWPN values run the show port wwn command For details see show port wwn on page 29 Note A maximum of 64 host WWN entries can be created Syntax create host wwn name wwn name position Chapter 2 System Function Commands 23 24 delete Arguments TABLE 2 3 Arguments for create host wwn name Argument Description wwn Specify a WWPN corresponding to a host bus adapter expressed as a 16 digit hexadecimal number name Specify a symbolic name for the host bus adapter Names that contain special characters such as spaces must be enclosed in double quotation marks position Specify a number representing the position in the list of names where this name will appear To add the WWN to the top of the WWN list specify head To add the WWN to the bottom of the WWN list specify tail Examples The following example creates the alias sun hba 1 for the HBA WWPN value 210000e08b095562 sccli c2
68. gt lt LinkFail gt 0 lt LinkFail gt lt SyncLoss gt 0 lt SyncLoss gt lt SignalLoss gt 0 lt SignalLoss gt lt PrimitiveSequence gt 0 lt PrimitiveSequence gt lt InvalidTransWords gt 0 lt InvalidTransWords gt InvalidCRC 0 InvalidCRC device statistics device statistics lt channel gt 3 lt channel gt lt id gt 14 lt id gt lt type gt RAID lt type gt lt reset gt 0 lt reset gt lt LinkFail gt 0 lt LinkFail gt lt SyncLoss gt 0 lt SyncLoss gt lt SignalLoss gt 0 lt SignalLoss gt lt PrimitiveSequence gt 0 lt PrimitiveSequence gt lt InvalidTransWords gt 0 lt InvalidTransWords gt InvalidCRC 0 InvalidCRC device statistics device statistics lt channel gt 3 lt channel gt lt id gt 16 lt id gt lt type gt SDISK lt type gt lt reset gt 0 lt reset gt lt LinkFail gt 0 lt LinkFail gt lt SyncLoss gt 0 lt SyncLoss gt lt SignalLoss gt 0 lt SignalLoss gt lt PrimitiveSequence gt 0 lt PrimitiveSequence gt lt InvalidTransWords gt 0 lt InvalidTransWords gt InvalidCRC 0 InvalidCRC device statistics device statistics channel 3 channel lt id gt 17 lt id gt lt type gt SDISK lt type gt lt reset gt 0 lt reset gt 270 Sun StorEdge 3000 Family CLI 2 4 Users Guide March 2007 lt LinkFail gt 0 lt LinkFail gt lt SyncLoss gt 0 lt SyncLoss gt lt SignalLoss gt 0 lt SignalLoss gt lt PrimitiveSequence gt 0
69. id Failed to read fru id Failed to remove logical drive Failed to remove logical volume Failed to reset sata router via specified ses target Failed to reset timeout Failed to scan fru id Failed to scan safte Failed to scan ses target Failed to send ses page Failed to set battery all information Failed to set battery in service date Failed to set cache parameters Failed to set channel data Failed to set controller network interface Failed to set drive side parameters Failed to set host side parameters Failed to set peripheral configuration Failed to set redundant controller configuration Failed to set sata serial connector Failed to set statistics Failed to set write policy Failed to set reset caching statistics Failed to set reset channel statistics Failed to set reset controller statistics Failed to set reset drive statistics Failed to set reset host statistics Failed to show drive side parameters Failed to show host side parameters Failed to show logical volumes Appendix B Error and Event Messages 201 TABLEB 1 Gun StorEdge CLI Error and Status Messages Continued Error and Status Messages Failed to show mapping on host channel Failed to unbypass a device Failed to unbypass sfp Failed to unmap partition from host channel Failed to upload nvram Filter map exist Firmware download failure Firmware download failure on one or more drives see status report above for failures Fir
70. k kK k k k kK k X k ck ck k ck k ck k kX k kk gt lt type element Channel type can be SCSI PCI FC lt KkkKkk k k k k k k k kK k kK k kK k kK k k k k k k k k k k k k kK k k k k kK k k k k k k ck k k k k k k X k kk gt lt ELEMENT type PCDATA gt lt Kkk kk k k k k kK k k kK k kK k k k k k kX k k k k k kK k k k k kK k k k k k k kK k k k k k ck k k k k ck k kX k kk gt lt pid element PID of this channel lt Ck kckck ck k k k k k kK k k k k k k k k k k k k k k k k k k kK k k k k k k kK k k k k k k k k k k k k k X kk gt lt ELEMENT pid PCDATA gt 222 Sun StorEdge 3000 Family CLI 2 4 User s Guide March 2007 kk ck ckck ck kkk k k k k k k k k Xk k kX k k k k ck ck k k kK k k k kX k k k k k k k k k k kX k k k k k kK k kk gt lt sid element SID of this channel gt lt KK K a K K X REE RE RRE K K K kK K K K RE RARE RARE RK K Kk RE K X K k k K ck K k k k gt lt ELEMENT sid PCDATA gt lt KEK KKK KKK V Ze K KKK KKK KKK KEK KKK KKK KEK KKK KKK KKK KKK KEKE KK ko ko ko K ko lt defclk element Default clock gt lt KEK KKK KKK KKK KKK KEK KEK KEK KEK KKK KKK KEK KEK KEK KKK KKK KEK KKK KK ko K ko ko ko lt ELEMENT defclk PCDATA gt lt EXARARERERERERERERERERERE RRE RRE RE kokok ERE RARA RARA k kx Kk k Kx gt lt defwid element Default width gt
71. ko K ko aa lt ELEMENT peripheral_device event_trigger_operation_enables temperature exceeded delay gt lt KEK KKK KKK KEK KEK K Y KEK KK KKK H H KEK KKK KKK KEK V K VK H V KKK KKK KK H ko ko ko ko ko ko gt lt peripheral_device_status element gt lt KEK KKK KKK K k KEK X k KEK KEK KEK K H Kk K Kk KKK KKK KEKE KKK KKK H Ek KKK ko ko Kk k ko ko K ko EIS lt ELEMENT peripheral device status device gt lt KEK KKK KK KKK KEKE KKK KEK KEKE KKK KEK KEKE KKK KEK KEKE KK KEK KKK k Kk ko ko ko k ko ko gt lt sync period element gt lt KEK KKK KKK KKK KKK k KKK KE KKK KEK KKK k Kk Kk k KKK KK k k K ck k k k k Kk ko ko ko k k ko k ko gt lt ELEMENT sync period PCDATA gt lt gt lt controller_failure element disabled or enabled lt lt gt lt ELEMENT controller failure PCDATA gt lt kckckckckckck kcok ko kckck kc kckok kokckck kck kck ko K XK K Kk Kk K kokok RARE KX k Kk X K K RARA Kk k K K K K gt l
72. ko ko k k x k E lt ELEMENT pld PCDATA gt lt K KKK KKK K Kk k K V K kK K K k KEK KEK KEK KEK k K k Kk k H KEK KEK KEK ck ck Kk k ck Hk ko Kk ko ko ko ko koX UE wwnn element lt KR KKK KEK KKK KK KKK KEK KKK KKK KKK KKK H KKK KEKE KKK K K KX Kk KKK ko ko ko Kk k k gt lt ELEMENT wwnn PCDATA gt lt KR KKK KH KKK X K k k KKK V H K K K H K HK K Yk k HF Kk Y k K K KY HK KKK KF k k KK ko ko ko ko k K zT lt wwpn element gt lt KEK EK ERE k K K KIK HK Kk IK KH kk K K k K X KK H K RE RARE K K k k RARE RA RERAR k ME ELEMENT wwpn PCDATA gt lt KEK KKK KKK KKK KKK KEK KEK KEK KEK KEK KEK KKK KK KKK KEK KKK kk k k Kk ck KK ko ko ko ko koX gt lt topology element gt lt KEK KKK KKK KEK KEKE KKK KKK KKK Kk k kk k k k k Kk k k k Kk Kk KX k KKK ko ko ck Kk ko ko ko k x k MAD lt ELEMENT topology PCDATA gt lt gt lt port_wwns element include gt port wwn gt m um lt
73. ko ko ko ko X K k K SS ELEMENT serial number PCDATA gt lt KEK KEKE KKK KEK k K K K K X KEK kK k Y H K HK k k k X K X kY KKK k K HK kk kk ck ko Kk k k ko k K k product revision element gt lt KEK KKK KKK KKK KKK KKK KKK X KKK KKK KEK KKK KKK KKK ko ck ck ck ko ck KK ko ko ko ko koX gt lt ELEMENT product_revision PCDATA gt lt KEK KKK KKK X K K H K K K K k K K KK K Kk K Kk K KEK KEK Kk KKK KEK kK Kk Kk Kk K KKK ck ko ko Kk k ko ko K k ELI lt capacity element gt lt KEY VH K E K V Ve F VA KEK KEK KKK KKK KEK KEK KEK KEK KKK KKK E K Kk ck ck ko ko ck KK ko ko ko kK kK So lt ELEMENT capacity PCDATA gt lt KEK KKK KKK KEK KKK KKK KKK KKK KEK KEK KKK KKK Z T KKK KKK KKK ck KH ko ko ko ko ko koX a gt lt remaining_size element gt x um KEK KKK KK KK KKK KEK kk S VACHE V ok kk ck ok V V ck kk Sk Ve ck V K K FV VK ck VT ko ck ko ko ko ko ko ko K K E lt ELEMENT remaining size PCDATA gt x E KEK KKK k k k k k k k k k k k k k k k k k k k k k k k k k k k k k k k k k k k k k k k k k k k k k x xk x lt Speed element gt kss gt lt ELEMENT Speed PCDATA gt RXXARERAREXA ck Aokokckckok kck kok ck
74. limited to that device If a local device file name or directory name is specified the search is limited to matching devices The output includes the device name vendor product ID and serial number A logical drive can be represented by a logical drive index a small decimal number distinguished by an ld prefix or a logical drive identifier an eight digit hexadecimal number For example a logical drive might be identified both by its logical drive index 143 and its logical drive ID 71038221 For additional information see Logical Drive Syntax on page 13 Note that these logical drive numbers do not necessarily correspond to the single digit logical drive identifiers in the firmware menu interface The Sun StorEdge CLI logical drive indexes might change when logical drives are deleted 8 Sun StorEdge 3000 Family CLI 2 4 User s Guide e March 2007 TABLE 1 2 Command Parameters and Options Continued Parameter or Option Short Form Description logical volume lv or lvs lun lv list partition Logical volumes are specified using either a logical volume index such as 1v12 or an eight digit hexadecimal logical volume ID For additional information see Logical Volume Syntax on page 14 Note that these logical volume numbers do not necessarily correspond to the single digit logical volume identifiers in the firmware menu interface The Sun StorEdge CLI logical volume indexes might change when logical volume
75. lt PrimitiveSequence gt lt InvalidTransWords gt 0 lt InvalidTransWords gt InvalidCRC 0 InvalidCRC device statistics device statistics channel 3 channel lt id gt 18 lt id gt lt type gt SDISK lt type gt lt reset gt 0 lt reset gt lt LinkFail gt 0 lt LinkFail gt lt SyncLoss gt 0 lt SyncLoss gt lt SignalLoss gt 0 lt SignalLoss gt lt PrimitiveSequence gt 0 lt PrimitiveSequence gt lt InvalidTransWords gt 0 lt InvalidTransWords gt InvalidCRC 0 InvalidCRC device statistics device statistics lt channel gt 3 lt channel gt lt id gt 19 lt id gt lt type gt SDISK lt type gt lt reset gt 0 lt reset gt lt LinkFail gt 0 lt LinkFail gt lt SyncLoss gt 0 lt SyncLoss gt lt SignalLoss gt 0 lt SignalLoss gt lt PrimitiveSequence gt 0 lt PrimitiveSequence gt lt InvalidTransWords gt 0 lt InvalidTransWords gt InvalidCRC 0 InvalidCRC device statistics device statistics channel 3 channel id 20 id lt type gt SDISK lt type gt lt reset gt 0 lt reset gt lt LinkFail gt 0 lt LinkFail gt lt SyncLoss gt 0 lt SyncLoss gt lt SignalLoss gt 0 lt SignalLoss gt lt PrimitiveSequence gt 0 lt PrimitiveSequence gt lt InvalidTransWords gt 0 lt InvalidTransWords gt InvalidCRC 0 InvalidCRC device statistics device statistics lt channel gt 3 lt channel gt Appendix C Show Configuration Command Ou
76. lt status gt lt port_number gt 161 lt port_number gt lt network_protocol gt lt network_protocol gt lt identifier gt DHCP lt identifier gt lt status gt enabled lt status gt lt port_number gt 68 lt port_number gt lt network_protocol gt lt network_protocol gt lt identifier gt Ping lt identifier gt lt status gt enabled lt status gt lt port_number gt N A lt port_number gt lt network_protocol gt lt com_port gt lt idx gt 0 lt idx gt lt max_bps gt 38400bps lt max_bps gt lt min_bps gt 2400bps lt min_bps gt lt default_bps gt 38400bps lt default_bps gt lt current_bps gt 38400bps lt current_bps gt lt com_port gt lt cache_param gt lt write_policy gt write back lt write_policy gt lt sync_period gt Disabled lt sync_period gt lt current_global_write_policy gt write back lt current_global_write_policy gt optimization Sequential I O optimization cache param 246 Sun StorEdge 3000 Family CLI 2 4 Users Guide March 2007 peripheral device event trigger operation enables controller failure enabled controller failure battery backup unit failure enabled battery backup unit failur e gt lt UPS_AC_power_loss gt disabled lt UPS_AC_power_loss gt lt power_supply_failure gt enabled lt power_supply_failure gt lt fan_failure gt enabled lt fan_failure gt lt event_trigger_operation_enables gt lt temperature exceeded delay gt 30min
77. lt temperature exceeded delay gt lt peripheral_device gt lt peripheral_device_status gt lt device gt lt name gt CPU Temp Sensor primary lt name gt lt value gt 35 50C lt value gt lt status gt within safety range lt status gt lt device gt lt device gt lt name gt Boardl Temp Sensor primary lt name gt lt value gt 41 50C lt value gt lt status gt within safety range lt status gt lt device gt lt device gt lt name gt Board2 Temp Sensor primary lt name gt lt value gt 52 00C lt value gt lt status gt within safety range lt status gt lt device gt lt device gt lt name gt 3 3V Value primary lt name gt value 3 432V value lt status gt within safety range lt status gt lt device gt lt device gt lt name gt 5V Value primary lt name gt lt value gt 5 099V lt value gt lt status gt within safety range lt status gt lt device gt lt device gt lt name gt 12V Value primary lt name gt lt value gt 12 320V lt value gt lt status gt within safety range lt status gt lt device gt Appendix C Show Configuration Command Output 247 device lt name gt Battery Backup Battery primary lt name gt lt value gt 06 lt value gt lt status gt N A lt status gt lt device gt lt device gt lt name gt CPU Temp Sensor secondary lt name gt lt value gt 40 00C lt value gt lt status gt within safety range lt
78. map partition Description The map partition command maps a partition to the specified host channel target and LUN on the specified controller To review host channel assignments run the show channels command For more information see show channels on page 113 To review LUN maps see show lun maps on page 158 Note In redundant controller configurations the specified channel and target must be valid on the controller to which the specified logical drive or volume is assigned For example to map a partition to the primary controller in a FC array the logical drive or logical volume must be assigned to a primary channel ID Note A maximum of 32 partitions per logical drive can be created And a maximum of 64 host WWN entries can be created Chapter 5 Logical Drive Partition and Logical Volume Commands 155 Syntax To map a partition use the following syntax map partition id channel channel number target SCSI id lun lun number wwpn host id read only read write include exclude mask name Or to map a partition use the following syntax map partition id channel target lun wwpn host id read only read write include exclude mask name Arguments TABLE 5 23 Arguments for map partition Argument Description partition ID Specify a combination of LD ID LV ID and partition number in XXXXXXXX PP format where XXXXXXXX represents the Logical Drive Volume
79. of the RAID controller the Sun StorEdge CLI requires superuser or system administrator privileges for inband access and uses the controller password to authorize users of the out of band interface Note If no device is specified on the command line and more than one array is connected to the host a menu of devices is presented with one device file name for each array If there is only one Sun StorEdge 3000 family array connected to the host that device is selected automatically Note Logical drive indexes can change whenever a logical drive is deleted while a logical drive identifier never changes over the life of the logical drive 121 Logical Drive Commands The following commands are explained in this section abort abort abort abort abort rebui show show show show show show show show show abort create crea Le expand media check pari ty check rebuild add disk check pari check media configure local spare create logical drive delete logical drive expand ld disks Uy set logical drive logical drive logical drive logical drives expanding logical drives initializing logical drives logical volume logical drives parity check logical drives rebuilding media check stripe size list Description shutdown logical drive unconfigure local spare The abort create command stops the creation of a logical drive To create a logical drive use th
80. remaining_size gt lt Speed gt 200M lt Speed gt lt ld_id gt 00000000 lt 1d_id gt lt ld_idx gt N A lt 1d_idx gt lt disk gt lt disk gt lt ch gt 3 lt ch gt lt target gt 6 lt target gt lt status gt USED lt status gt lt manufacturer gt HITACHI lt manufacturer gt lt model gt HDS7225SASUN250G lt model gt lt serial_number gt VNRJ3EC6CGXDVM lt serial_number gt lt product_revision gt A6DA lt product_revision gt lt wwnn gt 22E4000A33FFFF06 lt wwnn gt lt capacity gt 232 88GB lt capacity gt lt remaining_size gt 232 63GB lt remaining_size gt lt Speed gt 200M lt Speed gt 1d id 200000000 1d id ld idx N A ld idx lt disk gt Appendix C Show Configuration Command Output 259 disk lt ch gt 3 lt ch gt lt target gt 7 lt target gt lt status gt USED lt status gt lt manufacturer gt HITACHI lt manufacturer gt lt model gt HDS7225SASUN250G lt model gt lt serial_number gt VNRJ9HC6CTXK3M lt serial_number gt lt product_revision gt A6DA lt product_revision gt lt wwnn gt 22E4000A33001E0A lt wwnn gt lt capacity gt 232 88GB lt capacity gt lt remaining_size gt 232 63GB lt remaining_size gt lt Speed gt 200M lt Speed gt ld id 200000000 1d id lt ld_idx gt N A lt 1d_idx gt lt disk gt lt disk gt lt ch gt 3 lt ch gt lt target gt 8 lt target gt lt status gt USED lt status gt lt manufacturer gt HITACHI lt manufacturer gt
81. required after replacing a drive You might want to run a nightly script to execute the check media command rather than running the command continuously Note A firmware menu option called Media Scan at Power Up specifies whether media scan runs automatically following a controller power cycle reset or after logical drive initialization This setting is disabled by default For more information refer to the Sun StorEdge 3000 Family RAID Firmware User s Guide Chapter 5 Logical Drive Partition and Logical Volume Commands 127 You can use the abort media check command to stop a media check Note The front panel LEDs for the drives being checked will blink until the media check is finished or aborted For more information about LEDs refer to the Sun StorEdge 3000 Family Installation Operation and Service Manual for your array Syntax check media ld index ld id priority continuous Arguments TABLE5 7 Arguments for check media Argument Description Id index Specify the logical drive index number For example 143 Id id Specify the logical drive ID For example 71038221 priority Specify the priority of the disk check Valid values low normal improved high For example specify low to have the media check occur after other firmware processes complete The higher the priority selected the greater amount of system resources required to perform the media check Specify low to have
82. result in data loss unless all I O activity is suspended by halting all applications that are accessing the array and unmounting any file systems that are mounted from the array In redundant controller configurations these commands affect all LUNs on both controllers Syntax reset nvram Examples The following example shows the message prompts that are displayed when you run the reset nvram command sccli gt reset nvram WARNING The configuration of the array controller will be erased Factory default parameters will take effect at next controller reset Logical devices may not be accessible until mappings are reconfigured If your configuration contains more than 32 partitions data on partitions may no longer be accessible Are you sure show bypass device Description Note This command should only be used by support personnel during troubleshooting procedures Sun StorEdge 3000 family FC and SATA arrays only The show bypass device command displays the bypass status of all disks and SES devices on a specified loop Note Loop A and Loop B refer to the redundant FC loops that each device is connected to The SES device in the top slot of the chassis is connected to Loop A which is the first drive channel The bottom SES device is connected to Loop B which is the second drive channel Chapter 2 System Function Commands 51 52 Sun StorEdge 3511 SATA Array The Sun StorEdge 3511 SATA array
83. search of local devices is done If only one device is found it is automatically selected If more then one device is found a list of devices to select from is displayed This is inband mode For more details see Device Names for Inband Communication on page 10 m If the user selects a local device and specifies the oob option the Sun StorEdge CLI retrieves the network address of the device using inband methods However from that point forward out of band access is used Note If the array s IP address cannot be found the oob option does not switch to out of band mode This prevents scripts from failing when the array s IP address is not set Accessing the Sun StorEdge CLI The Sun StorEdge CLI must be installed on the server attached to the array that you want to access For instructions about installing the Sun StorEdge CLI refer to the Sun StorEdge 3000 Family Software Installation Guide Note If the same array is connected to multiple servers it is possible to have the Sun StorEdge CLI running on each of these servers trying to manage and monitor the same array Due to a restriction on monitoring commands sent to the array controller by only one server at a time some monitoring commands might fail if sent simultaneously by multiple servers This could cause inaccurate reporting or the processes to stop responding To prevent this from happening the CLI can be configured to enable and disable array monitoring on a s
84. set set cache parameters 73 controller date 76 controller name 77 controller password 77 rs232 configuration 78 unique identifier 79 show cache parameters 81 show controller date 81 Contents show controller name 82 show inquiry data 82 show redundancy mode 84 show redundant controller 86 show shutdown status 86 show unique identifier 87 shutdown controller 88 unfail 89 upload controller configuration 89 Disk Commands 90 abort clone 90 clone 91 configure global spare 92 scan disk 93 set disk array 94 set led 95 show clone 97 show disk array 97 show disks 98 show led status 101 unconfigure global spare 102 4 Channel Commands 105 Channel Commands 106 configure channel 106 set drive parameters 108 set host parameters 110 set inter controller link 112 show channels 113 vi Sun StorEdge 3000 Family CLI 2 4 User s Guide March 2007 show drive parameters 115 show host parameters 117 show inter controller link 118 5 Logical Drive Partition and Logical Volume Commands 121 Logical Drive Commands 122 abort create 122 abort expand 123 abort media check 124 abort parity check abort rebuild 126 add disk 126 check media 127 check parity 128 125 configure local spare 130 create logical drive 131 delete logical drive 134 expand 135 rebuild 137 set logical drive 138 show disks logical drive 140 show logical drive show logical drives show logical driv
85. the initial primary controller the secondary controller Note The unfail command reverses the fail secondary command permitting the secondary controller to resume operation and restore the controller pair to redundant operation Syntax unfail Examples The following example reverses the fail secondary command Sccli unfail Are you sure y controller configuration Description The upload controller configuration command saves a description of the configuration of the array to a user specified file The file can be used to restore the same configuration to the array at a later date or to copy the configuration to another array The file includes channel settings host and drive side parameters array parameters network port setup controller general parameters logical drive logical volume and physical drive information partition information and mappings on host channels For details on downloading the controller configuration file see download controller configuration on page 68 Note The file contains binary data and cannot be viewed with a text editor Chapter 3 Controller and Disk Commands 89 Syntax upload controller configuration file Examples The following example saves the RAID configuration into the binary file raidcfg bin sccli c2t0d0 upload controller configuration raidcfg bin Disk Commands The following commands are explained in this section
86. when queuing commands for each disk drive To indicate that the queue depth value can be computed automatically specify the value 0 The default value is 32 Valid values 0 disable 1 2 4 8 16 32 64 128 polling Specify the interval at which the array controller polls the disk interval drives The default value is 0 disabled which means if there is no activity on the bus the controller does not know if a drive has failed or has been removed Setting an interval enables the program to detect a drive failure when there is no array activity however performance is degraded Valid values 0 disable 500ms 1s 2s 5s 10s 30s enclosure Specify the interval at which the array controller polls the SAF TE or polling SES environmental services processor in the enclosure The default interval value of 0 specifies that polling is disabled Valid values 0 disabled 50ms 100ms 200ms 500ms 1s 2s 5s 10s 20s 30s 60s auto detect Specify the interval between checks to determine if a failed drive has swap interval been physically replaced The default value of 0 specifies that auto detecting is disabled Valid values 0 5s 10s 15s 30s 60s smart Specify whether the disk drives perform predictive failure SMART analysis Valid values disabled detect only detect perpetual clone detect clone replace Detect only predicts symptoms of drive failure but only writes an error message to the controller event lo
87. 0MB 1d0 161637C1 ONLINE SEAGATE ST336753FSUN36G 0349 S N 3HX0Y7W100007349 Returned Values The returned values for the show disks command are described in the following section Speed values include Async SCSI Asynchronous SYNC SCSI Synchronous 20MB SCSI Ultra 40MB SCSI Ultra Wide 80MB SCSI Ultra2 160MB SCSI 160 320MB SCSI Ultra3 Chapter 5 Logical Drive Partition and Logical Volume Commands 141 m 100MB FC 1 GB s m 200MB FC 2 GB s Status values include Online in good condition Global global spare Stand By standby for global or local spare Initing initialization in progress Rebuild rebuild in progress New new disk that has not been configured Used contains RAID meta data Bad failed disk Absent disk does not exist Missing configured disk is missing SB Miss configured spare drive is missing None not assigned Good no operation in progress show logical drive Description The show logical drive command displays information about specified logical drives For details on creating logical drives see create logical drive on page 131 Caution Any time logical drives are created or deleted the numbering of logical drive indexes might change After creating or deleting logical drives issue a show logical drive command to view an updated list of logical drive indexes Or use logical drive IDs which do not change over the lifetime of the logica
88. 2007 inter controller link lt idx gt 6 lt idx gt lt slot gt upper lt slot gt lt ch gt 5 lt ch gt lt ch_mode gt host channel lt ch_mode gt lt bypass_status gt N A lt bypass_status gt inter controller link inter controller link lt idx gt 7 lt idx gt lt slot gt lower lt slot gt lt ch gt 5 lt ch gt lt ch_mode gt host channel lt ch_mode gt lt bypass_status gt N A lt bypass_status gt lt inter_controller_link gt lt battery_status gt lt name gt Upper Battery lt name gt lt type gt N A lt type gt lt manufacturing_date gt N A lt manufacturing_date gt lt placed_in_service gt N A lt placed_in_service gt lt status gt N A lt status gt lt battery_status gt lt battery_status gt lt name gt Lower Battery lt name gt lt type gt N A lt type gt lt manufacturing_date gt N A lt manufacturing_date gt lt placed_in_service gt N A lt placed_in_service gt lt status gt N A lt status gt lt battery_status gt lt config_components gt lt disk gt lt ch gt 3 lt ch gt lt target gt 0 lt target gt lt status gt USED lt status gt lt manufacturer gt HITACHI lt manufacturer gt lt model gt HDS7225SASUN250G lt model gt lt serial_number gt VNRJ9HC6CUOTDM lt serial_number gt lt product_revision gt A6DA lt product_revision gt lt wwnn gt 22E4000A33FFFF00 lt wwnn gt lt capacity gt 232 88GB lt capacity gt lt remaining_size gt 232 63GB lt re
89. 2007 TABLEA 2 Platform support for RAID Array Commands Continued Sun Sun Sun Sun StorEdge StorEdge StorEdge StorEdge 3510 FC 3511 SATA 3310 SCSI 3320 SCSI Command Page Number Function Array Array Array Array configure network set network interface X X X X interface on page21 parameters configure configure a logical drive X X X X partition on partition of the specified size page 154 create host wwn create a Host ID WWN item X X name on page 23 create logical create a logical drive X X X X drive on page 131 create logical create a logical volume over X X X X volume on page 163 the specified logical drives delete host wwn delete a Host ID WWN item X X name on page 24 delete logical delete a logical drive X X X X drive on page 134 delete logical delete one or more logical X X X X volume on page 164 volumes download download array controller X X X X controller binary configuration configuration on page 68 download download array controller X X X X controller firmware optionally with firmware on page 175 hard reset download disk download disk drive X X X X firmware on page 177 firmware to internal drives download nvram on download NVRAM file X X X X page 49 download pld download enclosure PLD X X hardware on page 179 hardware download safte download enclosure SAF TE X X firmware on page 180 firmware download sata download the path controller X path controller firmwar
90. 26 Sun StorEdge 3000 Family CLI 2 4 User s Guide March 2007 show host wwn names Description Sun StorEdge 3000 family FC and SATA devices only The show host wwn names command displays all registered host bus adapter HBA worldwide name WWN entries in the controller for host channels Note A maximum of 64 host WWN entries can be created Syntax show host wwn names Arguments TABLE 2 5 Arguments for show host wwn names Argument Description name wwn Specify the host name or WWN Examples The following example shows all host WWN entries for the specified device sccli c2t0d0 show host wwn names Host ID WWN Name 210000e08b095562 sun hba 1 210100e08b295562 sun hba 2 If no host WWN entries are defined a message is displayed onscreen but it is not considered an error For details on defining host WWN entries see create host wwn name on page 23 Chapter 2 System Function Commands 27 28 show ip address Description The show ip address command displays the IP address of the array controller Note Before running this command make sure the network parameters on the controller are set Syntax show ip address Examples The following example shows the IP address for device c2t0d0 sccli c2t0d0 show ip address 206 1 111 11 show network parameters Description The show network parameters command displays the IP address netmask and def
91. 4 Sun microsystems SUn StorEdge 3000 Family CLI 2 4 User s Guide Sun Microsystems Inc www sun com Part No 817 4951 17 March 2007 Revision A Submit comments about this document at http www sun com hwdocs feedback Copyright O 2002 2007 Dot Hill Systems Corporation and others 2200 Faraday Avenue Suite 100 Carlsbad California 92008 USA Allrights reserved Sun Microsystems Inc and Dot Hill Systems Corporation may have intellectual property rights relating to piper embodied in this product or document In particular and without limitation these intellectual property rights may include one or more of the U S patents listed at http www sun com patents and one or more additional patents or pending patent applications in the U S and other countries This product or document is distributed under licenses restricting its use copying distribution and decompilation No part of this product or document may be reproduced in any form by any means without prior written authorization of Sun and its licensors if any Third party software is copyrighted and licensed from Sun suppliers Parts of the product may be derived from Berkeley BSD systems licensed from the University of California UNIX is a registered trademark in the U S and in other countries exclusively licensed through X Open Company Ltd Sun Sun Microsystems the Sun logo Sun StorEdge AnswerBook2 docs sun com and Solaris are trademarks or registered tr
92. 50SASUN500G lt model gt lt serial_number gt KRVN63ZAGM3XTD lt serial_number gt lt product_revision gt A20A lt product_revision gt lt wwnn gt 22E4000A3300D7FF lt wwnn gt lt capacity gt 465 76GB lt capacity gt lt remaining_size gt 465 51GB lt remaining_size gt lt Speed gt 200M lt Speed gt lt ld_id gt 460FDB54 lt 1d_id gt ld idx 2 ld idx lt disk gt Appendix C Show Configuration Command Output 263 disk lt ch gt 3 lt ch gt lt target gt 21 lt target gt lt status gt ONLINE lt status gt lt manufacturer gt HITACHI lt manufacturer gt lt model gt HDS7250SASUN500G lt model gt lt serial_number gt KRVN63ZAGM3VND lt serial_number gt lt product_revision gt A20A lt product_revision gt lt wwnn gt 22E4000A3300D7FD lt wwnn gt lt capacity gt 465 76GB lt capacity gt lt remaining_size gt 465 51GB lt remaining_size gt lt Speed gt 200M lt Speed gt lt ld_id gt 460FDB54 lt 1d_id gt lt ld_idx gt 2 lt 1d_idx gt lt disk gt lt disk gt lt ch gt 3 lt ch gt lt target gt 22 lt target gt lt status gt ONLINE lt status gt lt manufacturer gt HITACHI lt manufacturer gt lt model gt HDS7250SASUN500G lt model gt lt serial_number gt KRVN63ZAGM72UD lt serial_number gt lt product_revision gt A20A lt product_revision gt lt wwnn gt 22E4000A3300D7F7 lt wwnn gt lt capacity gt 465 76GB lt capacity gt lt remaining_size gt 465 51GB lt remaining_size gt lt Sp
93. 511 SA74T id of nvram defaults total logical drives 3 total logical drives total partitions 3 total partitions total physical drives 23 total physical drives total ses devices 2 total ses devices cache size 1024MB ECC SDRAM cache size lt cpu gt PPC750 lt cpu gt lt fru gt lt idx gt 0 lt idx gt lt name gt FC_CHASSIS_BKPLN lt name gt description SATA Chassis Backplane 2U lt description gt lt part_number gt 370 6775 lt part_number gt lt serial_number gt 07ECE4 lt serial_number gt lt revision gt 01 lt revision gt lt Initial_Hardware_Dash_Level gt 01 lt Initial_Hardware_Dash_Level gt lt FRU_Shortname gt SATA Backplane lt FRU_Shortname gt lt manufacturing_date gt Thu Mar 18 03 27 55 2004 lt manufacturing_date gt lt manufacturing_location gt Milpitas California USA lt manufacturing_location gt lt manufacturer_jedec_id gt 0x0301 lt manufacturer_jedec_id gt lt fru_location gt FC MIDPLANE SLOT lt fru_location gt lt chassis_serial_number gt 07ECE4 lt chassis_serial_number gt lt fru_status gt OK lt fru_status gt lt fru gt Appendix C Show Configuration Command Output 241 fru lt idx gt 1 lt idx gt lt name gt FC_JBOD_IOM lt name gt description I O JBOD SATA 2U lt description gt lt part_number gt 370 6774 lt part_number gt lt serial_number gt GG0042 lt serial_number gt lt revision gt 01 lt revisi
94. 6 sabre 2 RW I FFFFFFFFFFFFFFFF 0 40 0 1d0 20CEAE10 00 Primary 210100E08B301256 sabre 1 RW I FFFFFFFFFFFFFFFF 1 42 0 LAT 15F4EEA7 00 Secondary 1 42 1 123 029B14A2 00 Secondary show partitions Description The show partitions command displays information about all disk partitions or just those partitions allocated from the specified logical volumes or logical drives Returned values include logical volume or logical drive index logical volume or logical drive ID partition number offset CB and size GB Syntax show partitions lv index lv id ld index ld id Arguments TABLE 5 25 Arguments for show partitions Argument Description lo index Specify a comma separated list of logical volume indexes for example 1v0 1v1 1v2 ld index Specify the logical drive index number For example 143 lo id Specify a logical volumes using an eight digit hexadecimal logical volume ID for example 3C24554F Id id Specify the logical drive ID For example 71038221 Chapter 5 Logical Drive Partition and Logical Volume Commands 159 Examples The following example shows the logical drive partition table for the logical drive with the ID 161637C1 sccli gt show partitions logical drive 161637c1 LD LV ID Partition Size 1d0 00 161637C1 00 101 00GB The following example shows the logical volume partition table for the logical volume with index number 0 sccli gt show part 1v0 LD LV I
95. 60V lt voltage gt lt component gt component type voltage unit 1 status OK fru pn 370 5398 fru sn 115884 gt lt voltage gt 12 000V lt voltage gt lt component gt component type voltage unit 2 status OK fru pn 370 5398 fru sn 114536 gt lt voltage gt 5 220V lt voltage gt lt component gt lt component type voltage unit 3 status 0K fru pn 370 5398 fru sn 114536 gt lt voltage gt 12 070V lt voltage gt lt component gt lt component type voltage unit 4 status 0K fru pn 370 6774 fru sn GG0042 gt lt voltage gt 1 820V lt voltage gt lt component gt component type voltage unit 5 status OK fru pn 370 6774 fru sn GG0042 gt lt voltage gt 2 510V lt voltage gt lt component gt component type voltage unit 6 status OK fru pn 370 6774 fru sn GG0042 gt lt voltage gt 3 330V lt voltage gt lt component gt component type voltage unit 7 status OK fru pn 370 6774 fru sn GG0042 gt lt voltage gt 5 150V lt voltage gt lt component gt component type voltage unit 8 status OK fru pn 370 6774 fru sn GG0042 gt voltage 4 800V voltage component 252 Sun StorEdge 3000 Family CLI 2 4 Users Guide March 2007 component type voltage GG0042 gt lt voltage gt 12 190V lt voltage gt lt component gt lt component type voltage GG0045 gt lt voltage gt 1 810V lt vol
96. 64A046F7 lt 1d_id gt lt ld_idx gt 1 lt 1d_idx gt lt disk gt 262 Sun StorEdge 3000 Family CLI 2 4 Users Guide March 2007 disk lt ch gt 3 lt ch gt lt target gt 18 lt target gt lt status gt ONLINE lt status gt lt manufacturer gt HITACHI lt manufacturer gt lt model gt HDS7250SASUN500G lt model gt lt serial_number gt KRVN63ZAGM49TD lt serial_number gt lt product_revision gt A20A lt product_revision gt lt wwnn gt 22E4000A3300D800 lt wwnn gt lt capacity gt 465 76GB lt capacity gt lt remaining_size gt 465 51GB lt remaining_size gt lt Speed gt 200M lt Speed gt lt ld_id gt 64A046F7 lt 1d_id gt lt ld_idx gt 1 lt 1d_idx gt lt disk gt lt disk gt lt ch gt 3 lt ch gt lt target gt 19 lt target gt lt status gt ONLINE lt status gt lt manufacturer gt HITACHI lt manufacturer gt lt model gt HDS7250SASUN500G lt model gt lt serial_number gt KRVN63ZAGM8N3D lt serial_number gt lt product_revision gt A20A lt product_revision gt lt wwnn gt 22E4000A3300D7FA lt wwnn gt lt capacity gt 465 76GB lt capacity gt lt remaining_size gt 465 51GB lt remaining_size gt lt Speed gt 200M lt Speed gt lt ld_id gt 64A046F7 lt 1d_id gt lt ld_idx gt 1 lt 1d_idx gt lt disk gt lt disk gt lt ch gt 3 lt ch gt lt target gt 20 lt target gt lt status gt ONLINE lt status gt lt manufacturer gt HITACHI lt manufacturer gt lt model gt HDS72
97. 7 or 0 5 depending on the hardware If m is greater than the largest channel number information for all the channels is displayed Examples The following example returns information for channels 0 and 2 sccli c2t0d0 show channels 0 2 The following example returns all channel information for a Sun StorEdge 3510 FC array sccli gt show channels Ch Type Media Speed Width PID SID 0 Host FC L 2G Serial 40 41 1 Host FC L 2G Serial 43 42 2 DRV RCC FC L 2G Serial 14 15 3 DRV RCC FC L 2G Serial 14 15 4 Host FC L 2G Serial 44 45 5 Host FC L 2G Serial 47 46 6 Host LAN N A Serial NA NA Returned Values Returned values include channel number channel type media node speed width primary ID PID and secondary ID SID 114 Sun StorEdge 3000 Family CLI 2 4 User s Guide March 2007 Channel type values include m Host m DRV Drive m RCC RCCOM Media mode values include L loop mode FC and SATA only P point to point FC and SATA only SCSI FC LAN network channel Speed values include m Async For SCSI SCSI Asynchronous For FC or SATA no link or link down SYNC SCSI Synchronous Ultra SCSI Ultra Ultra2 SCSI Ultra2 U160 SCSI U160 U320 SCSI U320 1G FC 1 GB s 2G FC 2 GB s Note Speed values are displayed for the primary controller only Therefore if a user maps one LUN to the primary controller and another LUN to a seconda
98. AE A lt ELEMENT fan_failure PCDATA gt N gt lt identifier element gt s lt ELEMENT identifier PCDATA gt c eum gt lt port_number element gt Zi mS lt ELEMENT port number PCDATA gt Re de
99. AN lt description gt lt part_number gt 370 5398 lt part_number gt lt serial_number gt 115884 lt serial_number gt lt revision gt 02 lt revision gt lt Initial_Hardware_Dash_Level gt 02 lt Initial_Hardware_Dash_Level gt lt FRU_Shortname gt 370 5398 02 lt FRU_Shortname gt 242 Sun StorEdge 3000 Family CLI 2 4 User s Guide March 2007 manufacturing date Wed Dec 10 06 12 51 2003 manufacturing date manufacturing location Irvine California USA manufacturing location manufacturer jedec id 0x048F manufacturer jedec id fru location AC PSU SLOT 0 LEFT fru location chassis serial number 07ECEA4 chassis serial number fru status OK fru status fru fru lt idx gt 4 lt idx gt lt name gt FC_JBOD_IOM lt name gt description I O JBOD SATA 2U lt description gt lt part_number gt 370 6774 lt part_number gt lt serial_number gt GG0045 lt serial_number gt lt revision gt 01 lt revision gt lt Initial_Hardware_Dash_Level gt 01 lt Initial_Hardware_Dash_Level gt lt FRU_Shortname gt SATA I O JBOD lt FRU_Shortname gt lt manufacturing_date gt Mon May 17 15 56 24 2004 lt manufacturing_date gt manufacturing location Milpitas CA USA manufacturing location manufacturer jedec id 0x0301 manufacturer jedec id fru location LOWER FC JBOD IOM SLOT fru location chassis serial number 07ECEA4 chassis serial
100. COM channel commands with sample code Note To prevent unauthorized access to administrative functions of the RAID controller the Sun StorEdge CLI requires superuser or system administrator privileges for inband access and uses the controller password to authorize users of the out of band interface Note If no command is entered on the command line the Sun StorEdge CLI enters an interactive mode prompting you to enter commands until the quit command is entered All commands operate on the currently selected device 105 Channel Commands The following commands are explained in this section configure channel set drive parameters set host parameters set inter controller link show channels show drive parameters show host parameters show inter controller link configure channel Description The configure channel command configures host drive or RCCOM channels and establishes channel IDs on the primary and secondary controller The most common reason to change a channel setting is to change a host channel to a drive channel to attach expansion units to a RAID array After a channel configuration change the RAID controller must be reset Caution All reset commands cause the array to stop responding to I O requests from the host for a period of time This might result in data loss unless all I O activity is suspended by halting all applications that are accessing the array and unmounting any file
101. Commands 157 show lun maps Description The show 1un maps command shows all partitions mapped to a specified host channel Returned values include host channel target ID LUN ID logical volume or logical drive index partition ID controller assignment and worldwide name WWN filters for the LUNs Sun StorEdge 3000 family FC and SATA arrays only This command additionally shows mask information access RW for read write or RO for ready only permission type I for include or E for exclude and name Syntax show lun maps channel host channel list Arguments TABLE 5 24 Arguments for show lun maps Argument Description host channel list Specify the LUN format Use the format n m or a range format n m or n L p im Valid channel numbers include 0 7 or 0 5 depending on the hardware configuration Examples The following example shows all partitions mapped to host channel 1 and 3 sccli gt show lun maps channel 1 3 Ch Tgt LUN ld lv ID Partition Assigned Filter Map 1 0 0 1d0 64D138EC 00 Primary 3 1 0 idi 3C67B2FD 00 Secondary The following example shows all partitions mapped to the host channels in a Sun StorEdge 3510 FC array 158 Sun StorEdge 3000 Family CLI 2 4 User s Guide March 2007 Sccli show lun maps Ch Tgt LUN ld lv ID Partition Assigned Filter Map Access Type Mask Name 0 40 0 1d2 3F1561F1 00 Primary 210000E08B10125
102. D Partition Size 1v0 00 02CE9894 00 4 00GB unmap partition Description The unmap partition command unmaps a partition Use the appropriate syntax depending on the target you want to unmap To view the current partitions use the show partitions or show 1un maps command For details see show partitions on page 159 or show lun maps on page 158 You can unmap a partition currently mapped to the specified channel target lun address If a host worldwide port name WWPN or alias previously defined using create host wwn name is specified the specified host LUN mapping is removed without affecting other host LUN maps on the same host LUN Syntax To unmap a partition using a channel target LUN address use the following syntax unmap partition channel target lun wwpn host wwn name You can unmap a specified partition from any LUNs to which its mapped or if channel is specified from LUNs on the specified channel 160 Sun StorEdge 3000 Family CLI 2 4 User s Guide March 2007 To unmap a partition from a specified partition or channel use the following syntax unmap partition partition id channel Arguments TABLE 5 26 Arguments for unmap partition Argument Description partition id Specify a combination of LD ID LV ID and partition number in XXXXXXXX PP format where XXXXXXXX represents the Logical Drive Volume ID or a combination of LD LV Index and partition number in ld X Iv X PP forma
103. DISK 0 4 E4 02 2 DISK 0 2 E2 03 3 DISK 0 3 EO 05 5 DISK 0 5 EF 00 0 DISK 0 0 D9 08 8 DISK 0 8 D6 09 9 DISK 0 9 Note The first line of output in the loop map identifies the primary RAID controller that requested the loop map and that issues any subsequent FC diagnostic commands nvram Description The upload nvram command saves the NVRAM configuration to a host file The binary NVRAM file contains information specific to the host device such as channel settings RAID controller parameters IP address RAID controller password and name and unique IDs Sun StorEdge 3000 Family CLI 2 4 User s Guide March 2007 Note The saved NVRAM file is operating system dependent You must download the file to the same operating system that the file is saved on For instance if the file is saved to the Solaris operating system you must download it from the Solaris operating system Syntax upload nvram file For details on downloading the NVRAM file see download nvram on page 49 Event Message Commands The following commands are explained in this section Clear events show events show persistent events clear events Description The clear events command clears the RAID controller event log These events are not saved in the persistent event disk reserved space Syntax clear events Examples The following example clears the event log for controller cOt5d0s2 sccli dev rdsk c0t5d0
104. Description The show logical drives expanding command displays the progress of the logical drive expansion Returned values include LD index LD ID and progress For details on expanding logical drives see expand on page 135 144 Sun StorEdge 3000 Family CLI 2 4 User s Guide March 2007 Syntax show logical drives expanding Note The abbreviation 1d can be substituted for the keyword logical drive Examples The following example returns the completion percentage for the logical drive expansion sccli gt show logical drives expanding LD LD ID Status 1d0 250FF1DC 60 complete offline show logical drives initializing Description The show logical drives initializing command displays the progress of the RAID controller initialization Returned values include LD index LD ID and progress Syntax show logical drives initializing Note The abbreviation 1d can be substituted for the keyword logical drive Chapter 5 Logical Drive Partition and Logical Volume Commands 145 Examples The following example returns the completion percentage of the RAID controller for all logical drives sccli gt show ld initializing LD LD ID Status 1qd1 59839F65 10 complete online show logical drives logical volume Description The show logical drives logical volume command displays information for all logical drives in a specified logical volume Caution A
105. ED unit CDATA REQUIRED gt lt us lt config components element gt lt EE lt ELEMENT config components disk REN gt gt lt device element gt gt lt ELEMENT device name value status gt xm mem lt value element gt PAR
106. ERERERARRE RENE RE RARE RE RARE RRE RERE RRE RARE RANA RR gt lt ELEMENT min bps PCDATA gt lt REFERFEXEFERERERREERE RE K K k X H F K Y koe X X de ko de oce c a T gt lt default_bps element Default baud rate in BPS gt lt KEK KKK KKK K K K H K X XK Kk KEK K H KEK K k H K X XK XK KKK Yk H k KKK k X ko ko k X k K k aa lt ELEMENT default_bps PCDATA gt lt H Y T KKK KKK KKK KKK de KEK KEK KEK KKK KKK KKK KKK KEK KEK KEK ck Ve ck KKK ko ko K KEKE gt lt current_bps element Current baud rate in BPS gt lt REE REE RE RK KERR RENA KE NE K XK k K RE RE RE K Kk k RE K k k K k K kx k ok ck Kk kk me lt ELEMENT current bps PCDATA gt Appendix C Show Configuration Command Output 225 lt KKK KK KKK KH K K KEK k K Kk KKK KEKE KKK Ek K Kk k K K k KEK KEK KEK KKK KK KKK k ko ko ko k k kk Kx o lt drive_param element The Drive side configuration lt It includes these elements gt lt scsi_motor_spin_up gt 1 power up scsi reset gt lt disk_access_latency gt 1 Scsi io timeout lt tag count per drive gt lt drive_check_period gt lt safte polling period gt lt auto_detect_drive_check gt 1 drive smart mode auto global spare gt lt KKKKK KE KkKkKKKE EKH K
107. ID or a combination of LD LV Index and partition number in ld X Iv X PP format where LD LV Index is the Logical Drive Volume Index number PP is a two digital hexidecimal number that represents the partition number Valid partition IDs for a logical drive for example are 3C2B1111 01 or 182 03 Valid partition IDs for a logical volume for example are 205FB9AC 01 or 1v2 03 channel ch Specify a host channel number between 0 and 7 target target Specify a host channel target number between 0 and 126 lun lun Specify a host channel LUN number channel target lun Specify the channel target and LUN to map For example 4 1 2 represents physical channel 4 target ID 1 logical unit number 2 wwpn Sun StorEdge 3000 family FC and SATA devices only Specify a worldwide port name WWPN to map to the host bus adapter with the specified WWPN To review the available WWPN values run the show port wwn command For details see show port wwn on page 29 host id Specify the host ID of the corresponding WWPN to map to the host bus adapter To review the available WWPN values run the show port wwn command For details see show port wwn on page 29 156 Sun StorEdge 3000 Family CLI 2 4 User s Guide March 2007 TABLE 5 23 Arguments for map partition Continued Argument Description read only read Sun StorEdge 3000 family FC and SATA devices only To specify the write access mode which assigns Read Only or Read Write privileg
108. K Te K K K KH V KKK K K Y HV K KEK K K K H T H VK K KKK V K KKK KY ko ck K ck K K ko ko K K Kk m ELEMENT ld id PCDATA gt lt KEK KKK KKK KKK KKK KKK KKK KKK KKK KEK KEK KKK KKK KKK ko ck ck ko ko ck KK ko ko ko ko koX gt lt ld idx element gt lt ckckckck kockckck ck ckokckckckckok ERA RE RARE RARE K K Kk Kk RARE AA K K RARE RARE RAR gt ELEMENT ld idx PCDATA gt lt KEK KEKE KKK KEK KEKE KKK KEK KEK KKK kk kk k k k k kkk k k k K k kx ck ck k k k k ko ko ko k koX L lt assignment element lt VE V H KKK KKK KKK KKK KKK KKK KEK KKK KKK Z DE KKK KKK KKK ko ck ck ck K K H K ko ko ko ko d K gt kk ck ckck ck kkk k k k k k k k k Xk k kX k k k k ck k k k k k k kX k k k k kX k k k k k k k k k k k k kK k kk gt lt raid level element can be RAIDO RAID1 RAID3 gt lt REE KSEE REE K ec RR K K RE KEKE RE RARA RARE RARE RE K HX Kk K Kk K Kk ok ko K X Kk k gt lt ELEMENT raid_level PCDATA gt lt KEK KKK KKK KEK KEK KEK KEK K K K KKK KKK Kk K H KEK K H K K K KKK K X K KK H ck k k Kk k HK cT lt number of drives element lt KEK KKK KKK KKK KKK KKK KKK KKK KKK KKK KKK KKK KKK KKK KKK ck ko ko ko ko ko ko ko lt ELEMENT number_of_drives PCDATA gt lt KEK KKK KKK KKK KKK KEK KEK KEKE KK KKK KE KKK KKK KKK KKK KKK KEK ck ck ko ko ko kx ko k x gt lt physical_drive element
109. K EK K K Kk kk RE RARE RARE RARE RARE RARA Xk K K k K gt lt ELEMENT drive_param scsi_motor_spin_up power_up_scsi_reset disk_access_latency scsi_io_timeout tag count per drive drive check period safte polling period auto detect drive check drive smart mode auto global spare lt KR KKK KKK KKK KEK KEK KEK KEK KF K kH KKK X K k X K KKK KKK KKK ck ck ko ko ck ck ko ko ko KEKE lt scsi_motor_spin_up element in sec lt KEK KKK KKK k H XK K K K K k KKK KKK KE KKK KKK KK k KKK K KHK V K kx k ck k ck Kk Kk ko ko ko Kk H k L Ge lt ELEMENT scsi_motor_spin_up PCDATA gt lt KEK KEKE KKK KEK KE KKK KEK KEK KEK KEK KKK KKK Kk KEK KKK KKK k kk k k k ck ko ko ko ko ko k kx k gt power up scsi reset element lt kkk kk k k k k k k k k k k k k k k k k k k k k k k k k k k k k k k k k k k k k k k k k k k k k k k x x x a lt ELEMENT power_up_scsi_reset PCDATA gt lt kkk kk k k k k k k k k k k k k k k k k k k k k k k k k k k k k k k k k k k k k k k k k k k k k k k x xk x m lt disk access latency element gt lt KEKE K k kH Kk KKK K k Xk KKK kY HK KKK KEK KEK KEK KEK KEK KKK KKK KKK KKK ck ko ko ko ko ko ko ko m lt ELEMENT disk access latency PCDATA gt lt KEK KKK KK K K K KEK K K K K KEK KEK KEK K K X K KK K K KEK KKK KKK KKK KKK ck ko ko ko ko ko ko koX gt lt tag_count_per_drive element gt lt KEK K K XK Kk KEK V K ck KE KKK KE KKK K KKK V
110. K K K EK R TEK K KY H k K H k K H ko ko k Kk k Kk lt role element gt lt EXARERERERERE RRE RE KRRREERER KEK kckck RE RENE RRE k k k kk xk k k k k x kk Kx gt lt ELEMENT role PCDATA gt lt KER REE K ERE K RE RARE NARRA RARA RARE RARA Kk K K Kk K K K Kk k kc kc ck REE me lt Primary sn element lt K KK KK K k K V K K K kokckckockck K K V K F RE RRR ER EH H kck K REE RR H Kk k RARA K Kk gt lt ELEMENT Primary_sn PCDATA gt lt KEK KKK KKK SE VZ KKK KEK KEK KKK KKK KKK KEK KKK KKK KKK KKK KKK KK ko ko KEKE gt lt Redundancy_mode element gt lt H K K KKK VK K K V K KKK KEK K K K HK HK X K k kK KH KEK KEK K k Xk H K K K X K kx k HH Kk k Kk k HK e lt ELEMENT Redundancy_mode PCDATA gt lt KEK KKK k k k k k k k k k k k k k k k k k k k k k k k k k k k k k k k k k k k k k k k k k k k ko k k xk x gt lt redundant_status element gt lt EXARERERERERE RARE RRE RRE RE RE RE RE RRA RARA RARA RARA RARA RR gt lt ELEMENT redundant status 4 PCDATA gt Appendix C Show Configuration Command Output 229 lt ELEMENT assignment PCDATA gt 230 Sun StorEdge 3000 Family CLI 2 4 Users Guide March 2007 lt KEK KKK KKK KKK KK KK KKK KEK k K KKK K K k k K Kk KKK KEK kk KEK ck ck k k ck K k ko ko ko k ko kk Kx gt lt logical_drive element The Logical Drive info includes
111. K K KKK KEK KKK KKK ck ck ck ko ck ko ko ko ko KEKE a lt ELEMENT tag_count_per_drive PCDATA gt lt KEK KKK KKK KEK KKK KKK KEK KKK KK KKK KEK KEK KKK KKK KKK ZA K K ko ck KKK ko ko ko koX gt lt safte_polling_period element lt KEK KK K KKK KEK KKK KEKE KKK KKK HH KKK KKK KKK K d TK H KH KKK X K k ck ck ko ko ko ko K k K lt ELEMENT safte_polling_period PCDATA gt 226 Sun StorEdge 3000 Family CLI 2 4 User s Guide March 2007 kk ck ckck ck kck ck k k k k k k k kK k k kX k k k k ck ck k k k k k kX k k k k k k k k k k k kX kc k k k kX kK k kk gt lt scsi_io_timeout element gt lt K K K K K K HK K EK KK K K k K K K kok X K Kk RARA RRE RENE RE RE K X H K Kk Kk k ck ck Kk kk k gt lt ELEMENT scsi_io_timeout PCDATA gt lt KEK KKK KKK KKK KKK KEK KKK KKK KEK KKK KEK KKK KKK kk kk kk ko ko ck KK ko ko KEKE lt drive_check_period element lt KEK KKK KKK SE VZ KKK KEK KKK KKK KKK KKK KKK KKK KKK KEKE KK KKK ck ko Ve ko ko ko ko ko lt ELEMENT drive_check_period PCDATA gt lt EXAARERERERERERE RRA RRE RRA RRE RE REA RRE RE RAR ck koh RARA RR gt lt auto detect drive check element gt lt KEK KKK KKK KKK KKK KKK K K Kk K k k k k k Xk k K KKK k k Kk KKK KKK k ko Kk k k k ko ko ko Kk x gt lt ELEMENT auto_detect_drive_check PCDATA gt lt K KKK K K k K V V KK RA RERE KH K K Kk k k K
112. K RAID 2 9 DISK RAID 2 10 DISK RAID 2 11 DISK RAID 2 12 SES RAID sccli gt show bypass device ses channel 2 loop 1oopa LOOP BYP STATUS ATTRIBUTI SHF LOOP A Unbypassed LOOP A Bypassed S LOOP A Unbypassed LOOP A Unbypassed LOOP A Unbypassed LOOP A Unbypassed LOOP A Unbypassed LOOP A Unbypassed LOOP A Unbypassed LOOP A Unbypassed LOOP A Unbypassed LOOP A Bypassed HF LOOP A Unbypassed The following example is sent on channel 3 and shows the bypass information for loop B CH ID TYPE ENCL 3 0 DISK RAID 3 le DISK RAID 3 2 DISK RAID 3 3 DISK RAID 3 4 DISK RAID 3 5 DISK RAID 3 6 DISK RAID 3 H DISK RAID 3 8 DISK RAID 3 9 DISK RAID 3 10 DISK RAID 3 11 DISK RAID 3 12 SES RAID sccli gt show bypass device ses channel 3 loop loopb LOOP BYP STATUS ATTRIBUTI ee SHF LOOP B Bypassed S LOOP B Bypassed H LOOP B Unbypassed LOOP B Unbypassed LOOP B Unbypassed LOOP B Unbypassed LOOP B Unbypassed LOOP B Unbypassed LOOP B Unbypassed LOOP B Unbypassed LOOP B Unbypassed LOOP B Unbypassed LOOP B Unbypassed Chapter 2 System Function Commands 53 Returned Values If a device is bypassed the Attribut
113. K k k K Kk KKK kH KH KKK KEK Kk ck ck ko ck ko K k ko ko ko koX lt supported_transfer_speed element in MB lt EXERAFEXANERARERA K k RARE XA RE RARE RARE RARA ARE RARE k k Kk k RA RR lt ELEMENT supported_transfer_speed PCDATA gt lt KEK KKK KKK KKK KKK KEK KEK KEKE KEKE KKK k Kk Xk Kk Kk k k k Kk Kk KX Kk ko ck ck k k k ko Kk ko ko ko k koX lt mac address configurable element Enable Disable lt VK K X KEKE KKK KKK KKK KKK KKK KKK KKK KKK KKK KKK KKK K K Y X K KKK ko ko ko ko ko koX lt ELEMENT mac_address_configurable PCDATA gt lt KK KKK KK KKK KH Y KKK KKK KKK KKK KEKE KK KKK KKK KKK KKK ck ck ko ck ko ko ko ko KEKE lt static_address element lt KEK KEKE KR KEKE KKK KEK KEK KEK KKK KKK k kk Kk k kk kx kkk Kx kx K k kk k k k k k k ko ko kkk lt ELEMENT static_address ip netmask gateway gt lt RKERAFIXARERAREAARERA EEK RE RARE RARE RARA RE RARE V k k ke H Kk lt ip element IP address lt EERAFEXARERARERA RE RA KK K k K RARE RARE RARE Kk Kk Kk K RARE K X K ok ko kk lt ELEMENT ip PCDATA gt lt KEKE KKK KK KKK KEK KEK KKK KKK KKK KKK KEK KKK KKK KKK KKK KKK KKK KEKE KEKE lt netmask element lt KR KKK KKK KKK KKK KKK KEK KKK KKK KEK KEK KEK KKK KK KKK KKK KKK Fe H V Ve H H Fe Ve Ke lt ELEMENT netmask PCDATA gt 224 Sun StorEdge 3000 Family CLI 2 4 User s Guide March 2007 kk
114. N Storl Status OK Edge 3510F A 1046 1000 204000COFF003CE3 224000COFF003CI FRU P N Status OK 370 5398 370 5398 370 5398 370 5398 370 5398 370 5398 370 5535 370 5535 370 5535 370 5535 370 5535 370 5535 370 5537 370 5537 370 5537 370 5537 370 5398 370 5398 370 5535 370 5535 370 5535 370 5535 370 5535 370 5535 370 5535 370 5535 370 5535 370 5535 370 5535 Enclosure Component Status Type Unit Status Fan 0 OK Fan 1 OK Fan 2 OK Fan 3 OK PS 0 OK PS 1 OK Temp 0 OK Temp 1 OK Temp 2 OK Temp 3 OK Temp 4 OK Temp 5 OK Temp 6 OK Temp 7 OK Temp 8 OK Temp 9 OK Temp 10 OK Temp 11 OK DiskSlot 0 Absent DiskSlot 1 Absent DiskSlot 2 Absent DiskSlot 3 OK DiskSlot 4 OK DiskSlot 5 Absent DiskSlot 6 OK DiskSlot 7 OK DiskSlot 8 OK DiskSlot 9 OK DiskSlot 10 OK DiskSlot 11 Absent 370 5535 Topology loop a Topology loop b FRU S N Add l Data 017243 017243 em 016962 016962 017243 016962 003CE3 temp 23 003CE3 temp 23 003CE3 temp 25 003CE3 temp 23 003CE3 temp 23 003CE3 temp 25 008307 temp 31 008307 temp 41 008226 temp 30 008226 temp 35 017243 temp 22 016962 temp 25 003CE3 addr 0 1led o 003CE3 addr 1 1led o 003CE3 addr 2 1led o 003CE3 addr 3 led o 003CE3 addr 4 led o 003CE3 addr 5 led o 003CE3 addr 6 1led o 003CE3 addr 7 led 0 003CE3 addr 8 led o 003CE3 addr 9 1ed 0 003CE3 adQ 1 0 1ed 003CE3 adQ 1 1 led Fh Fh Fh Fh Fh th h Fh Fh Fh F
115. OD The output includes the channel and target ID of the SES device serial number of the chassis in which it is installed vendor and product IDs SES firmware revision programmable logic device PLD firmware revision worldwide node name WWNN worldwide port name WWPN for the device and the loop location In redundant configurations SES devices are installed in pairs in a single chassis Therefore two devices show the same chassis serial number It is important to ensure the SES firmware and PLD revisions are consistent for SES devices installed Chapter 6 Firmware Show and Download Commands 173 in the same chassis Any firmware revision mismatches that might result from replacement of an SES device FRU are flagged with an asterisk as well as by a visual indicator on the chassis itself Information is shown for the array device s enclosure as well as any expansion chassis that might be connected to the array To view information about an SES device in an expansion chassis connected directly to the host instead of an array controller use the select command to specify an SES device in the expansion chassis and issue a show inquiry and show pld revision command to each device Returned values include channel number SCSI ID chassis number vendor product ID an A indicates a RAID device and a D indicates an expansion unit or JBOD revision PLD revision SES WWNN SES WWPN and SES topology loop A top slot or loop B botto
116. OK This component has a status of OK Absent This component is absent Fault The component is exhibiting a fault condition Missing The field replaceable unit FRU is missing status cannot be determined Unknown This component status is not available 44 Sun StorEdge 3000 Family CLI 2 4 User s Guide March 2007 show frus Description The show frus command displays field replaceable unit FRU ID information for the RAID and any related JBODs including dynamic FRU status information AII FRU information is retrieved from the SAF TE device Sun StorEdge 3000 family SCSI device SES Sun StorEdge 3000 family FC or SATA device and SATA MUX board Sun StorEdge 3511 SATA device Use the q option to exclude SATA MUX board information from the results which will speed data return Syntax show frus q quick Arguments TABLE 2 14 Arguments for show frus Argument Description q quick Excludes SATA MUX board information from the results which will speed data return Examples The following example returns all FRU information in a RAID array sccli c2t0d0 show frus The following example returns all FRU information in a JBOD unit sccli dev es ses2 show frus The following example shows a partial list of the FRUs in a Sun StorEdge 3310 SCSI device Chapter 2 System Function Commands 45 sccli gt show frus Name PRI RAID CONTROLLER Description SE3310 LVD
117. PENDIX A Summary of Sun StorEdge CLI Options and Commands This appendix contains m A list of the Sun StorEdge CLI options m A list of Sun StorEdge CLI commands for RAID arrays m A list of Sun StorEdge CLI commands for JBODs A list of the Sun StorEdge CLI commands is also available with the help or usage command within the Sun StorEdge CLI TABLE A 1 Optional Parameters Available With Most Commands Options Function d disk LVD JBOD enclosure only Selects the disk device name that you specify such as sd31 or c1t0d0 when a JBOD chassis is selected h help display valid commands usage l list display a list of local or remote devices that the Sun StorEdge CLI manages and exits without processing any commands n no assumes a no response to any yes no prompts Use this option to run scripts without prompting the user o oob access the selected device using out of band communication through its network interface rather than using SCSI commands v version display program version information w password specify the password assigned to the array controller y yes assumes a yes response to any yes no prompts Use this option to run scripts without prompting the user An X in a product column in the following table indicates that the Sun StorEdge CLI command works with that product 185 TABLEA 2 Platform support for RAID Array Commands Sun Sun Sun Sun StorEdge StorEdge StorEdge
118. SUN StorEdge 3310 A 1170 1170 OK Enclosure Component Status Type Unit Status FRU P N FRU S N Add l Data Fan 0 OK 370 5398 016626 Fan 1 OK 370 5398 016625 PS 0 OK 370 5398 016626 PS 1 OK 370 5398 016625 Temp 0 OK 370 5524 002A4C temp 25 Temp 1 OK 370 5524 002A4C temp 27 Temp 2 OK 370 5398 016626 temp 26 Temp 3 OK 370 5394 013924 temp 30 Temp 4 OK 370 5394 013919 temp 28 Temp 5 OK 370 5524 002A4C temp 28 Temp 6 OK 370 5398 016625 temp 25 EMU 0 OK 370 5394 013924 EMU 1 OK 370 5394 013919 DiskS1o 0 Unknown 370 5524 002A4C addr 0 led off DiskSlot 1 Unknown 370 5524 002A4C addr 1 led off DiskSlot 2 Unknown 370 5524 002A4C addr 2 led off DiskSlot 3 Unknown 370 5524 002A4C addr 3 led off DiskSlot 4 Unknown 370 5524 002A4C addr 4 led off DiskSlot 5 Unknown 370 5524 002A4C addr 5 led off DiskSlot 6 OK 370 5524 002A4C addr 0 led off DiskSlot 7 OK 370 5524 002AA4C addr 1 led off DiskSlot 8 OK 370 5524 002A4C addr 2 1led off DiskSlot 9 OK 370 5524 002A4C addr 3 led off DiskSlot 10 OK 370 5524 002A4C addr 4 led off DiskSlot 11 OK 370 5524 002A4C addr 5 led off Enclosure SCSI Channel Type split bus Chapter 2 System Function Commands 39 The following example shows the enclosure status for a Sun StorEdge 3510 FC device sccli gt Ch show enclosure status Id Chassis Vendor Product ID Edge 3510F A 1046 1000 204000COFF003CE3 214000COFF003CI 2 12 003CE3 3 12 003CE3 SU
119. Sccli inquiry Vendor SUN Product StorEdge 3510 Revision 411G Peripheral Device Type 0x0 NVRAM Defaults 411G01 3510 S410F Bootrecord version 1 31H Serial Number 003CE3 Page 80 Serial Number 003CE3161637C100 Page 83 Target Device ID 206000COFF003CE3 IP Address 206 1 111 111 Page DO Fibre Channel Address A7 id 40 Page DO Node Name 206000COEE003CE3 Page DO Port Name 216000COFF803CE3 Ethernet Address 00 C0 FF 00 3C E3 Device Type Primary Page 83 Logical Unit Device ID 600C0FF000000000003CE3161637C100 The following example shows an out of band Sun StorEdge 3510 FC array inquiry sccli 206 1 111 111 inquiry Sccli selected se3000 206 1 111 111 58632 SN 004DE2 Vendor SUN Product StorEdge 3510 Revision 411G NVRAM Defaults 411G 3510 S415F Bootrecord Version 1 31H Serial Number 004DE2 IP Address 206 1 111 111 Ethernet Address 00 C0 FF 00 4D E2 SUN StorEdge 3510 show redundancy mode Description The show redundancy mode command shows whether the two controllers are operating correctly as a redundant pair Returned values include Active Active disabled enabled failed scanning detected and primary or secondary You can also use the show redundancy mode command to monitor the status of an automatic firmware update The Sun StorEdge CLI will display the progression of Failed Scanning Detected and Enabled states Returned values include
120. Specify the day of the month Valid values 1 31 Specify the controller time based on a 24 hour system hh Specify the hour Valid values 0 23 mm Specify the minute Valid values 1 59 ss Specify the seconds Valid values 1 59 Specify the year If you do not specify the year it is automatically set to the year set in the RAID firmware Specify the time zone based on Greenwich Mean Time GMT followed by a plus or minus sign and the number of hours earlier or later your location is from the Greenwich mean time For instance the time zone setting for Japan is GMT 9 and the time zone for New York is GMT 4 or 5 depending on daylight savings If you do not specify the time zone it is automatically set to the time zone set in the RAID firmware Examples The following example sets the controller time and date to September 22 2004 at 1 43 pm in the Pacific Standard time zone during daylight savings time sccli c2t0d0 set controller date sep 22 13 43 00 gmt 7 76 Sun StorEdge 3000 Family CLI 2 4 User s Guide March 2007 set controller name Description The set controller name command specifies a name for the array Note The controller password and controller name share a 32 character space Because the minimum length of the controller password is 1 when the controller password is empty the maximum length for the controller name is 31 When the controller name occupies 31 characters ther
121. StorEdge 3000 family SCSI devices half the drives display a status of Unknown The drives are present but because of a SAF TE design limitation the information does not display Note Sun StorEdge 3000 family FC and SATA enclosures contain two SES processors in a dual controller array and there can be more than one enclosure in a RAID subsystem Syntax show configuration xml x filename Chapter 2 System Function Commands 57 Arguments TABLE 2 19 Arguments for show configuration Argument Description xml x If the x or xml options are specified XML output is generated filename Specify the file name for the configuration file that you want to show 58 Sun StorEdge 3000 Family CLI 2 4 User s Guide March 2007 Examples The following example shows a portion of a Sun StorEdge 3510 FC RAID configuration sccli gt show configuration inquiry data Vendor SUN Product StorEdge 3510 Revision 411G Peripheral Device Type 0x0 NVRAM Defaults 411G01 3510 S410F Bootrecord version 1 31H Serial Number 003CE3 Page 80 Serial Number 003CE3161637C100 Page 83 Logical Unit Device ID Page 83 Target Device ID IP Address 206 6 181 213 600COFF000000000003CE3161637C100 206000COFF003CE3 Page DO Fibre Channel Address A7 id 40 Page DO Node Name 206000C0FF003CE3 Page DO Port Name 216000C0FF803CE3 Ethernet Address Device Type Primary unique iden
122. Sun StorEdge 3000 Family CLI 2 4 User s Guide March 2007 1 Initial Failed Status Response This is the response to the command upon a controller failure and is shown for completeness 2 Scanning Status Install Controller FRU The installed controller is performing self test and scanning disk channels This is also the state where the controller updates the firmware on the newly installed controller if it is not identical to the running firmware version The controllers can remain in this state for up to 10 minutes depending upon system activity 3 Detected Status Redundant Controller Process Starts The installed controller has completed the scanning of the disk channels updated installed controller firmware as required and communicated to the primary controller This status is transitional and normally cannot be detected unless repetitive operations are executed 4 Enabled State Redundant Controller Procedure Completed The installed controller has completed the redundant controller procedure enabling the active active operation Syntax show redundancy mode Examples The following example shows the redundancy status is Enabled and the mode is Active Active for a Sun StorEdge 3510 FC array sccli gt show redundancy mode Primary controller serial number 8009328 Primary controller location Lower Redundancy mode Active Active Redundancy status Enabled Secondary controller serial number 8009200 N
123. TA gt lt K K KK kKEK Kk K K K K Kk K RARE K IK K kck K ok KX K kc hckck K K kK ok kock kckck K XK K Kk K K K K k K Kk K Sos lt manufacturing_date element gt lt K KK KK Kk Kk Kk K V KHK VK KK EK H HK VK K K k BERR RARA RE RA RARA RE HK K Kk h RARA K Kk gt lt ELEMENT manufacturing_date PCDATA gt lt KEK KKK KKK KKK KKK KEKE KKK KEK KKK KKK KEK KEK F lt Ve V KKK KKK KK KKK ko ko KH K Z K gt lt manufacturing_location element gt lt KEK KKK KKK KF K KEKE KK k K K K H K K Kk k KF k k KKK Y k K KKK K Kk k X K k k H Kk k ko ko ko k HK e lt ELEMENT manufacturing_location PCDATA gt Appendix C Show Configuration Command Output 221 lt Ckckckck ck k k k k k kK k kK k k k k k k k k k k k kK k k k k k k k k k k k kK k k k k k ck k k k k k ck X k kk gt lt description element lt kCkckckck ck k k kK k k kK k kK k k k k k k k k k kK k k k k k k kK k k k k kK k k k k k k k kX k k k k k k kX k kk gt lt ELEMENT description PCDATA gt lt kckckckck ck k k k k k k k kK k Kk k ck k k k k k k k k k kK k k k k k k k kK k k k k k k k k k k k k kX k kX X k X kk gt lt channel element The channel info of the RAID system gt s It include these elements gt lt idx the index the physical channel number gt lt logchl Logical Channel number gt mode Channel model
124. The following example shows all the cache settings for a Sun StorEdge 3510 FC device Sccli show cache parameters mode write back optimization sequential sync period 30s current global write policy write back show controller date Description The show controller date command displays the boot time and date current time and date and time zone of the RAID controller Syntax show controller date Chapter 3 Controller and Disk Commands 81 82 Examples The following example shows the controller boot time and date current time and date and time zone sccli gt show controller date Boot time Thu Sep 16 02 37 36 2004 Current time Wed Sep 22 13 43 06 2004 Time Zone GMT 07 00 show controller name Description The show controller name command displays the RAID controller name If the RAID controller name is not set the command returns an empty set of quotation marks Syntax show controller name Examples The following example shows the controller name is test sccli gt show controller name controller name test show inquiry data Description The show inquiry data command displays the data returned by the array controller including the inquiry vendor ID product ID firmware revision and if applicable IP address The output of this command varies from one product to another and from one channel to another When addressing a primary controlle
125. WWN Chapter 5 Logical Drive Partition and Logical Volume Commands 161 Examples The following example unmaps the partition assigned to host channel target ID 0 LUN 3 Sccli show lun maps Ch Tgt LUN ld lv ID Partition Assigned Filter Map 1 0 0 1d0 13843684 00 Primary 1 0 1 lal 295AB786 00 Primary 1 0 2 1d2 0A7F8942 00 Primary 1 0 3 1d2 0A7F8942 00 Primary Sccli unmap partition 1 0 3 sccli gt show lun maps Ch Tgt LUN ld lv ID Partition Assigned Filter Map 1 0 0 1d0 13843684 00 Primary 1 0 1 idi 295AB786 00 Primary 1 0 2 1d2 0A7F8942 00 Primary The following example unmaps the partition from partition ID 0A7F8942 00 Sccli unmap partition 0A7F8942 00 1 162 Sun StorEdge 3000 Family CLI 2 4 User s Guide March 2007 Logical Volume Commands The following commands are explained in this section create logical volume delete logical volume set logical volume show logical volumes create logical volume Description Note Logical volumes are unsuited to some modern configurations such as Sun Cluster environments and do not work in those configurations Use logical drives instead For more information about logical drives see create logical drive on page 131 The create logical volume command creates a logical volume from the specified logical drives on the specified controller The logical drives used to create the logical volume must not already be mapped to an
126. Y RARA k kK K RA RARE RARA RARE RAR EEE 25 gt lt drive_smart_mode element gt lt ROTTER TORRE TOR RE TOR V T X HA eR RE K H FE KR RR V H EK ec ee Fee ee RARE e AR gt lt ELEMENT drive_smart_mode PCDATA gt lt KEK KKK KKK KKK KKK KEK Kk kK HK Hk k Kk kk KKK KKK KKK KKK KKK ko ck KK ko ko ko ko ko m auto global spare element gt lt VK K E K V K VV eR REE Ve V H Ve Ve BERR RARE RE RA K Vk H RA RARA K H k K K lt ELEMENT auto global spare PCDATA gt lt KEK KKK KKK KKK KKK KE KKK KEK KEK KEK KEK KEK KKK KKK KKK KKK KKK KKK KEKE ko ko k ko ko gt lt cache param element The RAID system cache info includes gt write policy The write policy gt lt sync_period gt 1 optimization gt lt gt lt ELEMENT cache param write policy sync period optimization lt KEK KEKE KKK KKK KKK KEK Ve Ve Ve KKK KKK KEKE KEK KEK KKK KKK KKK KKK ko ko V de ko ko ko H H gt lt optimization element can be Enable Disable gt lt cdckkok kckckokckckckok K kK k RE NARRA RARE K K K k RE K K Kk k K X K k RR k K kX k K X Kk kk a lt ELEMENT optimization PCDATA gt
127. Z Shows the status for the LED adjacent to the specified Solaris disk drive slot This argument is not accepted for split bus configurations ch id Shows the status for the LED adjacent to the specified drive within a RAID array Examples The following example shows the status of the LED adjacent to the disk assigned to drive slot 3 for an expansion chassis sccli gt show led status slot 3 enclosure sn 002A4C led slot 3 on The following example shows the status of the LED adjacent to the disk assigned to drive slot 2 for the RAID array sccli gt show led status disk 2 0 enclosure sn 002A4C led slot 0 off unconfigure global spare Description The unconfigure global spare command unconfigures a global spare disk Syntax unconfigure global spare disk 102 Sun StorEdge 3000 Family CLI 2 4 User s Guide March 2007 Arguments TABLE3 14 Arguments for unconfigure global spare Argument Description disk Specify the disk to unconfigure For example specify the disk with target ID 1 on channel 2 as 2 1 Examples The following example unconfigures disk drive ID 5 on channel 2 as a global spare sccli c2t0d0 unconfigure global spare 2 5 Chapter 3 Controller and Disk Commands 103 104 Sun StorEdge 3000 Family CLI 2 4 User s Guide March 2007 CHAPTER 4 Channel Commands This chapter provides the available host drive and redundant controller communication RC
128. _partitions gt lt partition gt lt idx gt 0 lt idx gt effective size 122 07GB effective size lt offset gt 0MB lt offset gt lt mapping gt N A lt mapping gt lt partition gt lt logical_drive gt 250 Sun StorEdge 3000 Family CLI 2 4 Users Guide March 2007 enclosure mgmt device name ses mgmt device name ses component component component component component component component lt temp gt 27 lt lt componen lt component lt temp gt 27 lt lt componen lt component lt temp gt 26 lt lt componen lt component lt temp gt 27 lt lt componen lt component lt temp gt 25 lt lt componen lt component lt temp gt 26 lt lt componen lt component lt temp gt 25 lt lt componen lt component lt temp gt 32 lt lt componen lt component lt temp gt 32 lt lt componen 115884 gt lt component gt 115884 gt lt component gt 114536 gt lt component gt 114536 gt lt component gt 115884 gt lt component gt 114536 gt lt component gt type fan unit 0 type fan unit 1 type fan unit 2 type fan unit 3 type ps unit 0 type ps unit 1 type temp unit 0 temp C type temp unit 1 temp C type temp unit 2 temp C type temp unit 3 temp C type temp unit 4 temp C type temp unit 5 temp C type temp unit 6 temp
129. a different stripe size for any logical drive at the time you create it For more information create logical drive on page 131 Once logical drives are created you can use the set cache parameters command to change the optimization mode while logical drives exist However using the Sun StorEdge CLI set cache parameters command to change optimization mode can result in a pre existing logical drive having a stripe size that because it is inappropriate for that optimization mode could not have been selected at the time the logical drive was created This combination will not yield the best Sun StorEdge 3000 Family CLI 2 4 User s Guide March 2007 performance possible but there is no risk of data loss or other data related problems You can avoid this inefficiency by choosing stripe sizes and an optimization mode that are appropriate for your applications For information on stripe size and optimization modes refer to the Sun StorEdge 3000 Family RAID Firmware User s Guide Syntax set cache parameters random sequential write policy sync period value Arguments TABLE 3 3 Arguments for set cache parameters Argument Description random Optimizes for random access Random I O indicates small blocks of data are written across each drive sequential Optimizes for sequential access Sequential I O indicates large blocks of data are written across each drive write policy Specify when cached data is written to the disk dr
130. access latency 15S disk access latency gcsi io timeout 30s scsi io timeout tag count per drive 32 tag count per drive drive check period 30s drive check period safte polling period 30s safte polling period auto detect drive check Disabled auto detect drive check drive smart mode disabled drive smart mode auto global spare Disabled auto global spare drive param host param queue io count 1024 queue io count luns per host 32 luns per host fibre connection mode loop fibre connection mode inband access enabled inband access host param redundant param lt role gt Redundant Primary lt role gt lt Primary_sn gt 8027229 lt Primary_sn gt lt Redundancy_mode gt Active Active lt Redundancy_mode gt lt Redundancy_status gt Enabled lt Redundancy_status gt lt redundant_config gt Primary controller lt redundant_config gt lt secondary_sn gt 8027194 lt secondary_sn gt lt redundant_param gt lt logical_drive gt ld id 7CO1DB6C ld id ld idx 0 ld idx lt assignment gt Primary lt assignment gt lt status gt Good lt status gt lt raid_level gt RAID 5 lt raid_level gt lt write_policy gt default lt write_policy gt lt block_size gt 128 KB lt block_size gt lt number_of_drives gt 3 lt number_of_drives gt lt physical_drive gt 3 13 3 14 3 16 lt physical_drive gt lt size gt 48 83GB lt size gt lt total_partition
131. ademarks of Sun Microsystems Inc in the U S and in other countries U S Government Rights Commercial use Government users are subject to the Sun Microsystems Inc standard license agreement and applicable provisions of the FAR and its supplements DOCUMENTATION IS PROVIDED AS IS AND ALL EXPRESS OR IMPLIED CONDITIONS REPRESENTATIONS AND WARRANTIES INCLUDING ANY IMPLIED WARRANTY OF MERCHANTABILITY FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE OR NONINFRINGEMENT ARE DISCLAIMED EXCEPT TO THE EXTENT THAT SUCH DISCLAIMERS ARE HELD TO BE LEGALLY INVALID Copyright 2002 2007 Dot Hill Systems Corporation et d autres 2200 Faraday Avenue Suite 100 Carlsbad Californie 92009 Etats Unis Tous droits r serv s Sun Microsystems Inc et Dot Hill Systems Corporation peuvent avoir les droits de propri t intellectuels relatants la technologie incorpor e dans le produit qui est d crit dans ce document En particulier et sans la limitation ces droits de propri t intellectuels peuvent inclure un ou plus des brevets am ricains num r s http www sun com patents et un ou les brevets plus suppl mentaires ou les applications de brevet enattente dans les Etats Unis et dans les autres pays Ce produit ou document est prot g par un copyright et distribu avec des licences qui en restreignent l utilisation la copie la distribution et la d compilation Aucune partie de ce produit ou document ne peut tre reproduite sous aucune for
132. age Commands on page 63 Note To prevent unauthorized access to administrative functions of the RAID controller the Sun StorEdge CLI requires superuser or system administrator privileges for inband access and uses the controller password to authorize users of the out of band interface Note If no command is entered on the command line the Sun StorEdge CLI enters an interactive mode prompting you to enter commands until the quit command is entered All commands operate on the currently selected device 17 Basic Commands The following commands are explained in this section about exit help quit select version about Description The about command displays version copyright build and operating system information Syntax about Examples The following example shows the about text for the Sun StorEdge CLI Sccli about Sun StorEdge 3000 Family CLI Copyright 2002 2005 Dot Hill Systems Corporation All rights reserved Use is subject to license terms sccli version 2 1 0 built 2005 04 30 21 02 build 11 for solaris sparc exit Description The exit command exits the interactive mode You can also use the quit command to exit the Sun StorEdge CLI 18 Sun StorEdge 3000 Family CLI 2 4 User s Guide March 2007 help quit Syntax exit Description The help command displays a short summary of the available commands Syntax help command
133. al volumes with logical volume index numbers 0 and 2 sccli c2t0d0 show logical volumes 1v0 1v2 LV LV ID Size Assigned LDs lv0 02CE9894 4 00GB Primary 2 1d0 1d1 lv2 02CE9894 4 00GB Primary 2 1d0 1d1 Sun StorEdge 3000 Family CLI 2 4 User s Guide March 2007 CHAPTER 6 Firmware Show and Download Commands This chapter provides the firmware disk drive SCSI Enclosure Services SES SCSI Accessed Fault Tolerant Enclosure SAF TE programmable logic device PLD and serial ATA SATA router and path controller show and download commands Topics covered in this chapter include m Show Commands on page 169 m Download Commands on page 175 Note To prevent unauthorized access to administrative functions of the RAID controller the Sun StorEdge CLI requires superuser or system administrator privileges for inband access and uses the controller password to authorize users of the out of band interface Show Commands The following commands are explained in this section show safte device show sata mux show sata router show ses devices 169 show safte device Description Sun StorEdge 3000 family SCSI devices only The show safte device command displays information returned by the SCSI Accessed Fault Tolerant Enclosure SAF TE device embedded in SCSI LVD RAID enclosures or JBODs When this command is issued to an LVD SCSI RAID array with one or more expansion chassis attached the ou
134. alues enabled disabled The delay in seconds or milliseconds before disk access is granted Delay in seconds before disk drive I O timeout Valid values 500ms 1s 2s 4s 6s 7s 8s 10s 15s 20s 30s default Maximum queue depth that the controller uses when queuing commands for each disk drive The default value is 32 Valid values 0 disabled 1 2 4 8 16 32 64 128 Specifies the interval at which the array controller polls the disk drives Valid values 0 disable 500ms 1s 2s 5s 10s 30s Sun StorEdge 3000 Family CLI 2 4 User s Guide March 2007 TABLE4 6 Output for show drive parameters Continued Field Description enclosure Specifies the interval at which the array controller polls the SAF TE polling or SES environmental services processor in the enclosure Valid interval values 0 disabled 50ms 100ms 200ms 500ms 1s 2s 5s 10s 20s 30s 60s auto detect Interval in milliseconds between checks to determine if a failed swap interval drive has been physically replaced The default value of 0 specifies that auto detecting is disabled Valid values 0 5s 10s 15s 30s 60s smart Determines whether the disk drives perform predictive failure analysis Valid values disabled detect only detect perpetual clone detect clone replace auto global Specifies whether the RAID controller automatically allocates disk spare enabled drives as global spares Valid values enabled disable
135. and 135 expanding capacity of logical drive or logical volume 135 F fail command 70 firmware downloading for controller 175 downloading for disks 177 FRUs showing 45 FTP enabling 21 G global spare configuring 92 unconfiguring 102 H help command 19 help accessing 4 host channels configuring 106 viewing 117 host LUN filters naming hosts 23 host parameters setting 110 viewing 117 host WWN creating 23 deleting 24 name entry 23 viewing 27 inband communication device names 10 disabling 110 security 110 inquiry data 82 interactive command mode 5 IP address setting 23 viewing 28 J JBOD 288 Sun StorEdge 3000 Family CLI 2 4 Users Guide March 2007 device names 11 list of commands 194 SAF TE information 170 silencing alarm 71 K keywords 7 L LAN interface configuring 21 LEDs illuminating 95 status 101 list option 8 local spare configuring 130 unconfiguring 152 logical drives adding disks 126 144 checking parity 148 creating 131 deleting 134 expanding 144 identifier 13 index 13 initializing 145 rebuilding 137 149 show disks in 140 shutting down 151 sizing 135 syntax 13 viewing 142 viewing in logical volume 146 write policy 138 logical volumes creating 163 deleting 164 identifier 14 index 14 syntax 14 viewing 146 167 write policy 165 loop maps viewing 60 loop mode viewing 115 LUNs filtering 23 viewing 117 M
136. anges for the controller the write policy automatically changes for the logical drive as well To set the controller write policy use the set cache parameters command For details see set cache parameters on page 73 Specify the initialization mode The default value is online Because logical drive initialization can take up to several hours you can choose to initialize a logical drive online to immediately begin configuring and using the logical drive before initialization is complete However because the controller is building the logical drive while performing I O operations initializing a logical drive online requires more time than offline initialization Specify offline to manually bring the drive online If you do not select online initialization you can configure and use the drive only after initialization is complete Because the controller is building the logical drive without having to also perform I O operations offline initialization requires less time than online initialization Valid values online offline Examples The following example creates a logical drive as RAID 1 with disks 1 through 4 on channel 2 on the primary controller Channel 2 ID 0 is assigned as the global spare sccli c2t0d0 create logical drive raidl 2 1 4 primary global spare 2 0 Chapter 5 Logical Drive Partition and Logical Volume Commands 133 The following example creates a 10 Gbyte RAID 5 volume using six disk drives
137. annel 1 right channel 2 channel 3 channel 4 and channel 5 Valid values for the Sun StorEdge 3511 SATA RAID IOM board include OL OR 1L 1R 2 3 4 and 5 m Ona Sun StorEdge 3511 SATA JBOD IOM board from left to right there are four ports loop A left loop A right loop B left and loop B right Valid value ports for the Sun StorEdge 3511 SATA JBOD IOM include AL AR BL and BR If a device is bypassed the Attributes returned values include S or H m An S means the device was bypassed due to a Sun StorEdge CLI command m AnH means the device was bypassed due to a hardware problem no signal was present show configuration Description The show configuration command displays the array configuration including inquiry information field replaceable unit FRU information SATA information protocol support automatic write through event triggers peripheral device status redundancy mode redundant controller configuration access mode controller boot time and date and the enclosure status which includes the status for the SES or SAF TE device and all chassis components the fan power supply temperature sensor and drive slots The configuration can be displayed onscreen or written to the specified file The output is plain text by default but XML output can be obtained by specifying the xml option To see a sample XML report see Show Configuration Command Output on page 207 Note In split bus configurations on Sun
138. anufacturer gt lt model gt HDS7250SASUN500G lt model gt lt serial_number gt KRVN63ZAGM487D lt serial_number gt lt product_revision gt A20A lt product_revision gt lt wwnn gt 22E4000A3300D7FE lt wwnn gt lt capacity gt 465 76GB lt capacity gt lt remaining_size gt 465 51GB lt remaining_size gt lt Speed gt 200M lt Speed gt ld id 7CO1DB6C ld id ld idx 0 ld idx lt disk gt lt disk gt lt ch gt 3 lt ch gt lt target gt 16 lt target gt lt status gt ONLINE lt status gt lt manufacturer gt HITACHI lt manufacturer gt lt model gt HDS7250SASUN500G lt model gt lt serial_number gt KRVN63ZAGM48XD lt serial_number gt lt product_revision gt A20A lt product_revision gt lt wwnn gt 22E4000A3300D7FC lt wwnn gt lt capacity gt 465 76GB lt capacity gt lt remaining_size gt 465 51GB lt remaining_size gt lt Speed gt 200M lt Speed gt lt ld_id gt 7C01DB6C lt 1d_id gt ld idx 0 ld idx lt disk gt lt disk gt lt ch gt 3 lt ch gt lt target gt 17 lt target gt lt status gt ONLINE lt status gt lt manufacturer gt HITACHI lt manufacturer gt lt model gt HDS7250SASUN500G lt model gt lt serial_number gt KRVN63ZAGM3XUD lt serial_number gt lt product_revision gt A20A lt product_revision gt lt wwnn gt 22E4000A3300D7F5 lt wwnn gt lt capacity gt 465 76GB lt capacity gt lt remaining_size gt 465 51GB lt remaining_size gt lt Speed gt 200M lt Speed gt lt ld_id gt
139. as well To set the controller write policy use the set cache parameters command For details see set cache parameters on page 73 Examples The following example creates a logical volume using 1d0 and 182 and assigns it to the primary controller sccli c2t0d0 create logical volume 1d0 1d2 primary The following example creates a logical volume using IDs 2378FDED 7887DDAB and assigns it to the secondary controller sccli c2t0d0 create logical volume 2378FDED 7887DDAB secondary delete logical volume Description The delete logical volume command deletes the specified logical volumes Caution Any time logical volumes are created or deleted the numbering of logical volume indexes might change After creating or deleting logical volumes issue a show logical volumes command to view an updated list of logical volume indexes Alternatively use logical volume IDs which do not change over the lifetime of the logical volume rather than logical volume indexes For more information see Logical Volume Syntax on page 14 164 Sun StorEdge 3000 Family CLI 2 4 User s Guide March 2007 Note Before you can delete a logical volume you must unmap all assigned LUNs To review LUN maps see show lun maps on page 158 Syntax delete logical volume lv index lo id Arguments TABLE 5 28 Arguments for delete logical volume Argument Description lo index Specify a comma s
140. ate Arguments TABLE2 8 Arguments for show battery status Argument Description u update Specify u or update to automatically enter interactive mode if the battery in service date is not set The in service date is set to the battery board manufacturing date Newer battery boards are programmed with the battery in service date This option is only required for early model battery boards Examples The following example shows battery status for a set of redundant controllers show battery status Battery Type 1 Battery Manufacturing Date Sat Sep 20 16 17 57 2003 Battery Placed In Service Mon Jun 21 18 24 58 2004 Battery Expiration Date Wed Jun 21 18 24 58 2006 Battery Expiration Status OK Battery Type 1 Battery Manufacturing Date Mon Sep 22 15 54 47 2003 Battery Placed In Service Mon Sep 22 15 54 47 2003 Battery Expiration Date Wed Sep 21 15 54 47 2005 Battery Expiration Status Expired Battery Hardware Status OK Battery Hardware Status OK The following example uses the u option which prompts the user to verify the battery date if the battery in service date has not been set previously Sun StorEdge 3000 Family CLI 2 4 User s Guide March 2007 sccli gt Upper Upper Upper Upper Upper show battery status u Bat Bat Bat Bat Bat tery Type 1 tery Manufacturing Date Mon Feb 2 08 00 00 2004 tery Placed In Service Wed Aug 11 20 18 02 2004 tery Expiration Da
141. ation and then a physical drive is connected the controller does not automatically recognize the new drive until the next controller reset This difference in behavior is due to differences between Fibre Channel and SCSI architectures and protocols Note This command is supported on Sun StorEdge 3000 SCSI arrays only Syntax scan disk disk list Chapter 3 Controller and Disk Commands 93 Arguments TABLE3 9 Arguments for scan disk Argument Description disk list Scans specific disks Use any of the following formats ch id ch idm n ch is physical device channel id is the SCSI ID of the device and m to n represents a contiguous range of IDs on the same channel For example 2 0 2 3 or 2 2 5 Examples The following example scans disk 2 Sccli scan disk d2 11 set disk array Description The set disk array command sets disk array parameters including the background logical drive rebuilding priority and hard drive data verification Syntax set disk array normal verify value rebuild verify value init verify value rebuild priority value 94 Sun StorEdge 3000 Family CLI 2 4 User s Guide March 2007 Arguments TABLE3 10 Arguments for set disk array Argument Description normal verify Specify whether to perform Verify after Write during normal I O enabled requests This method affects write performance during normal use disabled rebuild verify Specif
142. ault router address of the network management port Syntax show network parameters Sun StorEdge 3000 Family CLI 2 4 User s Guide March 2007 Examples The following example shows the network parameters for the network management port sccli gt show network parameters ip address 206 235 238 223 netmask 255 255 255 0 gateway 0 0 0 0 mode static show port wwn Description Sun StorEdge 3000 family FC and SATA devices only The show port wwn command displays the worldwide name WWN entries for the FC host channels Note A maximum of 64 host WWN entries can be created Syntax show port wwn Examples The following example shows the worldwide port name WWPN entries for the FC host channels sccli gt show port wwn Ch Id WWPN 40 216000COFF800238 41 216000C0FF900238 43 226000COFFB00238 42 226000COFFA00238 256000C0FFC00238 45 256000COFFD00238 47 266000COFFF00238 46 266000COFFE00238 um ue e oO o gt D Chapter 2 System Function Commands 29 show protocol Description The show protocol command displays all possible network protocols supported by the controller and protocol parameters including the Telnet inactivity timeout value To enable and disable network protocols see set protocol on page 25 Syntax show protocol Examples The following example shows all network protocols for the specified device and shows that the telnet connection does
143. ay the device s configuration X X X X on page 57 show enclosure display the status for all chassis X X X X status on page 38 components including the fan power supply temperature sensor and drive slots show frus on page45 display FRU ID information X X X show inquiry data display SCSI inquiry data for X X X on page 82 selected device show led status on display the status for the specified X X X page 101 disk drive slot in the array enclosure or JBOD Appendix A Summary of Sun StorEdge CLI Options and Commands 195 TABLE A 3 JBOD Commands Continued Sun Sun Sun Sun StorEdge StorEdge StorEdge StorEdge 3310 3320 3120 3510 FC SCSI SCSI SCSI Command Page Number Function JBOD JBOD JBOD JBOD show safte device display status of SAF TE devices X X X on page 170 show ses devices display status of SES devices X on page 173 including the PLD revision version on page 20 display program version X X X X 196 Sun StorEdge 3000 Family CLI 2 4 User s Guide March 2007 APPENDIX B Error and Event Messages This appendix provides a list of error and status messages for the Sun StorEdge CLI For a list of controller error messages many of which are passed through to the Sun StorEdge CLI refer to the Sun StorEdge 3000 Family RAID Firmware User s Guide TABLE B 1 lists the Error and Status messages for the Sun StorEdge CLI TABLEB 1 Sun StorEdge CLI Error and Status Messages Error and Status
144. ccli dev rdsk c0t5d0s2 device is ready Sun StorEdge 3000 Family CLI 2 4 User s Guide March 2007 set cache parameters Description The set cache parameters command sets cache policy write back or write through optimization mode sequential or random and a periodic cache synchronization value Caution Data inconsistency can occur when a controller configured with one optimization mode is used to replace a failed controller with a different mode Caution In a single controller configuration if you set the cache policy to write back data corruption might occur in the event of a controller failure To avoid the possibility of data corruption set the write policy to write through The controller must be reset for this command to take effect Caution All reset commands cause the array to stop responding to I O requests from the host for a period of time This might result in data loss unless all I O activity is suspended by halting all applications that are accessing the array and unmounting any file systems that are mounted from the array In redundant controller configurations these commands affect all LUNs on both controllers Cache Policy The cache policy determines when cached data is written to the disk drives The ability to hold data in cache while it is being written to disk can increase storage device speed during sequential reads Using write through cache the controller writes
145. ces from the back of the Sun StorEdge 3510 FC array and the Sun StorEdge 3511 SATA array as shown in FIGURE 2 3 Right side Front of array Left side FIGURE2 3 Sun StorEdge 3510 FC Array and Sun StorEdge 3511 SATA Array Enclosure Device Orientation Chapter 2 System Function Commands 43 The returned values for the Sun StorEdge 3510 FC array and the Sun StorEdge 3511 SATA array are described in the following table TABLE2 13 Output for Sun StorEdge 3510 FC array and Sun StorEdge 3511 SATA array show enclosure status Enclosure Types Description Fan 0 1 Fan 2 3 PS 0 PS 1 Temp 0 5 Temp 6 7 Temp 8 9 Temp 10 Temp 11 Disk Slot 0 11 Left side power supply fan Right side power supply fan Left side power supply Right side power supply Temperature sensor on chassis Temperature sensor on upper I O module Temperature sensor on lower I O module Temperature sensor on left side power supply module Power supply 0 in FIGURE 2 3 Temperature sensor on right side power supply module Power supply 1 in FIGURE 2 3 Disk slot identifier refers to the backplane field replaceable unit FRU to which disks are connected Note Voltage sensors make sure that the array s voltage is within normal ranges To check the status and determine the location of voltage sensors refer to the Sun StorEdge 3000 Family RAID Firmware User s Guide Enclosure status values include Description Status
146. configure local spare disk ld index ld id Arguments TABLE5 9 Arguments for configure local spare Argument Description disk Specify the disk to configure For example specify the disk with target ID 1 on channel 2 as 2 1 Id index Specify the logical drive index number For example 143 Id id Specify the logical drive ID For example 71038221 Examples The following example configures disk drive ID 5 on channel 2 as a local spare for the logical drive with index number 2 sccli c2t0d0 configure local spare 2 5 1d2 The following example configures disk drive ID 5 on channel 2 as a local spare for the logical drive with ID 2C33AAEA sccli c2t0d0 configure local spare 2 5 2C33AAEA 130 Sun StorEdge 3000 Family CLI 2 4 User s Guide March 2007 create logical drive Description The create logical drive command creates a logical drive with the specified RAID level and disk drives assigns the logical drive to the primary or secondary RAID controller assigns the global spare drives sets the stripe size sets the maximum disk capacity per drive sets the cache write policy and sets the logical drive initialization mode Caution Any time logical drives are created or deleted the numbering of logical drive indexes might change After creating or deleting logical drives issue a show logical drive command to view an updated list of logical drive indexes Or use logical drive IDs wh
147. contains a Sierra Logic SR 1216 FC to SATA protocol router Unlike Sun StorEdge 3000 family FC disk drives the SR 1216 router presents multiple FC target IDs on a single physical hardware port Therefore if a target ID that is presented by an SR 1216 is bypassed the SR 1216 physical port is bypassed This causes the IDs of all SATA drives target IDs that are presented by the SR 1216 port to be removed from the loop Conversely if a target ID that is presented by an SR 1216 is unbypassed all SATA drives target IDs that are presented by the SR 1216 port are restored to the loop Syntax show bypass device ses channel channel loop 1oopa 1oopb Arguments TABLE 2 17 Arguments for show bypass device Argument Description ses channel Specify the drive channel number of the FC port from which to send channel the command The channel must be configured as a drive channel Valid values 0 5 loop Specify the drive loop of the small form factor SFP transceiver for which the bypass information is displayed Loop a is the top slot and loop b is the bottom slot Valid values 1oopa 1oopb a or b Sun StorEdge 3000 Family CLI 2 4 User s Guide March 2007 Examples The following example is sent on channel 2 and shows the bypass information for loop A CH ID TYPE ENCL 2 0 DISK RAID 2 1 DISK RAID 2 2 DISK RAID 2 3 DISK RAID 2 4 DISK RAID 2 5 DISK RAID 2 6 DISK RAID 2 7 DISK RAID 2 8 DIS
148. controller date enclosure network protocol peripheral device peripheral device status total sata mux total sata routers lt KEK KKK KKK KKK KKK KKK KKK KKK KKK KKK KKK KKK KKK KKK KKK ck ko ko ko ko ko ko koX lt total_sata_routers element gt lt FREI kK K KK KK EHK H H Kk K K Vk Kk K K K K RA RE KR kck K k REE RA RARE RAR EERE lt ELEMENT total sata routers PCDATA gt lt KERR KE RRRE KR RENE RRE ke dk RENA RARA EA RARA RRE RARAS gt lt total_sata_mux element gt lt EXARRRERRERARA RRE RRE RRE RRA RRE RRE RARE RARA k kx x k RR gt lt ELEMENT total sata mux PCDATA gt lt KEK KKK KF KY K KKK K K KF KEK KEK KEK K KH Y KKK KE KKK KEK KEK KKK K Kk ck ck Ek KK ko ko ko k k H kx controller date element gt lt RETR KH Fc V a R Ve Ze R RE RRE RE REA TK KH V Y V RR ERRE V KV K ERE H REE RARE k ARE lt ELEMENT controller date PCDATA gt lt ckckckck EKER ERK K K KK k RENA K K K K K KH Kk K K RR a K K K Kk K de K K k K K K kX k ok K K k KX k lt access mode element lt RERXIRXARARERARERER ERE K V ER RE K K RA RARE KHK ERR H V H kX K K k k RARA k K gt lt ELEMENT access_mode PCDATA gt lt N D Te Re ee ee AH VE V Z Re Ne a de H VA R DCT Z Ve K F lt VV DELS de Fo Ve a Ree RFE V Z KHK T H V de H K Z K ES lt time zone element gt lt KEK KKK KKK KKK KKK
149. d disabled show host parameters Description The show host parameters command displays the maximum I O queue depth per LUN the number of LUNs that can be configured per target ID the fibre connection mode point to point or loop for FC and SATA only and inband management access To view the partitions mapped to specific host channels use the show lun maps command For details see show lun maps on page 158 Syntax show host parameters Examples The following example shows the host parameters for a Sun StorEdge 3510 FC array sccli gt show host parameters max luns per id 32 queue depth 1024 fibre connection mode loop inband management enabled Chapter 4 Channel Commands 117 The following example shows the host parameters for a Sun StorEdge 3310 SCSI array sccli gt show host parameters max luns per id 32 queue depth 1024 inband management enabled show inter controller link Description Redundant Sun StorEdge 3000 family FC and SATA arrays only The show inter controller link command displays the status of the port bypass circuit for the specified channel on the array controller in the upper or lower slot If specified the arguments must specify an array controller slot location and a channel specifier If no arguments are specified the upper and lower slots of channels 0 1 4 and 5 are displayed Syntax show inter controller link upper lower channel ch
150. d host channel related parameters including the maximum number of LUNs per target address queue depth inband management access and the FC connection mode FC and SATA devices only For details about configuring a host channel see configure channel on page 106 Note If inband management is disabled by the Sun StorEdge CLL the RAID firmware application or Sun StorEdge Configuration Service and a user attempts to use inband management the message RAID controller not responding displays when a Sun StorEdge CLI command is run If this occurs use out of band management to access the RAID controller with the Sun StorEdge CLI For details see Device Names for Out of Band Communication on page 11 Syntax set host parameters queue depth value max luns per id value fibre connection mode inband management value 110 Sun StorEdge 3000 Family CLI 2 4 User s Guide March 2007 Arguments TABLE4 3 Arguments for set host parameters Argument Description max luns per id queue depth fibre connection mode inband management enabled disabled Examples The following example sets the maximum I O number in the controller queue to 16 Specify the maximum number of LUNs that can be assigned to any one host ID target address Each time a host channel ID is added it uses the number of LUNS allocated in this setting The default setting is 32 LUNs Valid values 1 2 4 8 16 32 Speci
151. d values include the port number and current baud rate In a redundant controller configuration the COM port rate is always the same for both ports Valid rates include 2400 4800 9600 19200 38400 and 115200 Syntax show rs232 configuration Examples The following example shows the baud rate is set to 38400 bps for COMI and COM2 sccli gt show rs232 configuration COM1 speed 38400bps COM2 speed 38400bps Component Status Commands The following commands are explained in this section set auto write through trigger show access mode show auto write through trigger show battery status show enclosure status Chapter 2 System Function Commands 31 show frus Show peripheral device status For details on displaying all the components for an array see show configuration on page 57 set auto write through trigger Description Use the set auto write through trigger command to configure the array to dynamically switch from write back cache to write through cache or to shut down the controller if a specified event occurs For details on setting the write policy see set cache parameters on page 73 Syntax set auto write through trigger param value Arguments TABLE 2 6 Arguments for set auto write through trigger Argument Description controller If the cache setting is set to write back specify whether the cache failure setting automatically defaults to write through cache wh
152. ddress Specify a host name or the IP address for the host of the primary agent port Optionally specify the TCP IP port number to use The default value 58632 is the only supported value Disk Device Syntax A physical disk attached to the array can be identified with any of the following TABLE 1 4 Disk Device Syntax Syntax Description ch id Dotted decimal format where ch is physical device channel and id is the SCSI ID of the device ch m n Where ch is physical device channel and m to n represents a contiguous range of IDs on the same channel sdn or JBOD LVD disks only Specify a disk device using a Solaris or SPARC c lt X gt t lt Y gt d lt Z gt device name such as sd31 or c1t0d0 when a JBOD chassis is selected 12 Sun StorEdge 3000 Family CLI 2 4 User s Guide March 2007 Logical Drive Syntax Logical drives can be specified by one of the following alphanumeric strings m an eight digit hexadecimal logical drive identifier m a logical drive index composed of the prefix ld followed by a temporary decimal ordinal number ranging from 0 to n 1 where n is the number of logical drives configured on the array Note Logical drive indexes can change whenever a logical drive is deleted while a logical drive identifier never changes over the life of the logical drive The logical drive index number referenced with each logical drive is dynamic it might change when logical drives are created or deleted T
153. del gt HDS7225SASUN250G lt model gt lt serial_number gt VNRJ9HC6CYAIGM lt serial_number gt lt product_revision gt A6DA lt product_revision gt lt wwnn gt 22E4000A330014EB lt wwnn gt lt capacity gt 232 88GB lt capacity gt lt remaining_size gt 232 63GB lt remaining_size gt lt Speed gt 200M lt Speed gt ld id 200000000 1d id lt ld_idx gt N A lt 1d_idx gt lt disk gt 258 Sun StorEdge 3000 Family CLI 2 4 Users Guide March 2007 disk lt ch gt 3 lt ch gt lt target gt 4 lt target gt lt status gt USED lt status gt lt manufacturer gt HITACHI lt manufacturer gt lt model gt HDS7225SASUN250G lt model gt lt serial_number gt VNRJ3EC6CHGG8M lt serial_number gt lt product_revision gt A6DA lt product_revision gt lt wwnn gt 22E4000A33FFFF04 lt wwnn gt lt capacity gt 232 88GB lt capacity gt lt remaining_size gt 232 63GB lt remaining_size gt lt Speed gt 200M lt Speed gt 1d id 200000000 1d id lt ld_idx gt N A lt 1d_idx gt lt disk gt lt disk gt lt ch gt 3 lt ch gt lt target gt 5 lt target gt lt status gt USED lt status gt lt manufacturer gt HITACHI lt manufacturer gt lt model gt HDS7225SBSUN250G lt model gt lt serial_number gt VDB41BT4C5SY7C lt serial_number gt lt product_revision gt A81A lt product_revision gt lt wwnn gt 22E4000A33000AD4 lt wwnn gt lt capacity gt 232 88GB lt capacity gt lt remaining_size gt 232 63GB lt
154. dge 3000 family SCSI devices only Note Some redundant controller configuration values including local remote redundancy mode secondary RS 232 port status and communication channel type are legacy parameters that are no longer used show loop map Description Note This command should only be used by technical support personnel during troubleshooting procedures Sun StorEdge 3000 family FC and SATA devices only The show 1oop map command shows the FC loop positional map for a given channel This information shows how the FC devices are connected in the loop The positional map displays the Arbitrated Loop Physical Address ALPA and the SCSI Select ID that corresponds to that ALPA Use the positional loop map during the diagnostic process to determine which devices to selectively bypass in order to isolate faulty devices 60 Sun StorEdge 3000 Family CLI 2 4 User s Guide March 2007 There can be two RAID controllers on each drive loop The first device displayed in the loop map is the RAID controller that executes the diagnostics and performs the port bypass operations Both ALPAs and SCSI Select IDs are displayed Additional information is also displayed including device type chassis enclosure ID and slot number that the device resides in Sun StorEdge 3511 SATA Array The Sun StorEdge 3511 SATA array contains a Sierra Logic SR 1216 FC to SATA protocol router Unlike FC disk drives the SR 1216 router presents multi
155. dge 3510 SN 000187 Sccli version 2 1 0 Network Commands The following commands are explained in this section configure network interface create host wwn name delete host wwn name set protocol show host wwn names show ip address show network parameters show port wwn show protocol show rs232 configuration configure network interface Description The configure network interface command configures the local area network LAN interface enabling the telnet File Transfer Protocol FTP Simple Network Management Protocol SNMP and out of band management functions Note If you assign an IP address to an array to manage it out of band for security reasons consider using an IP address on a private network rather than a publicly routable network Using the controller firmware to set a password for the controller limits unauthorized access to the array Changing the firmware s Network Protocol Support settings can provide further security by disabling the ability to remotely connect to the array using individual protocols such as HTTP HTTPS telnet FTP and SSH Refer to the Communication Parameters section of the Sun StorEdge 3000 Family RAID Firmware User s Guide for more information Chapter 2 System Function Commands 21 22 Syntax For dynamic addressing use the following syntax configure network interface lan0 rarp dhcp For static addressing use the following syntax confi
156. ding the logical drive without having to also perform I O operations offline expansion requires less time than online expansion Valid values online offline 136 Sun StorEdge 3000 Family CLI 2 4 User s Guide March 2007 Examples The following example expands each physical drive in logical drive 5 by 36 Gbyte and brings the logical drive online sccli gt expand 1d5 36GB online rebuild Description The rebuild command rebuilds the specified logical drive RAID levels 1 3 and 5 are supported If you attempt to perform the rebuild command on an unsupported RAID level or if no spare drives are available an error is returned In most cases you do not need to use this command because replaced drives are automatically rebuilt If a spare is not present when the failure occurs or for some reason the drive does not rebuild you can use this command to manually start the rebuild process Also if the rebuild process is interrupted by a reset use this command to restart the rebuilding process The time required to rebuild a logical drive is determined by the size of the logical drive the I O that is being processed by the controller and the array s rebuild priority setting To review the rebuild priority run the show disk array command For details see show disk array on page 97 Syntax rebuild ld index ld id Arguments TABLE 5 14 Arguments for rebuild Argument Description Id index Reb
157. do not abbreviate the command name The general syntax for commands in single command mode is sccli option device name host name port command parameters Except for the help about and version commands all Sun StorEdge CLI commands require the specification of a device name The following table shows the parameters and options that are used with commands in the following chapters TABLE 1 2 also shows the options that can be used to simplify script creation and retrieve information TABLE 1 2 Command Parameters and Options Parameter or Option Short Form Description ch id lun device disk A single host LUN mapping for a logical unit on a host channel can be specified using 3 dotted decimals in this form where ch is the physical host channel number id is the SCSI ID of the logical unit and 1un is the logical unit number For more information see Device Names for Inband Communication on page 10 and Device Names for Out of Band Communication on page 11 Physical disk drives are specified as two decimal integers separated by a period The first number is the physical channel number and the second number is the SCSI target ID for the drive on that channel For example specify the disk with target ID 1 on channel 2 as 2 1 Chapter 1 Overview 7 TABLE1 2 Command Parameters and Options Continued Parameter or Option Short Form Description disk disk disk list help usa
158. e Do not include spaces before or after the commas when specifying a logical drive list Logical Volume Syntax Logical volumes are specified by one of the following alphanumeric strings m an eight digit hexadecimal logical volume identifier m a logical volume index composed of the prefix lv followed by a temporary decimal ordinal number ranging from 0 to n 1 where n is the number of logical volumes configured on the array Note Logical volume indexes can change whenever a logical volume is deleted while a logical volume identifier never changes over the life of the logical volume The logical volume index number referenced with each logical volume is dynamic it might change when logical volumes are created or deleted The index number is used strictly as a placeholder that enables you to visually keep track of logical volumes For example if four logical volumes exist and LV2 is deleted the existing LV3 dynamically changes to LV2 and LV4 changes to LV3 Only the LV index number changes all LUN mapping and data on the logical volume remains unchanged Care must be taken not to assume that a logical volume keeps the same logical volume index after creating or deleting any logical volume or rebooting the array controller A list of logical volumes identifiers or indexes can be specified by concatenating one or more logical drive identifiers or logical volume indexes separating them with commas Caution
159. e A A pc150_rev BB42 ta mux gata mux Ch 3 id 10 mus sn n a mus type A A pc150_rev BB45 pc150_boot 0300 gt lt sa ta_mux gt Appendix C Show Configuration Command Output 265 sata mux Ch 3 id 11 mus sn 002E60 pc150_boot 0300 gt lt sata_mux gt sata mux ch 3 id 13 mux sn 00D7F9 pc150_boot 0300 gt lt sata_mux gt sata mux ch 3 id 14 mux_sn 00D7FE pc150_boot 0300 gt lt sata_mux gt sata mux ch 3 id 16 mux sn 00D7FC pc150_boot 0300 gt lt sata_mux gt sata mux ch 3 id 17 mux_sn 00D7F5 pc150_boot 0300 gt lt sata_mux gt lt sata_mux ch 3 id 18 mux_sn 00D800 pc150_boot 0300 gt lt sata_mux gt sata mux ch 3 id 19 mux_sn 00D7FA pc150_boot 0300 gt lt sata_mux gt sata mux ch 3 id 20 mux_sn 00D7FF pc150_boot 0300 gt lt sata_mux gt sata mux ch 3 id 21 mux_sn 00D7FD pc150_boot 0300 gt lt sata_mux gt sata mux ch 3 id 22 mux sn 00D7F7 pc150_boot 0300 gt lt sata_mux gt lt sata_mux ch 3 id 23 mux sn 00D7F8 pc150_boot 0300 gt lt sata_mux gt sata mux ch 3 id 24 mux sn 00D7F6 pc150_boot 0300 gt lt sata_mux gt access mode out of band access mode time zone GMT 05 15 time zone drive side statistics device statistics channel 3 channel lt id gt 0 lt id gt lt type gt SDISK lt type gt lt reset gt 0 lt reset gt lt LinkFa
160. e controller name has been set to 1023456789 10 characters so the maximum length of the password allowed is 22 sccli c2t0d0 set controller password 1234567890abcdef1234567890abcdef controller current acceptable max length of password 22 Sccli get set operation error failed to check set password To remove an existing password specify a zero length string with a pair of double quote characters For example sccli c2t0dO set controller password set rs232 configuration Description The set rs232 configuration command specifies the speed in bits per second for the specified RAID controller port Single controller configurations have a single RS 232 port port 1 Redundant controllers have a second port port 2 Usually both ports are connected to support controller failover so both should be set to the same speed The default speed is 38400 The controller must be reset for this change to take effect 78 Sun StorEdge 3000 Family CLI 2 4 User s Guide March 2007 Caution All reset commands cause the array to stop responding to I O requests from the host for a period of time This might result in data loss unless all I O activity is suspended by halting all applications that are accessing the array and unmounting any file systems that are mounted from the array In redundant controller configurations these commands affect all LUINs on both controllers After running a reset command to stay in
161. e on page 181 microcode that resides on the MUX boards behind the SATA router Appendix A Summary of Sun StorEdge CLI Options and Commands 187 TABLEA 2 Platform support for RAID Array Commands Continued Sun Sun Sun Sun StorEdge StorEdge StorEdge StorEdge 3510 FC 3511 SATA 3310 SCSI 3320 SCSI Command Page Number Function Array Array Array Array download sata download SR 1216 router X router firmware on firmware to accessible SR page 182 1216 routers behind the RAID controller download ses download enclosure SES X X firmware on page 183 firmware exit on page 18 exit the Sun StorEdge CLI expand on page 135 expand a logical drive by the X X X X specified size per available physical drive fail on page 70 fail a controller in a X X X X redundant controller pair help on page 19 display help for commands X X X map partition on map a logical drive or logical X page 155 volume partition to a host channel target LUN mute on page 71 silence the enclosure alarm X X X password on page71 specify the array controller password quit on page 19 exit the program rebuild on page 137 rebuild the specified logical X X X drive reset controller reset the array controller X X X X on page 72 reset nvram on restore NVRAM to factory X X X X page 50 defaults scan disk on scans and makes available a X X page 93 hard drive without having to shut down the array select on page 20 speci
162. e create logical drive command For details see create logical drive on page 131 To view logical drives use the show logical drive command For details see show logical drive on page 142 Syntax abort create ld index ld id 122 SunStorEdge 3000 Family CLI 2 4 User s Guide March 2007 Arguments TABLE 5 1 Arguments forabort create Argument Description ld index Specify the logical drive index number For example 143 Id id Specify the logical drive ID For example 71038221 Examples The following example stops the creation of logical drive 8 sccli gt abort create 1d8 abort expand Description The abort expand command stops the expansion of a logical drive To expand a logical drive use the expand command For details see expand on page 135 To view the progress of an expansion use the show logical drives expanding command For details see show logical drives expanding on page 144 Syntax abort expand ld index ld id Arguments TABLE 5 2 Arguments for abort expand Argument Description ld index Specify the logical drive index number For example 143 Id id Specify the logical drive ID For example 71038221 Chapter 5 Logical Drive Partition and Logical Volume Commands 123 Examples The following example stops the expansion of logical drive 8 Sccli abort expand 1d8 abort media check Description The abort media check co
163. e effective for arrays with sequential reads Sun StorEdge 3000 Family CLI 2 4 User s Guide March 2007 striping terminator UPS volume write back cache write policy write through cache WWN The storing of sequential blocks of incoming data on all the different physical drives in a logical drive This method of writing data increases the disk array throughput because multiple drives are working simultaneously retrieving and storing RAID 0 1 0 3 and 5 and all use striping A part used to end a SCSI bus Terminators prevent energy from reflecting back into a cable plant by absorbing the radio frequency signals Uninterruptible Power Supply Also called a logical unit number or LUN a volume is one or more drives that can be grouped into a unit for data storage A cache writing strategy in which the array controller receives the data to be written to disk stores it in the memory buffer and immediately sends the host operating system a signal that the write operation is complete without waiting until the data is actually written to the disk drive Within a short time the controller when not busy writes the data to the disk drive A cache writing strategy used to control write operations The write policy options are CIFS write back and write through cache A cache writing strategy in which the array controller writes the data to the disk drive before signaling the host operating system that the process is c
164. e following example fails the primary controller and uses the yes option so no prompt is displayed before the controller fails sccli c2t0d0 yes fail primary Description The mute command silences the controller s audible alarm After the fault condition that caused the alarm to sound is cleared the next fault condition causes the alarm to sound again For details on alarms refer to the Sun StorEdge 3000 Family Installation Operation and Service Guide for your array Note This command works on RAID subsystems It does not work on JBODs To manually silence a JBOD alarm push the Reset button on the right ear of the array Syntax mute controller password Description Use the password command in scripts to specify the password assigned to the array controller when the user is not available to respond to password prompts The correct password must be supplied when issuing potentially dangerous commands to the array over a network connection For interactive sessions the Sun StorEdge CLI prompts the user for this password only when necessary No password is required when accessing the array using inband SCSI For details on setting the password see set controller password on page 77 Syntax password password Note Use quotation marks around password strings that contain spaces or apostrophes Chapter 3 Controller and Disk Commands 71 72 Examples The following example sup
165. e is only one character left for the controller password and vice versa Syntax set controller name controller name Examples The following example sets the controller name as testname sccli c2t0d0 set controller name testname To remove an existing controller name specify a zero length string with a pair of double quote characters For example sccli c2t0d0 set controller name set controller password Description The set controller password command specifies a password that protects the RS 232 character interface telnet and FTP services from unauthorized use Note The controller password and controller name share a 32 character space Because the minimum length of the controller name is 1 when the controller name is empty the maximum length for the controller password is 31 When the controller password occupies 31 characters there is only one character left for the controller name and vice versa Chapter 3 Controller and Disk Commands 77 Syntax set controller password password Examples The following example sets the controller password as test123 sccli c2t0d0 set controller password test123 The following example shows how the password length is checked If you enter a maximum length for the password that exceeds the maximum allowed based on the length of the controller name you will get an error As shown in this example th
166. e original data can be reconstructed using the parity information and the information on the remaining drives Allows data to be stored in a predesignated area of a disk or RAM random access memory Caching is used to speed up the operation of RAID arrays disk drives computers and servers or other peripheral devices 279 capacity CH channel CISPR DHCP disk mirroring EMC EMU Fabric Fabric switch failover fault tolerance fault tolerant logical drive FC AL Fibre Channel Fibre Channel HBAs 280 The total number of physical drives available for data storage in a RAID array logical drive For example if the capacity is N 1 and the total number of disk drives in a logical drives is six 36 Mbyte drives the disk space available for storage is equal to five disk drives 5 x 36 Mbyte or 180 Mbyte Channel Any path used for the transfer of data and control information between storage devices and a storage controller or I O adapter Also refers to one SCSI bus on a disk array controller Each disk array controller provides at least one channel International Special Committee on Radio Interference Dynamic Host Configuration Protocol See mirroring RAID1 Electromagnetic compatibility Event monitoring unit Fibre Channel network built around one or more switches A Fabric switch functions as a routing engine that actively directs data transfer from source to destination and arbitrates every c
167. ee show ses devices on page 173 Note The download pld hardware command does not support a live upgrade a hot download operation Shut down the array before performing this command When the download completes restart the device to activate the new hardware Syntax download pld hardware filename Arguments TABLE 6 3 Arguments for download pld hardware Argument Description filename Specify the firmware file name for the file that you want to download Examples The following example downloads the hardware using the SES device in the RAID controller with the IP address 192 168 0 1 sccli 192 168 0 1 download pld hardware pldiri0 s3r The following example downloads the hardware using the SES device to a FC JBOD unit sccli dev es ses3 download pld hardware pldlr10 s3r Chapter 6 Firmware Show and Download Commands 179 180 download safte firmware Description Sun StorEdge 3000 family SCSI devices only The download safte firmware command downloads firmware into the microprocessors for the SCSI Accessed Fault Tolerant Enclosure SAF TE device within a SCSI RAID controller or JBOD The firmware file contains code for the various microprocessors that monitor and control the enclosure The Sun StorEdge CLI detects whether the firmware file is a more recent version If the version is out of date the Sun StorEdge CLI will not download the firmware However you can use the
168. eed gt 200M lt Speed gt lt ld_id gt 460FDB54 lt 1d_id gt lt ld_idx gt 2 lt 1d_idx gt lt disk gt lt disk gt lt ch gt 3 lt ch gt lt target gt 23 lt target gt lt status gt ONLINE lt status gt lt manufacturer gt HITACHI lt manufacturer gt lt model gt HDS7250SASUN500G lt model gt lt serial_number gt KRVN63ZAGL2HGD lt serial_number gt lt product_revision gt A20A lt product_revision gt lt wwnn gt 22E4000A3300D7F8 lt wwnn gt lt capacity gt 465 76GB lt capacity gt lt remaining_size gt 465 51GB lt remaining_size gt lt Speed gt 200M lt Speed gt lt ld_id gt 460FDB54 lt 1d_id gt ld idx 2 ld idx lt disk gt 264 Sun StorEdge 3000 Family CLI 2 4 Users Guide March 2007 disk lt ch gt 3 lt ch gt lt target gt 24 lt target gt lt status gt ONLINE lt status gt lt manufacturer gt HITACHI lt manufacturer gt lt model gt HDS7250SASUN500G lt model gt lt serial_number gt KRVN63ZAGM8DGD lt serial_number gt lt product_revision gt A20A lt product_revision gt lt wwnn gt 22E4000A3300D7F6 lt wwnn gt lt capacity gt 465 76GB lt capacity gt lt remaining_size gt 465 51GB lt remaining_size gt lt Speed gt 200M lt Speed gt lt ld_id gt 460FDB54 lt 1d_id gt ld idx 2 ld idx lt disk gt lt config_components gt lt hostwwns gt lt hostwwns gt lt total_sata_routers gt 2 lt total_sata_routers gt lt sata_router encl_id
169. ely removed from the chassis Other logical drives in the array are still accessible if only one logical drive is shut down Caution This command is not reversible To access the logical drive again the array must be rebooted Caution Any time logical drives are created or deleted the numbering of logical drive indexes might change After creating or deleting logical drives issue a show logical drive command to view an updated list of logical drive indexes Or use logical drive IDs which do not change over the lifetime of the logical drive rather than logical drive indexes For more information see Logical Drive Syntax on page 13 Note A logical drive that belongs to a logical volume cannot be shut down Syntax shutdown logical drive ld index Id id Note The abbreviation 1d can be substituted for the keyword 1ogical drive Chapter 5 Logical Drive Partition and Logical Volume Commands 151 Arguments TABLE 5 20 Arguments for shutdown logical drive Argument Description ld index Specify the logical drive index number For example 143 Id id Specify the logical drive ID For example 71038221 Examples The following example shuts down the logical drive and then shows the status of that drive sccli gt shutdown logical drive 1d3 WARNING This is a potentially dangerous operation The logical drive will be placed permanently offline A controller reset will
170. en a controller event trigger operation such as a controller failure occurs Valid values enabled disabled battery backup If the cache setting is set to write back specify whether the cache failure setting automatically defaults to write through cache when a battery backup event trigger operation such as low voltage on a battery backup device occurs Valid values enabled disabled ac power loss If the cache setting is set to write back specify whether the cache setting automatically defaults to write through cache when a power loss event trigger operation such as a power failure occurs Valid values enabled disabled 32 Sun StorEdge 3000 Family CLI 2 4 User s Guide March 2007 TABLE2 6 Arguments for set auto write through trigger Continued Argument Description power supply If the cache setting is set to write back specify whether the cache failure setting automatically defaults to write through cache when a power supply event trigger operation such as a power supply failure occurs Valid values enabled disabled fan failure If the cache setting is set to write back specify whether the cache setting automatically defaults to write through cache when a fan event trigger operation such as a fan failure occurs Valid values enabled disabled temperature Specify whether to force a controller shutdown if a temperature is exceeded delay detected that exceeds system threshold limits Adjust this setting to
171. eparated list of logical volume indexes for example 1v0 1v1 1v2 lv id Specify a logical volumes using an eight digit hexadecimal logical volume ID for example 3C24554F Examples The following example deletes the logical volume with the logical volume index number 2 sccli c2t0d0 delete logical volume 1v2 The following example deletes the logical volume with the logical volume ID number 3C24554F sccli c2t0d0 delete logical volume 3C24554F set logical volume Description The set logical volume command sets the write policy and controller assignment for the specified logical volume Before using this command you must create a logical volume For more details see create logical volume on page 163 Chapter 5 Logical Drive Partition and Logical Volume Commands 165 166 Note Logical volumes are unsuited to some modern configurations such as Sun Cluster environments and do not work in those configurations Use logical drives instead For more information about logical drives see create logical drive on page 131 7 Syntax set logical volume lv index lv id assignment write policy Arguments TABLE 5 29 Arguments for set logical volume Argument Description lv index Set specific drives in a logical volume The index number is generated from the Sun StorEdge CLI Use the show logical volumes command to find the number lo id Set specific drives in a logical volu
172. eplace the failed drive Or if a drive fails in the SATA expansion unit a SATA global spare is used to replace the failed drive If a failure occurs and the appropriate drive type is not available as a global spare the failed drive will not be replaced automatically For more information refer to the Sun StorEdge 3000 Family RAID Firmware User s Guide Syntax configure global spare disk 92 Sun StorEdge 3000 Family CLI 2 4 User s Guide March 2007 Arguments TABLE3 8 Arguments for configure global spare Argument Description disk Specify the disk to configure For example specify the disk with target ID 1 on channel 2 as 2 1 When you assign a global spare the system automatically assigns global spare status to the unassigned drive with the lowest drive ID This enables the array to use the global spare to rebuild a logical drive automatically without user intervention when a failing drive needs to be replaced Examples The following example configures disk drive ID 5 on channel 2 as a global spare sccli c2t0d0 configure global spare 2 5 scan disk Description The scan disk command scans and makes available a hard drive without having to shut down the array When a Sun StorEdge 3000 family SCSI array is powered on the controller scans all physical drives that are connected through drive channels Unlike Sun StorEdge 3000 FC and SATA arrays if a Sun StorEdge 3000 family SCSI array has completed initializ
173. er firmware PC BB42 dat download sata router firmware Description Sun StorEdge 3000 family SATA devices only The download sata router firmware command downloads SR 1216 router firmware to all SATA routers in the SATA unit including SATA RAID controllers expansion units and JBODs Before downloading the SATA router firmware the Sun StorEdge CLI checks the redundancy of all SATA routers If the configuration is redundant then a live upgrade hot download is performed Caution All download commands are potentially dangerous If the configuration is not redundant the user cannot perform a live upgrade Since routers can cause critical damage to the RAID system in a non redundant configuration the controller must be shut down before the download and must be reset after the download In single controller and non redundant configurations the Sun StorEdge CLI prompts the user to continue If the user specifies Y at the prompt the Sun StorEdge CLI shuts down the controller performs the download and then resets the controller When the controller shuts down the host is prevented from performing I O for several minutes To manually check the array redundancy run a show sata router command Two routers are assigned to the same chassis in a redundant configuration The Encl SN column displays the same chassis serial number for both routers For details on the show sata router command see show sata router on page 172 S
174. erver Note You cannot use the Sun StorEdge CLI and Sun StorEdge Configuration Service at the same time to configure monitor or maintain an array 2 SunStorEdge 3000 Family CLI 2 4 User s Guide March 2007 To access the Sun StorEdge CLI follow the appropriate procedure for your operating system The Sun StorEdge CLI start up time depends on several factors m the number of device files in dev es and dev rdsk m the I O load that is presented to any devices on the system m the behavior of the SES driver The SES driver exhibits undesirable behavior when the Sun StorEdge CLI attempts to open a device file corresponding to a non existent SES device This is similar to the way the format 1M command startup time depends on the number of disk devices on the system and the I O load presented to those devices Note To prevent unauthorized access to administrative functions of the RAID controller the Sun StorEdge CLI requires superuser or system administrator privileges for in band access and uses the controller password to authorize users of the out of band interface To Access the Sun StorEdge CLI from UNIX Operating Systems To access the Sun StorEdge CLI from the Solaris operating system or Linux HP UX or AIX operating systems perform the following steps To access the Sun StorEdge CLI log in as root on the server that is attached to the array Type sccli withoptions and commands as described in this g
175. es type read only or read write include exclude Sun StorEdge 3000 family FC and SATA devices only Specify include to grant LUN access to the host identified by the WWN and WWN Mask Type exclude to deny the identified host LUN access If no host has been granted access to the selected LUN by specifying include all hosts can access that LUN Once any host is granted access to a LUN only hosts with explicit access with include specified can access that LUN mask Sun StorEdge 3000 family FC and SATA devices only Specify the WWN Mask LUN access is granted based on the host identified by WWN and mask name Sun StorEdge 3000 family FC and SATA devices only To set a name for the filter type the name you want to use Examples The following example maps partition 0 of the logical drive with index number 2 to LUN 0 of channel 1 on ID 112 and 113 sccli c2t0d0 map 1d2 00 channel 1 target 112 lun 0 The following example maps partition 0 of the logical drive with ID 2D1A2222 to LUN 0 of channel 1 on ID 112 sccli c2t0d0 map 2D1A2222 00 channel 1 target 112 lun 0 The following example maps partition 0 of the logical volume with index number 2 to LUN 0 of channel 1 on ID 112 It sets access permission to read write includes the filter so all hosts can access the LUN and names it sabre 2 sccli c2t0d0 map 1v2 00 1 112 0 read write include sabre 2 Chapter 5 Logical Drive Partition and Logical Volume
176. es show logical drives show logical drives show logical drives show logical drives 142 add disk 144 expanding 144 initializing 145 logical volume 146 parity check 148 rebuilding 149 show media check 149 Contents vii show stripe size list 150 shutdown logical drive 151 unconfigure local spare 152 Partition Commands 153 configure partition 154 map partition 155 show lun maps 158 show partitions 159 unmap partition 160 Logical Volume Commands 163 create logical volume 163 delete logical volume 164 set logical volume 165 show logical volumes 167 6 Firmware Show and Download Commands 169 Show Commands 169 show safte device 170 show sata mux 171 show sata router 172 show ses devices 173 Download Commands 175 download controller firmware 175 download disk firmware 177 download pld hardware 179 download safte firmware 180 download sata path controller firmware 181 download sata router firmware 182 download ses firmware 183 viii Sun StorEdge 3000 Family CLI 2 4 User s Guide March 2007 Summary of Sun StorEdge CLI Options and Commands 185 Error and Event Messages 197 Show Configuration Command Output 207 Show Configuration Output 208 XML DTD for the show configuration xml Command 215 Sample Show Configuration XML Output 240 Glossary 279 Index 287 Contents ix x SunStorEdge 3000 Family CLI 2 4 User s Guide March 2007 Preface Use the Sun StorEdge 3000 Family Command Line In
177. es returned values include S F or H m An S means the device was bypassed due to a Sun StorEdge CLI command m An F means a drive fault caused the bypass m AnH means the device was bypassed due to a hardware problem no signal was present show bypass RAID Description Note This command should only be used by technical support personnel during troubleshooting procedures Sun StorEdge 3000 family FC and SATA arrays only The show bypass RAID command displays the hardware bypass status of the RAID controllers on Loop A and Loop B In a redundant RAID controller system there is a RAID controller in the top slot of the chassis and a RAID controller in the bottom slot of the chassis Each RAID controller has a connection to Loop A and Loop B In a normal redundant RAID controller system the top and bottom RAID controllers indicate unbypassed status on both loops If a RAID controller has failed due to natural causes or has failed as a result of the fail primary or fail secondary command the show bypass RAID command indicates that the RAID controller is bypassed Syntax show bypass raid Examples The following example shows the bypass status of the RAID controllers sccli gt show bypass raid SLOT LOOP BYP STATUS TOP LOOP A Bypassed TOP LOOP B Bypassed BOTTOM LOOPB A Unbypassed BOTTOM LOOPB B Unbypassed 54 Sun StorEdge 3000 Family CLI 2 4 User s Guide March 2007 show bypass SFP
178. es these elements gt 1 idx the index gt 1 name the name of the FRU gt 1 description gt 1 part number the part number gt 1 serial number the serial number gt revision gt 1 manufacturing date Manufacture Date gt 1 manufacturing location Manufacture Location gt manufacturer jedec id Vendor JEDEC ID gt 1 fru location gt 1 chassis serial number sn gt rad ELEMENT fru idx name description part_number serial_number revision manufacturing_date manufacturing_location manufacturer jedec id fru location chassis serial number fru status 220 Sun StorEdge 3000 Family CLI 2 4 Users Guide March 2007 lt KKK KK Kk k k K X k K K K k ER Kk XK K KKH K kk K X RRR K k Kk K K K K K k k RARA RA k k K K RA K K gt lt fru status element gt lt KKK KkK K K K K K Y K K K RE K K K K K k K k RRA K K K k ok ck RARE RE K K k K K k k k K K K k Kk k gt lt ELEMENT fru_status PCDATA gt lt KEK KKK KKK K Y KX KKK KEK K K K KKK KKK KKK KEK KKK KKK KKK X KF k kX H Kk k ko K k k Hk cT lt idx element gt lt K TE Ve KKK KKK KKK KKK KEK VE V Z KKK KKK KKK KEK KKK KKK KKK KKK KEKE KK ko ko ko KEKE lt ELEMENT idx PCDATA gt lt KEK KKK KK KKK KKK KKK KEK KKK KK KKK KEK KEK KKK KKK KKK ko c
179. escription The show auto write through trigger command displays the controller event trigger configuration including whether the array dynamically switches from write back cache to write through cache or shuts down the controller if a specified event occurs The specified events include fan failure power supply failure battery back up failure AC power loss and temperature that exceeds system threshold limits Syntax show auto write through trigger Examples The following example shows the event trigger information for a Sun StorEdge 3510 FC array sccli gt show auto write through trigger controller failure enabled battery backup failure enabled ups ac power loss disabled power supply failure enabled fan failure enabled temperature exceeded delay enabled Sun StorEdge 3000 Family CLI 2 4 User s Guide March 2007 Returned Values The returned values are described in the following table TABLE 2 7 Field Output for show auto write through trigger Description controller failure battery backup failure ups ac power loss power supply failure fan failure temperature exceeded delay show battery status Description Controller failure event trigger status Battery backup unit has failed or is not fully charged UPS AC power loss Power supply failure Fan failure Number of seconds delay before controller shutdown after exceeding the temperature threshold Valid va
180. ety range Board2 Temp Sensor primary 55 00C within safety range 3 3V Value primary 3 384V within safety range 5V Value primary 5 126V within safety range 12V Value primary 12 442V within safety range Battery Backup Battery primary OK CPU Temp Sensor secondary 45 00C within safety range Board1 Temp Sensor secondary 53 00C within safety range Board2 Temp Sensor secondary 60 00C within safety range 3 3V Value secondary 3 368V within safety range 5V Value secondary 5 126V within safety range 12V Value secondary 12 381V within safety range Battery Backup Battery secondary OK Note Voltage sensors make sure that the array s voltage is within normal ranges To check the status and determine the location of voltage sensors refer to the Sun StorEdge 3000 Family RAID Firmware User s Guide Note Battery sensor status indicates hardware status only Returned values include OK Charging Critical Missing and BAD To view battery expiration status issue the show battery status command which returns both hardware and expiration status values For more information refer to show battery status on page 35 Sun StorEdge 3000 Family CLI 2 4 User s Guide March 2007 Configuration Commands The following commands are explained in this section download nvram reset nvrami show bypass device show bypass RAID show bypass SFP show configuration show loop map upload nvram For details on upl
181. evice speed during sequential reads The process of reconstructing the data that was on a disk before it failed Rebuilding can be done only in arrays with data redundancy such as RAID levels 1 1 0 3 and 5 Glossary 283 284 rebuild priority SAN SCSI SES SID SMART SMTP SNMP spanning standby drive state stripe size Rebuild priority enables the RAID controller to serve other I O requests while rebuilding the logical drives Priority ranges from low which uses the controller s minimum resources to rebuild to high which uses the controller s maximum resources to complete the rebuilding process storage area networking A high speed open standard scalable network of storage devices and servers providing accelerated data access Small Computer Systems Interface An industry standard for connecting disk and tape devices to a workstation An interface to SCSI Enclosure Services devices These devices sense and monitor physical conditions within an enclosure and enable access to the status reporting and configuration features of the enclosure such as indicator LEDs on the enclosure Secondary controller identifier number Self Monitoring Analysis and Reporting Technology The industry standard reliability prediction indicator for both the IDE ATA and SCSI hard disk drives Hard disk drives with SMART offer early warning of some hard disk failures so critical data can be protected Simple Mail
182. for the parity check for logical drive 0 sccli gt check parity 1d0 sccli gt show 1d parity check LD LD ID Status 1d0 627D800A 2 complete For details on the check parity command see check parity on page 128 Sun StorEdge 3000 Family CLI 2 4 User s Guide March 2007 show logical drives rebuilding Description The show logical drives rebuilding command displays the status for all logical drives being rebuilt Returned values include LD index LD ID and progress To cancel the rebuild use the abort rebuild command For details see abort rebuild on page 126 Syntax show logical drives rebuilding Note The abbreviation 1d can be substituted for the keyword 1ogical drive Examples The following example returns the rebuilding process percent complete for the logical drive sccli c2t0d0 show logical drives rebuilding show media check Description The show media check command displays the progress of a media check To cancel the media check use the abort media check command For details see abort media check on page 124 Note The front panel LEDs for the drives being checked will blink until the media check is finished or aborted For more information about LEDs refer to the Sun StorEdge 3000 Family Installation Operation and Service Manual for your array Syntax show media check Chapter 5 Logical Drive Partition and Logical Volume
183. formation about optimization modes see set cache parameters on page 73 Note Once data is written to logical drives the only way to change the stripe size is to back up all data to another location delete all logical configurations of drives reconfigure the logical drive with the stripe size and reboot the array Syntax create logical drive raid level disk list assignment global spare disk list stripe size size max disk capacity size write policy mode Arguments TABLE 5 11 Arguments for create logical drive Argument Description raid level Specify the RAID level to assign to the logical drive Valid values raid0 raidl raid3 raid5 raidl raid3 raid5 The plus sign includes a local spare The local spare is randomly chosen from the disk list disk list Specify a comma separated list of IDs to use for the RAID set and the local spare if specified Use the show disks free command to determine which disks are available assignment Specify the controller assignment for the logical drive If no value is specified the logical drive is assigned to the primary controller by default Valid values primary secondary global spare Specify a list of drives to use as global spares for example disk list d0 1 d0 2 3 When you assign a global spare the system automatically assigns global spare status to the unassigned drive with the lowest drive ID This enables the array to use the global s
184. formation on the remaining disks Network Data Management Protocol non volatile random access memory A memory unit equipped with a battery so that the data stays intact even after main power is switched off A Fibre Channel port in a point to point or Fabric connection OpenBoot PROM OBP When you first start Solaris it shows an OK prompt which is the OBP It is a command line interface Sun StorEdge 3000 Family CLI 2 4 User s Guide March 2007 out of band parity check partner group PID PLA PLD RAID RAID Level RARP RAS read policy rebuild Refers to the connections and devices that are not in the data path A process whereby the integrity of the redundant data on fault tolerant logical drives RAID 1 3 and 5 is checked For RAID 3 and 5 configurations the parity checking procedure on a logical drive recalculates the parity of data stripes in each of the logical drive s RAID stripe sets and compares it with the stored parity If a discrepancy is found an error is reported and the new correct parity is substituted for the stored parity For RAID 1 configurations if an inconsistency is encountered data is copied from the master disk to the slave disk If a bad block is encountered when the parity is regenerated the data is copied from the other disk master or slave to the reporting disk drive reallocating the bad block A pair of interconnected controller units Expansion units interconnected t
185. fy a storage device to X X X X monitor or configure set auto write configure the array to X X X X through trigger on page 32 dynamically switch from write back cache to write through cache if a specified event occurs 188 Sun StorEdge 3000 Family CLI 2 4 User s Guide March 2007 TABLEA 2 Platform support for RAID Array Commands Continued Sun Sun Sun Sun StorEdge StorEdge StorEdge StorEdge 3510 FC 3511SATA 3310 SCSI 3320 SCSI Command Page Number Function Array Array Array Array set cadhe set cache write policy and X X X X parameters on optimization policy page 73 set controller set a controller date and time X X X X date on page 76 set controller set the controller name X X X X name on page 77 set controller set the controller password X X X X password on page 77 set disk array on set disk array parameters X X X X page 94 including the background logical drive rebuilding priority and hard drive data verification set drive set drive channel parameters X X X X parameters on page 108 set host set host channel parameters X X X X parameters on page 110 set inter enable disable per channel X X controller link on inter controller link page 112 set led on page95 change the drive LED forthe X X X X specified disk or slot from green to amber set logical drive set the write policy for a X X X X on page 138 logical drive set logical set the write policy for the X X X X volume o
186. fy the maximum number of I O operations that can be queued simultaneously for a given logical drive The default value is 1024 Valid values 0 auto 1 2 4 8 16 32 64 128 256 512 1024 FC and SATA devices only Specify the connection mode Loop configures an arbitrated loop which can be used with Direct Attached Storage DAS or Storage Area Network SAN configurations Fibre Channel Arbitrated Loop FC AL supports only half duplex communication but allows up to eight IDs per channel Point to point can be used only with a switched fabric network also called a Storage Area Network SAN configuration Point to Point protocol supports full duplex communication but only allows one ID per channel Valid values loop point to point Specify whether users can access Sun StorEdge CLI and Sun StorEdge Configuration Service using inband communication over a FC or SCSI channel If this argument is disabled out of band access must be used For more information about out of band access see Device Names for Out of Band Communication on page 11 Valid values enabled disabled sccli c2t0d0 set host parameters queue depth 16 The following example sets the maximum LUN number of each SCSI ID to 8 sccli c2t0d0 set host parameters max luns per id 8 Chapter 4 Channel Commands 111 set inter controller link Description Redundant Sun StorEdge 3000 family FC and SATA arrays only The set inter contr
187. g Detect perpetual clone detects future problems and clones a spare drive so that it is ready when failure does occur The spare drive stays mirrored to the source drive the drive whose failure has been predicted but does not replace it until the source drive fails Detect clone replace detects future problems clones a spare drive and immediately uses the cloned drive to replace the source drive whose failure is predicted auto global Specify whether the RAID controller automatically allocates disk spare enabled drives as global spares When you enable this option the system disabled automatically assigns a global spare to the unassigned drive with the lowest drive ID This enables the array to use the global spare to rebuild a logical drive automatically without user intervention when a failing drive needs to be replaced Valid values enabled disabled Chapter 4 Channel Commands 109 Examples The following example sets the SCSI I O timeout to 30 seconds sccli c2t0d0 set drive parameters scsi io timeout 30s The following example sets the queue depth to 32 the default value sccli c2t0d0 set drive parameters queue depth 32 The following example sets the interval of drive polling to 10 seconds and disables SMART monitoring sccli c2t0d0 set drive parameters poll interval 10s smart disabled set host parameters Description The set host parameters command sets the specifie
188. ge inter controller link Id list list logical drive d disk icl Id or Ids LVD JBOD enclosure only Selects the disk enclosure containing the specified disk Specify a Solaris device name such as sd31 or c1t0d0 This option is an alternative to specifying an enclosure services device such as dev es sesn when selecting a JBOD enclosure The disk option does not support split bus JBOD enclosures A list of disk specifiers separated by commas For example 1 0 1 1 1 2 Displays a usage message and exits without processing any commands This option can also be used as a command For information about the help command see help on page 19 The command abbreviation icl provides an alternative to typing the full command name A comma separated list of logical drive indexes for example 140 1d1 182 or a list of logical drive identifiers Note that these logical drive numbers do not necessarily correspond to the single digit logical drive identifiers in the firmware menu interface The Sun StorEdge CLI logical drive indexes might change when logical drives are deleted Displays a list of local or remote devices that the Sun StorEdge CLI manages and exits without processing any commands The output includes a file name or URL that can be used to access the device in subsequent commands and the SCSI inquiry data and serial number of the subsystem If a network URL is specified on the command line the output is
189. gt type Channel Type gt 1 pid Channel PID Sid Channel STD gt term Channel Terminal su defclk Channel default clock curclk Channel current clock vm defwid Channel default width 1 curwid Channel current width lt lt ELEMENT channel idx logchl mode type pid sid term defclk curclk defwid curwid gt lt KKKKKKKKKKK ck k kK k k k kK k k k k k kK k kK k k k k k k k k k k k k k k k k k k k k k k k ck k k kk gt lt logchl element Logical Channel number lt Ckckckck ck k k k k k kK k k k k k k k k k k k k k kK k k k k kK k k k k k k k k k k k k kX k k k k k ck k k kk gt lt ELEMENT logchl PCDATA gt lt Ckckckckckckck ck k k kK k kK k k k k k k kK k k k kK kK k k kX k k k k k k k k kK k k k k k k k k k k ck k kX k kk gt mode element The Channel work mode can be Host gt e Drive RCCOM Other lt KkkKkk k k k k k k k kK k kK k k k k k k k k k k k kK k k k k k k k k k k k k k k k k k kX k k k k k k kX X kk gt lt ELEMENT mode PCDATA gt lt Ck kckck ck k k kK k k kK k kK k k k k k k kK k k kK k kK kX k k k kK k k k
190. guration file format error Controller access error Controller busy Controller firmware download ok but can not engage firmware without redundant controller Controller firmware download ok but engage firmware failed 198 Sun StorEdge 3000 Family CLI 2 4 User s Guide March 2007 TABLEB 1 Gun StorEdge CLI Error and Status Messages Continued Error and Status Messages Controller firmware download ok but engage operation is not allowed Controller not ready Controller not shutdown yet as expected Create host wwn name failed Data transfer time out ddb information not programmed Delete host wwn name failed Device excluded by redundant path software Device not supported Disk drives do not match saved configuration Drive type unknown Element not found in ses pages Element type not found in ses pages Failed to assign logical drive Failed to bypass a device Failed to bypass sfp Failed to check set password Failed to convert logical volume Failed to create logical drive Failed to create logical volume Failed to delete logical volume Failed to download nvram data Failed to get battery information Failed to get cache parameters Failed to get caching statistics Failed to get channel data Failed to get channel statistics Failed to get controller configuration page Failed to get controller configuration string page Failed to get controller module version Appendix B Error and Event Messages 199
191. gure network interface lan0 ip address ip address netmask netmask ip gateway gateway ip Arguments The following dynamic options are accepted TABLE 2 1 Dynamic Options for configure network interface Argument Description rarp Specify whether the Reverse Address Resolution Protocol RARP is used to establish an IP address dhcp Specify whether the Dynamic Host Configuration Protocol DHCP is used to obtain an IP address Note The rarp and dhcp options can be combined to specify that the controller try the protocols in the listed order Note All LAN parameters must be specified on the same command line Alternately if none of the dynamic options are specified on the same command line a static IP address can be specified along with optional netmask and default gateway parameters TABLE 2 2 Static Options for configure network interface Argument Description ip address n n n n The IP address of the array netmask m m m m The netmask in dotted decimal format for example 255 255 255 10 gateway 2 2 2 8 The IP address of a default router Sun StorEdge 3000 Family CLI 2 4 User s Guide March 2007 create Examples The following example configures the controller IP address as 192 168 0 10 netmask as 255 255 255 0 and gateway as 192 168 0 1 sccli c2t0d0 configure network interface Lann ip 192 168 0 10 netmask 255 255 255 0 gateway 192 168 0 1 The
192. gured 0 15 for SCSI devices and 0 125 for FC and SATA devices Specify one or more comma separated target IDs for the secondary controller Specify None if you do not want to configure a secondary ID secondary id can be shortened to sid Valid values None no ID configured 0 15 for SCSI devices and 0 125 for FC and SATA devices Specify that the controller reset immediately so that the specified changes take effect By default the specified changes do not take effect until a reset controller command is issued Examples The following example sets the channel mode as host and resets the controller immediately sccli c2t0d0 configure channel 0 mode host reset The following example sets the channel primary ID as 112 and the secondary ID as 114 and 115 sccli c2t0d0 configure channel 0 primary id 112 secondary id 114 115 Chapter 4 Channel Commands 107 108 set drive parameters Description The set drive parameters command sets the specified RAID controller parameters that affect the operation of drive channels For details about configuring a drive channel see configure channel on page 106 Caution Do not change the scsi io timeout argument Setting the timeout to a lower value causes the controller to judge a drive as failed while a drive is still retrying or while a drive is unable to arbitrate the SCSI bus Setting the timeout to a greater value causes the controller to keep wait
193. h Fh Fh Fh Fh Fh Fh Fh H H H off off 40 Sun StorEdge 3000 Family CLI 2 4 User s Guide March 2007 Returned Values The following table describes the location of the enclosure devices from the back of the Sun StorEdge 3120 SCSI array as shown in FIGURE 2 1 Front of array Left side FIGURE2 1 Sun StorEdge 3120 SCSI Array Enclosure Device Orientation The returned values for the Sun StorEdge 3120 SCSI array are described in the following table TABLE 2 11 Sun StorEdge 3120 SCSI array output for show enclosure status Enclosure Types Description Fan 0 Left side power supply fan Fan 1 Right side power supply fan PS 0 Left side power supply PS 1 Right side power supply Temp 0 Left drive temperature sensor Temp 1 Center drive temperature sensor Temp 2 Temperature sensor on left side power supply module Power supply 0 in FIGURE 2 1 Temp 3 Temperature sensor on left side I O module Temp 4 Temperature sensor on right side I O module Chapter 2 System Function Commands 41 TABLE 2 11 Sun StorEdge 3120 SCSI array output for show enclosure status Enclosure Types Description Temp 5 Right drive temperature sensor Temp 6 Temperature sensor on right side power supply module Power supply1 in FIGURE 2 1 Disk Slot 0 3 Disk slot identifier refers to the backplane field replaceable unit FRU to which disks are connected The following table describes the location of the enclosure de
194. he index number is used strictly as a placeholder that enables you to visually keep track of logical drives For example if four logical drives exist and LD2 is deleted the existing LD3 dynamically changes to LD2 and LD4 changes to LD3 Only the LD index number changes all LUN mapping and data on the logical drives remains unchanged Care must be taken not to assume that a logical drive keeps the same logical drive index after creating or deleting any logical drive or rebooting the array controller Caution Any time logical drives are created or deleted the numbering of logical drive indexes might change After creating or deleting logical drives issue a show logical drive command to view an updated list of logical drive indexes Or use logical drive IDs which do not change over the lifetime of the logical drive rather than logical drive indexes Note In contrast in the firmware application the LG number on the View and Edit Logical Drives menu is not dynamic After a logical drive is deleted you see an empty placeholder Some commands accept a list of logical drives or LD list This list is constructed by concatenating one or more logical drive identifiers or indexes as shown in the following examples This example lists logical drives using the local drive identifier 0043BF50 05CC1F19 025E42E1 Chapter1 Overview 13 A This example lists logical drives using the index number 1d0 1d1 1d2 Not
195. hich drives should be programmed The disk firmware file is matched to the capacity family and drive type of the drive to which you are downloading For instance if you attempt to download 73 Gbyte drive Fujitsu firmware to a Seagate drive the download fails Note The download disk firmware command does not support a live upgrade a hot download operation This command shuts down the array controller first preventing the host from performing I O for several minutes This command only upgrades firmware in drives attached to RAID array controllers To upgrade disk firmware in drives contained within a standalone expansion chassis JBOD use the procedure documented in the README file provided with the firmware When using this command m All daemons that access the RAID controller must be stopped m I O is interrupted m The controller is reset after disks are flashed Syntax download disk firmware filename product id Chapter 6 Firmware Show and Download Commands 177 Arguments TABLE 6 2 Arguments for download disk firmware Argument Description filename product id Specify the firmware file name for the file that you want to download Specify the product ID of the disk inquiry string For example type EM ST space in the inquiry string use quotation marks occurs For example type ST336607 SUN36G or L373453 SUN37G 1336607FSUN36G or ST373453FSUN37G If there is a characte
196. ich do not change over the lifetime of the logical drive rather than logical drive indexes For more information see Logical Drive Syntax on page 13 Note You cannot create a logical drive composed of Sun StorEdge 3510 FC drives and Sun StorEdge 3511 SATA drives If you try to mix drive types in a logical drive an error is displayed For more information refer to the Sun StorEdge 3000 Family RAID Firmware User s Guide Note All device capacity is displayed in powers of 1024 For details see Device Capacity on page 15 Stripe Size Depending on the optimization mode and RAID level selected newly created logical drives are configured with the default stripe sizes shown in the following table TABLE 5 10 Default Stripe Size Per Optimization Mode Kbyte RAID Level Sequential I O Random I O 0 1 5 128 32 3 16 4 Note Default stripe sizes optimize performance for most applications When you create a logical drive you can replace the default stripe size with one that better suits your application Chapter 5 Logical Drive Partition and Logical Volume Commands 131 For sequential optimization available stripe size choices include 16 Kbyte 32 Kbyte 64 Kbyte 128 Kbyte and 256 Kbyte For random optimization available stripe size choices include 4 Kbyte 8 Kbyte 16 Kbyte 32 Kbyte 64 Kbyte 128 Kbyte and 256 Kbyte To view the optimization mode type show cache parameters For more in
197. id gt lt type gt SDISK lt type gt lt SignalLoss gt 0 lt SignalLoss gt lt InvalidTransWords gt 0 lt InvalidTransWords gt InvalidCRC 0 InvalidCRC sata device statistics gata device statistics channel 3 channel lt id gt 21 lt id gt lt type gt SDISK lt type gt lt SignalLoss gt 0 lt SignalLoss gt lt InvalidTransWords gt 0 lt InvalidTransWords gt InvalidCRC 0 InvalidCRC sata device statistics 276 Sun StorEdge 3000 Family CLI 2 4 Users Guide March 2007 gata device statistics lt channel gt 3 lt channel gt id 22 id lt type gt SDISK lt type gt lt SignalLoss gt 0 lt SignalLoss gt lt InvalidTransWords gt 0 lt InvalidTransWords gt InvalidCRC 0 InvalidCRC sata device statistics gata device statistics lt channel gt 3 lt channel gt lt id gt 23 lt id gt lt type gt SDISK lt type gt lt SignalLoss gt 0 lt SignalLoss gt lt InvalidTransWords gt 0 lt InvalidTransWords gt lt InvalidCRC gt 0 lt InvalidCRC gt lt sata_device_statistics gt lt sata_device_statistics gt lt channel gt 3 lt channel gt lt id gt 24 lt id gt lt type gt SDISK lt type gt lt SignalLoss gt 0 lt SignalLoss gt lt InvalidTransWords gt 0 lt InvalidTransWords gt InvalidCRC 0 InvalidCRC sata device statistics drive side statistics raidsystem raidbaseview Appendix C Show C
198. id on this logical drive 204 Sun StorEdge 3000 Family CLI 2 4 User s Guide March 2007 TABLE B 1 Sun StorEdge CLI Error and Status Messages Continued Error and Status Messages Operation specified not available on the drive type Out of resource Partition was not specified pc 150 firmware download failure Primary Agent not found RAID1 requires an even number of disks Read configuration data error Rebuild only applicable on raid1 raid3 raid5 Rebuilding Restore host wwn name list failed Retrieve Retrieving Retrieving controller name failure Retrieving controller unique id failure Retrieving ddb information failure Retrieving pc 150 information failure Retrieving rs232 configuration failure Retrieving sr 1216 information failure Save raid configuration to file error Scanning fru is done but at least one fru missing SCSI device model missing SCSI drive already exists SCSI drive not found SES operation on invalid target Set controller current time failure Set logical drive failed Set logical volume failed Set network protocol failed Set ses wdt failed on jbod Set slot operation failed Appendix B Error and Event Messages 205 TABLE B 1 Sun StorEdge CLI Error and Status Messages Continued Error and Status Messages Setting controller name failure Setting controller unique id failure Setting rs232 configuration failure Show shutdown status failed Shutdown controller fa
199. il gt 0 lt LinkFail gt lt SyncLoss gt 0 lt SyncLoss gt lt SignalLoss gt 0 lt SignalLoss gt InvalidCRC 0 InvalidCRC device statistics lt PrimitiveSequence gt 0 lt PrimitiveSequence gt lt InvalidTransWords gt 0 lt InvalidTransWords gt mux_type A A mux_type A A mux_type A A mux_type A A mux_type A A mux_type A A mux_type A A mux_type A A mux_type A A mux_type A A mux_type A A mux_type A A pc150_rev BB4 pc150_rev BB4 pc150_rev BB4 pc150_rev BB4 pc150_rev BB4 pc150_rev BB4 pc150_rev BB4 pc150_rev BB4 pc150_rev BB4 pc150_rev BB4 pc150_rev BB4 pc150_rev BB4 lt controller_date gt Wed Feb 28 21 50 41 2007 lt controller_date gt lt boot_time gt Wed Feb 28 21 22 31 2007 lt boot_time gt 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 266 Sun StorEdge 3000 Family CLI 2 4 Users Guide March 2007 device statistics lt channel gt 3 lt channel gt lt id gt 1 lt id gt lt type gt SDISK lt type gt lt reset gt 0 lt reset gt lt LinkFail gt 0 lt LinkFail gt lt SyncLoss gt 0 lt SyncLoss gt lt SignalLoss gt 0 lt SignalLoss gt lt PrimitiveSequence gt 0 lt PrimitiveSequence gt lt InvalidTransWords gt 0 lt InvalidTransWords gt InvalidCRC 0 InvalidCRC device statistics device statistics lt channel gt 3 lt channel gt lt id gt 2 lt id g
200. iled Some frus missing Specified firmware does not support logical drive or logical volume with more than 32 partitions Specified firmware does not support more than 8 logical drives Specified lds must have only a single n partition P0 no host LUN mappings and they must have the same controller vn assignment SR 1216 firmware download failure Start of error values Stripe block size not available Target device not found Target device not ready The capacity of target disk too small The current firmware does not support check parity on raidl The current firmware does not support more than 8 logical drives The current firmware does not support more than 32 partitions in logical drives volumes The current firmware does not support this operation on raidl This operation is only supported on Fibre Channel primary RAID controller devices Valid host channel target and lun were not specified Verify bypass information failed Write parameters error Writing download raid config Wrong unit type specified for sata related operation 206 Sun StorEdge 3000 Family CLI 2 4 Users Guide March 2007 APPENDIX C Show Configuration Command Output This appendix includes a list of the items included in the output of the show configuration command and the sample XML output of the show configuration XML file command Regardless of the file format xml txt or onscreen the output content is the same Topics in th
201. ing for a drive and it might cause a host timeout Syntax set drive parameters parameter name value Arguments TABLE 4 2 Arguments for set drive parameters Argument Description scsi io timeout Specify the time interval for the controller to wait for a disk drive to respond If the controller attempts to read data from or write data to a drive but the drive does not respond within the SCSI I O timeout value the drive is considered a failed drive Valid values 500ms 1s 2s 4s 6s 7s 8s 10s 15s 20s 30s default spin up enabled This parameter is reserved and should be used only by qualified disabled technicians Specify whether the disk drives are powered up sequentially when the array powers up When the power supply is unable to provide sufficient current for all physical drives and controllers that are powered on at the same time spinning up the physical drives serially requires less current Valid values enabled disabled disk access Specify the amount of time that the controller waits before it tries to delay access the physical drives after power on The default value is 15 seconds Valid values 0s 5s 10s 15s default 75s increments of 5 between 0 75 Sun StorEdge 3000 Family CLI 2 4 User s Guide March 2007 TABLE 4 2 Arguments for set drive parameters Continued Argument Description queue depth Specify the maximum queue depth tag count that the controller uses
202. ion previously saved using the upload controller configuration command The configuraton file includes channel settings host Sun StorEdge 3000 Family CLI 2 4 User s Guide March 2007 and drive side parameters array parameters network port setup controller general parameters logical drive logical volume and physical drive information partition information and mappings on host channels A logical drive or logical volume create operation might be required to completely restore the saved configuration However creating a logical drive might take a long time and block other operations The command provides an option to specify whether to build the logical drive Caution The download controller configuration command unmaps all existing logical drives if they do not match the configuration file that is being downloaded Note Optimally rebuild any logical drives before running this command Syntax download controller configuration b build filename Arguments TABLE 3 1 Arguments for download controller configuration Argument Description b build Rebuild RAID sets specified in the saved configuration If this option is not specified RAID sets are not created and the configuration will not be completely restored Caution All reset commands cause the array to stop responding to I O requests from the host for a period of time This might result in data loss unless all I O activity is sus
203. iption The reset nvram command clears the NVRAM configuration memory and restores the original default settings including all controller host and drive parameters The controller unique ID is set to the chassis serial number and the controller name is not set Caution This command does not restore the controller IP address instead it configures the network for DHCP You must have a serial connection to reset the IP address netmask and default gateway settings And the serial connection must be set to 38400 Use the RAID array s COM port and the firmware application to restore these settings For more information refer to the Sun StorEdge 3000 Family RAID Firmware User s Guide After issuing the reset nvram command reset the controller and reconfigure the controller to restore any non default configuration options for your array such as cache write policy and LUN maps When you run the reset nvram command LUN maps are not restored To review the existing LUNs before running this command run the show 1un maps command For details see show lun maps on page 158 Caution Logical drives and logical volumes are not deleted but it is possible for them to become inaccessible after this command is run This might result in data loss Sun StorEdge 3000 Family CLI 2 4 User s Guide March 2007 Caution All reset commands cause the array to stop responding to I O requests from the host for a period of time This might
204. is appendix include m Show Configuration Output on page 208 m XML DTD for the show configuration xml Command on page 215 m Sample Show Configuration XML Output on page 240 For details on how to execute the show configuration command see show configuration on page 57 207 Show Configuration Output The show configuration command runs the following commands show show show show show show show show show show show show show show show show show show show show show show show show show show show show show show show show inquiry data unique identifier controller name network parameters host parameters drive parameters redundant controller redundancy mode cache parameters RS232 configuration channels disks logical drive logical volumes partitions lun maps protocol auto write through trigger peripheral device status SES port WWNs inter controller link battery status SAF TE enclosure status sata router sata mux host wwns FRUS access mode controller date disk array 208 Sun StorEdge 3000 Family CLI 2 4 Users Guide March 2007 The XML output produced by show configuration xml includes the following data The Inquiry Data output shows Vendor Product Model Firmware Revision ID of NVRAM Defaults Boot Record Version MAC Address IP Address Primary Serial Number Secondary Serial Number Ethernet Address Device Type The Unique Identifier output shows
205. ive channel commands with sample code Chapter 5 provides the available Sun StorEdge CLI commands with sample code for logical drives partitions and logical volumes Chapter 6 provides the firmware disk drive SCSI Enclosure Services SES SCSI Accessed Fault Tolerant Enclosure SAF TE programmable logic device PLD and serial ATA SATA router and path controller show and download commands Appendix A contains a list of the Sun StorEdge CLI options a list of Sun StorEdge CLI commands for RAID arrays and a list of Sun StorEdge CLI commands for JBODs Appendix B lists error and status messages and error codes Appendix C includes a list of the items included in the output of the show configuration command and the sample XML output of the show configuration XML file command The Glossary provides RAID terminology and definitions used throughout the product documentation Using UNIX Commands This document does not contain information on basic UNIX commands and procedures such as shutting down the system booting the system and configuring devices See the following for this information m Software documentation that you received with your system m Solaris operating system documentation which is at http docs sun com xii Sun StorEdge 3000 Family CLI 2 4 User s Guide March 2007 Shell Prompts Shell Prompt C shell C shell superuser Bourne shell and Korn shell Bourne shell and Korn shel
206. ive output shows Logical Drive ID Number eight digit hex Logical Drive IDX Assignment Status RAID Level Number of Drives Physical Drives Size Total Partitions Stripe size Write policy mode The Logical Volume output shows Logical Volume ID Number eight digit hex Logical Volume IDX Controller assignment Size Write policy mode Logical drive assignment The Partitions output shows Logical drive Logical volume ID Partition IDX Size The LUN maps output shows Channel ID Target ID LUN Partition IDX Controller assignment Filter map The Protocol output shows Protocol type Status Port number Parameters Appendix C Show Configuration Command Output 211 The Automatic Write Through Trigger output shows Controller failure status Battery backup status UPS AC power loss status Power supply status Fan failure status Temperature exceeded delay status The Peripheral Device output shows CPU primary temperature sensor Board 1 primary temperature sensor Board 2 primary temperature sensor 3 3V primary value 5V primary value 12V primary value Battery backup primary battery CPU secondary temperature sensor Board 1 secondary temperature sensor Board 2 secondary temperature sensor 3 3V secondary value 5V secondary value 12V secondary value Battery backup secondary battery The SES output shows Channel ID Chassis Serial Number Vendor Product ID Revision PLD Revision
207. ives The controller cache write policy is the default setting for all logical drives When you create a logical drive if you do not specify a write policy option the logical drive uses the write policy specified by the set cache parameters command Then if the write policy changes for the controller the write policy automatically changes for the logical drive as well Valid values write back write through sync period value Specify the periodic cache synchronization value in seconds Valid values 0 continuous syncing 30s 60s 120s 300s 600s disabled default value Examples The following example sets the cache mode to write back sccli gt set cache parameters write back The following example sets the cache mode to write back the optimization to sequential and the sync period to 30 seconds sccli gt set cache parameters sequential write back sync period 30s Chapter 3 Controller and Disk Commands 75 set controller date Description The set controller date command sets a controller date time and time zone which enables you to reference and correlate messages and errors Syntax set controller date month day hh mm ss year time zone Arguments TABLE 3 4 Arguments for set controller date Argument Description month day hh mm ss year time zone Specify the month in abbreviated format Valid values Jan Feb Mar Apr May Jun Jul Aug Sep Oct Nov Dec
208. k Ko koh kck AR k gt lt id element e ie KEK KKK ck ck ck ck kk ck ck ck kk ck ck KKK KK k k Kk k k kk k k Kk Kk K k k ko ko k kx KX k ck ko ko ko Kk Kk ko k x gt lt ELEMENT id PCDATA gt x T gt lt chassis element gt Pe KEK KKK Z H D H ck ecc kk V KR KKK kk V ZH D ck V Fe H FT ko kk T V K H ck ck H ko K ko K ko ko ko ko H K E lt ELEMENT chassis PCDATA gt Appendix C Show Configuration Command Output 231 lt REXAREIXARERARERARERARECARERARERARERAREXARE RARE AR kk K Kk gt lt vender product id element gt b LI EERARFERANERAREXA RE K Y K EK K ARE K V ck ckokckok KK Kk K H K K H K H kckcko ok k kk LL lt ELEMENT vender product id PCDATA gt KEK KKK KKK KKK KKK KKK KK KKK KKK KKK KKK KKK KKK KKK KEK KKK KK Tk d V K lt rev element gt c s KEK KKK KKK KKK Ve Ve F VE Ve D ck KKK DET DAN Ve F lt V ck ok oko ko ck ko TE VZ ko ko ko ck ck V ko ck ko ko ko ko ko ko koX oS lt ELEMENT rev PCDATA gt lt KEK KEKE KKK KKK KKK KEK KEK KEK KEK KE KK KKK KEK KKK KKK KKK KKK k ko ck k k kx ko ko kx koX gt lt pld element gt lt KEK KKK KK KKK KEK kk KEK KKK KKK KKK KKK k k k kk k k kx K KKK ck ck k k ck k k
209. k ck ck ko k H K k ko ko k k gt lt ELEMENT verify on rebuild PCDATA gt lt KEK K k XH K k Kk Kk kH KEK KEK KEK KEK KKK KKK KEK KEKE KK KKK KKK KKK ck ko ko ko ko KEKE lt verify on normal element can be Enable Disable gt lt KEK KKK KK KKK KEK KEK KEK KEK KEK KEK K Kk k K KKK KKK KKK KKK KEK ck X k ck ko ko ko kk x K k Lu lt ELEMENT verify on normal PCDATA gt lt KR KKK KEK KEKE KK KKK KEK KEK KEK KEK KEK KKK KKK KEK KEK KEK KKK ko ck k k kY ck k Kx ko ko KEKE gt lt rebuild priority element can be High Improved gt si Normal Low lt KR KK KKK KKK K Kk H F K KKK KKK K K X KKK H KKK K Kk H kk ck KKK KK ko ko ko K koX gt lt ELEMENT rebuild priority PCDATA gt lt KEK KKK KKK Y H UX KKK KKK T KKK KKK K k F KE KH K H k KK ck ck ck ko H K ko ko ko ko koX lt host_param element The RAID system host side info include gt lt queue_io_count gt lt luns_per_host lt fibre_connection_mode gt lt inband_access gt lt RERAREXARERAREXARE RA FEA K k K K Hk K KH KY KX kK RARA K Kk K RARE RARE RA kk LL lt ELEMENT host param queue io count luns per host fibre connection mode inband access gt 228 Sun StorEdge 3000 Family CLI 2 4 Users Guide March 2007 lt KEK KKK KKK KKK ck ck KEK KEK KEK KKK KKK KKK KKK KKK KKK KKK KKK ck
210. k ck ko ko ck KK ko ko kx ko koX gt lt part_number element gt lt K kkKkKk kKk k k k k k Kk Kk k K Kk k kK k Kk Kk K K k k k K Kk Kk K Kk Kk k RARA RARE RARE RARA RA RAR gt lt ELEMENT part_number PCDATA gt lt KKK E K Kk Xk K K HK K Kk kH K KH K K K K k Kik H kck K k K K H k K K REE RR RE de d e K EEE 25 lt revision element gt lt RTE Fee HAC Fe Fe Ve Je H H Fe de eee E ERE RE Ve 3 Ve DE Ve de ete Ve RE SERE EE ee H E RRE ERE aS lt ELEMENT revision PCDATA gt lt KEK KKK KKK KKK KKK KEK KKK KKK KKK KKK Kk KKK KKK KEK KEKE KKK ko ko ko ko ko ko ko ko m lt manufacturer jedec id element gt lt REXERXARERRRARARERK RE VK VK RR ck V K K K K Kk EH H H K K K RARA RARA RARA Kk K 25 lt ELEMENT manufacturer jedec id PCDATA gt lt EXAERERERERERRE RE ck kcok ko kohskckc kh kokck kc hc RRE RARE RRA RARA EA Kk X k K gt lt fru_location element gt lt REXARARRERARERRE RARE RRE RRE RRA RARE RARE k k k K RARA k Kk x k Kx cu lt ELEMENT fru location PCDATA gt lt KX K K H G K K KY K KKK KKK KEK H K KEK K K K H V K KEK K KH E K DE KZ KH K H ck K Ek K HK ko ko ko ko ko H Kk chassis serial number element gt lt KEK KEK KEK KEK K k XY KKK HY X K kX k Hk X KY VK k KEK K EK KY XX KK K k Kk k KKK KKK KEK KH ko Kk ko ko ko gt lt ELEMENT chassis serial number PCDA
211. k kk k RRA kokck kckckok k k kok kc RRA RARA kk kk a lt CDROM element lt ELEMENT cdrom ch target manufacturer model 236 Sun StorEdge 3000 Family CLI 2 4 Users Guide March 2007 1 Ckkckckck ck ck ckck ck k k k k k k k k kX k kX k k k k k k k k k k k k k k k k k k kK k kK k k kX kX k k k k ck k X k kk gt lt Tape element Te uec kkk k k k k k k k k k k k k k k k k k k k k k k k k k k k k k k k k k k k k k k k k k k k k k k k k k k k k x a lt ELEMENT tape ch target manufacturer model gt n ea gt EMU element EE LA ra kkk kk kk k k k k k k k k k k k k k k k k k k k k k k k k k k k k k k k k k k k k k k k k k k k k k k x xk x ES lt ELEMENT emu ch target status manufacturer model firmware_version safte_status fru_number fru gt lt L
212. ko R ko ko ko ko koX lt queue_io_count element gt lt K KH K HITA dede e HCH ee ee Ve REE A UV Ze VH H Ve Ve a H Ze Ree gr he XT e HD K ge d KH k HK a lt ELEMENT queue_io_count PCDATA gt lt KEK KKK k k k k k k k k k k k k k k k k k k k k k k k k k k k k k k k k k k k k k k k k k k k xk k xk x x gt lt luns per host element lt EXAEARERAERERARE RE RE RE RRE RERA RRE k k kkk Kk k k k k k kx k Kk kkk Kk x Kk k Kx gt lt ELEMENT luns per host PCDATA gt lt kckckcko KY ERE KER K K RE RENA K K Kk K K XK d RARE REA RAE K K K K k K ARA K K Kk AR e lt fibre connection mode element gt lt KEK KKK KKK T K VH M K KH KEK T K KKK K H V KKK K H V Kk KEK K K KY H HK K k K KK KEKE Hk lt ELEMENT fibre connection mode PCDATA gt lt KEK KKK KKK KEK KEK KEK KEK KEK KEK kK Kk kK K K Kk KKK Kk k k k kk kY k k KX k k k k k k KEKE ko k ko ko x k gt lt redundant_param element The RAID system redundant config include gt lt Primary_sn gt sles Redundancy mode gt lt redundant_status gt 1 secondary sn gt lt UH K K Y K K E KH K K Y K T K K KH H K K H K K KH H Kk kK HK K KH XH K K H K H K K k KH E H K K H k k k gt lt ELEMENT redundant param role Primary_sn Redundancy_mode redundant_status secondary_sn gt lt KEK KKK KKK V K KKK KKK KKK K VF KY KKK KE
213. l drive rather than logical drive indexes For more information see Logical Drive Syntax on page 13 Note If no write policy is specified for the logical drive the write policy is set to the global controller setting and Default displays in the Write Policy field To view the controller write policy run the show cache parameters command For more information about the cache policy see set cache parameters on page 73 Syntax show logical drive ld list 142 Sun StorEdge 3000 Family CLI 2 4 User s Guide March 2007 Note The abbreviation 1d can be substituted for the keyword 1ogical drive Arguments TABLE 5 17 Arguments for show logical drive Argument Description Id list Specify a list of logical drives If no options are specified all logical drives are displayed Examples The following example returns all logical drive information sccli gt show ld LD LD ID Size Assigned Type Disks Spare Failed Status 1d0 161637C1 101 00GB Primary RAID5 4 1 0 Good Write Policy Default StripeSize 128KB The following example returns all logical drives with logical drive index numbers 0 and 1 sccli gt show logical drive 1d0 1d1 LD LD ID Size Assigned Type Disks Spare Failed Status 1d0 250FF1DC 30MB Primary RAID5 4 2 0 Good Write Policy Default StripeSize 128KB 1d1 363F38D9 67 34GB Primary RAID3 3 2 0 Good Write Policy Default StripeSize 16KB Returned Values Retur
214. l logical drives element 1 The RAID system total logical drive number gt lt KKK kKkKKkK kk kk KYK kockckckckck kcokck RRA RARE RARE K K K k K k k Kk k Kk kokokck kc K k kA lt lt ELEMENT total logical drives PCDATA gt lt KEK KKK KKK KEK KKK KKK KKK KKK KKK k kk kkk kk k k K k k k kx k k k k k kk ko k x ko x x gt lt total_partitions element gt 1 The RAID system total partition gt lt number gt lt KEK KKK KKK K V KKK KKK K T K KKK KEK KKK KKK Ve H V YK V KKK KKK KKK ck ko ko Kk k HH SS lt ELEMENT total_partitions PCDATA gt Appendix C Show Configuration Command Output 219 A A AA A A A AAA A A A A A A A A A A lt lt lt lt lt lt lt lt lt lt lt lt lt lt lt lt 1 REXARIXAARERAREXARERARECARERARERARERAREXARERARE ok Kk k kok K k k gt total physical drives element gt The RATD system total physical drives gt Ess number gt gt ELEMENT total physical drives PCDATA gt
215. l superuser machine nameS machine namett Typographic Conventions The Sun StorEdge CLI syntax and examples use the typeface conventions described in the following table Typeface Meaning Examples AaBbCc123 The names of commands files and directories Edit your login file on screen computer output Use ls a to list all files You have mail AaBbCc123 What you type when contrasted with on su screen computer output Password AaBbCc123 Book titles new words or terms words to be Read Chapter 6 in the User s Guide emphasized Replace command line variables with real names or values These are called class options You must be superuser to do this To delete a file type rm filename 1 The settings on your browser might differ from these settings Preface xiii The Sun StorEdge CLI syntax and examples use the special characters described in the following table Character Description Example brackets Brackets indicate that the option or argument is optional If the brackets are omitted the argument must be specified braces Braces indicate that the enclosed options or arguments are mutually dependent Treat everything enclosed in braces as a unit separator A separator indicates that only one of the arguments separated by this character can be specified mute controller check parity ld index Id id shutdown logical drive ld index ld id Related Docu
216. lename Specify the firmware file name for the file that you want to download r reset Reset the controller after the download completes Examples The following example downloads firmware to the RAID controller sccli gt download controller firmware SUN411G 3510 bin sccli selected se3000 199 249 246 28 58632 Sun StorEdge 3510 SN 000187 The controllers will be reset sequentially One controller will remain online while the other restarts This should not affect normal I O activity Are you sure yes 176 Sun StorEdge 3000 Family CLI 2 4 User s Guide March 2007 Note To monitor the status of the automatic firmware update use the Sun StorEdge CLI show redundancy mode command The Sun StorEdge CLI will display the progression of Failed Scanning Detected and Enabled states For details see show redundancy mode on page 84 download disk firmware Caution Do not use this command with the Solaris operating system Disk drive firmware is provided through Sun disk firmware patches which include the required download utility Sun disk firmware patches are separate from the Sun StorEdge 3000 family firmware patches For details refer to the Release Notes for your array Description Sun StorEdge 3000 family RAID arrays only The download disk firmware command downloads disk drive firmware to disk drives connected to the array The disk model is matched against SCSI inquiry data to determine w
217. lt KEK KKK KKK KEK KKK KKK KKK KX k kk k k k k k KEK KEK k Kk Kk K KKK k k kx k Kk k k ko ko Kx k Kx x gt lt ELEMENT defwid PCDATA gt lt Kote RR AR RRR EK KK K K k K kK k K kk kH K ck EK K Kk REE RR RARE RARA k kx 25 gt lt term element This channel have term or not lt KEK KKK KKK KEK KEKE KKK KKK KKK KEK KKK KKK KKK KKK KKK KKK KKK KH K KEKE gt lt ELEMENT term PCDATA gt lt KEK KEKE KKK Kk kH X KKK KKK KK KKK KKK KK KKK KKK KKK KKK KKK ck ko ko KE KEKE m lt defclk element Current clock gt lt REXERARERERARRERE RARA RARE RE RARE RARA K K K RARA RARA RAR Kk Kk K gt lt ELEMENT curclk PCDATA gt lt EXAARERERERARRERENERERR ERRE RARA RE RARA kkk k kkk Kk kkk kx k Kk k K gt lt defwid element Current width gt lt KEK KKK KK KKK KEKE KKK KEK KEK kk kk k k k k kk KKK k Kk K k ko ck k ck ko kx k KK ko k x ko Kx x cu lt ELEMENT curwid PCDATA gt lt KEK KKK KKK KKK KKK KEK KEK KEK KKK KKK KKK KK KKK KKK KKK ck ck ko KKK ko ko ko ko ko ko ko ko lt network element The channel info of the RAID system gt 1 It includes these elements gt idx gt Ed mac address static address gt NES transfer_speed_configurable gt current transfer speed gt supported transfer speed gt mac address configurable gt
218. lt fan_status_summary element gt lt KEK KKK KKK KEK KE KKK KE KKK KEK KKK KKK KE KKK KKK KKK KEK KEK ck ck XY KKK XY ko ko ko H ko ko ko lt lt ELEMENT fan_status_summary PCDATA gt lt kckckckck kck kck kokckok kckckok kokckck kock kk kokckok kk Kk kK Kk RARE K k KY X K K k Kk K Kk Kk k ok K K K a lt temperature_status element gt lt kkkk K K Kk K K VK Kk Kk V V HK KK K kck kck kokokck V H K KV KERR kk V k k H RARA RE RA k ILS IELEMENT temperature status PCDATA gt lt gt lt power_supply_status element gt lt gt lt ELEMENT power_supply_status idx status Appendix C Show Configuration Command Output 237 Ckkckckckckckckck ck k k k k k k k k kX k k k k k k k k k k k k k k k k k k k k k k k k k k k k kX k k k k X k kk gt lt fan_status element lt ckckckckckckck ck k k k k kK k k k k k k k k k k k kK k k k k k k k k k kK k k k k k k k kX k k k kK kc kX X kX X kk
219. lt remaining_size gt lt Speed gt 200M lt Speed gt 1d id 200000000 1d id lt ld_idx gt N A lt 1d_idx gt lt disk gt lt disk gt lt ch gt 3 lt ch gt lt target gt 11 lt target gt lt status gt STAND BY lt status gt lt manufacturer gt HITACHI lt manufacturer gt lt model gt HDS7225SASUN250G lt model gt lt serial_number gt VNRJ7HC6D1X0VT lt serial_number gt lt product_revision gt A6DA lt product_revision gt lt wwnn gt 22E4000A33002E60 lt wwnn gt lt capacity gt 232 88GB lt capacity gt lt remaining_size gt 232 63GB lt remaining_size gt lt Speed gt 200M lt Speed gt lt ld_id gt 00000000 lt 1d_id gt lt ld_idx gt N A lt 1d_idx gt lt disk gt lt disk gt lt ch gt 3 lt ch gt lt target gt 13 lt target gt lt status gt ONLINE lt status gt lt manufacturer gt HITACHI lt manufacturer gt lt model gt HDS7250SASUN500G lt model gt lt serial_number gt KRVN63ZAGJYT8D lt serial_number gt lt product_revision gt A20A lt product_revision gt lt wwnn gt 22E4000A3300D7F9 lt wwnn gt lt capacity gt 465 76GB lt capacity gt lt remaining_size gt 465 51GB lt remaining_size gt lt Speed gt 200M lt Speed gt ld id 7CO1DB6C ld id lt ld_idx gt 0 lt 1d_idx gt lt disk gt Appendix C Show Configuration Command Output 261 disk lt ch gt 3 lt ch gt lt target gt 14 lt target gt lt status gt ONLINE lt status gt lt manufacturer gt HITACHI lt m
220. lt model gt HDS7225SASUN250G lt model gt lt serial_number gt VNRJ3EC6CHJ90M lt serial_number gt lt product_revision gt A6DA lt product_revision gt lt wwnn gt 22E4000A33FFFF08 lt wwnn gt lt capacity gt 232 88GB lt capacity gt lt remaining_size gt 232 63GB lt remaining_size gt lt Speed gt 200M lt Speed gt ld id 200000000 1d id lt ld_idx gt N A lt 1d_idx gt lt disk gt lt disk gt lt ch gt 3 lt ch gt lt target gt 9 lt target gt lt status gt ONLINE lt status gt lt manufacturer gt HITACHI lt manufacturer gt lt model gt HDS7250SASUN500G lt model gt lt serial_number gt KRVN63ZAGM6VND lt serial_number gt lt product_revision gt A20A lt product_revision gt lt wwnn gt 22E4000A3300D7FB lt wwnn gt lt capacity gt 465 76GB lt capacity gt lt remaining_size gt 465 51GB lt remaining_size gt lt Speed gt 200M lt Speed gt lt ld_id gt 460FDB54 lt 1d_id gt ld idx 2 ld idx lt disk gt 260 Sun StorEdge 3000 Family CLI 2 4 Users Guide March 2007 disk lt ch gt 3 lt ch gt lt target gt 10 lt target gt lt status gt STAND BY lt status gt lt manufacturer gt HITACHI lt manufacturer gt lt model gt HDS7225SASUN250G lt model gt lt serial_number gt VNRJ3EC6CH1DJM lt serial_number gt lt product_revision gt A6DA lt product_revision gt wwnn FFFC000A33FFFF0A wwnn lt capacity gt 232 88GB lt capacity gt lt remaining_size gt 232 63GB
221. lue 30 troubleshooting 197 troubleshooting commands show bypass device 51 show bypass RAID 54 show bypass SFP 55 show loop map 60 U unconfigure global spare command 102 unconfigure local spare command 152 unfail command 89 unique identifier setting 80 unmap partition command 160 upload controller configuration file command 89 upload nvram command 62 version command 20 version option 10 W write policy setting for logical drives 131 138 setting globally 73 write back setting 73 write through setting 73 X xml configuration report 57 xml DTD 215 xml output 207 xml output sample 240 Index 291 292 SunStorEdge 3000 Family CLI 2 4 User s Guide March 2007
222. lues enabled disabled 2min 5min 10min 20min 30min 45min 1hour Sun StorEdge 3000 family FC and SATA arrays only The show battery status command displays the expiration and hardware status of the battery modules which preserve the contents of the write cache in each RAID controller For redundant controllers status for both batteries is shown If you run the show battery status command and the battery in service date is not set run the show battery status u command Early model battery boards were not programmed with an in service date The show battery status u command sets the in service date to the battery board manufacturing date and prompts the user to verify the date For details on replacing the battery refer to the Sun StorEdge 3000 Family FRU Installation Guide Note To successfully execute scripts using the Sun StorEdge CLI the battery in service date must be set Newer battery boards are programmed with the in service date If the battery type is an early board module FRU ID 370 5545 REVB then battery expiration monitoring is not supported In this case a message displays battery board type is not supported If your configuration requires the battery expiration feature consult your sales representative to obtain a new battery Chapter 2 System Function Commands 35 36 sccli gt Upper Upper Upper Upper Upper Lower Lower Lower Lower Lower Syntax show battery status u upd
223. lume indexes might change After creating or deleting logical volumes issue a show logical volumes command to view an updated list of logical volume indexes Or use logical volume IDs which do not change over the lifetime of the logical volume rather than logical volume indexes For more information Logical Volume Syntax on page 14 Note If no write policy is specified for the logical volume the write policy is set to the global controller setting and Default displays in the Write Policy field To view the controller write policy run the show cache parameters command For more information about the cache policy see set cache parameters on page 73 Note All device capacity is displayed in powers of 1024 For details see Device Capacity on page 15 Syntax show logical volumes lv list Arguments TABLE 5 30 Arguments for show logical volumes Argument Description lo list Specify a list of logical volumes If no arguments are specified all logical volumes are displayed Chapter 5 Logical Drive Partition and Logical Volume Commands 167 168 Examples The following example returns all logical volume information sccli 206 111 111 111 show logical volumes sccli selected se3000 206 111 111 111 58632 SUN StorEdge 3510 SN 000002 LV LV TD Size Assigned Write Policy LDs 1v0 43DBA866 13 67GB Primary Default 2 1qd1 1d2 The following example returns all logic
224. m slot Syntax show ses devices Examples The following example shows the SES devices for a Sun StorEdge 3510 FC RAID device sccli gt show ses devices Ch Id Chassis Vendor Product ID Rev PLD WWNN WWPN 2 12 003C E3 SUN StorEdge 3510F A 1046 1000 204000COFF003CE3 214000COFF003CE3 Topology loop a 3 12 0030 E3 SUN StorEdge 3510F A 1046 1000 204000COFF003CE3 224000COFF003CE3 Topology loop b 174 Sun StorEd ge 3000 Family CLI 2 4 User s Guide March 2007 Download Commands The following commands are explained in this section download controller firmware download disk firmware download pld hardware download safte firmware download sata path controller firmware download sata router firmware download ses firmware Caution All download commands are potentially dangerous Caution In redundant controller configurations download commands affect all LUINs on both controllers After running a download command run the select command to reselect the device Caution Stop the Configuration Service agent if it is running Note Although redundant controller configurations support live firmware upgrades using its failover capability the failover operation itself might cause warning messages to be displayed on the console or system log These messages can be ignored Note If the download firmware files are not under the same direct
225. maining_size gt lt Speed gt 200M lt Speed gt ld id 200000000 1d id ld idx N A ld idx lt disk gt Appendix C Show Configuration Command Output 257 disk lt ch gt 3 lt ch gt lt target gt 1 lt target gt lt status gt USED lt status gt lt manufacturer gt HITACHI lt manufacturer gt lt model gt HDS7225SASUN250G lt model gt lt serial_number gt VNRJ3EC6CPSLMM lt serial_number gt lt product_revision gt A6DA lt product_revision gt lt wwnn gt 22E4000A33FFFF01 lt wwnn gt lt capacity gt 232 88GB lt capacity gt lt remaining_size gt 232 63GB lt remaining_size gt lt Speed gt 200M lt Speed gt ld id 200000000 1d id lt ld_idx gt N A lt 1d_idx gt lt disk gt lt disk gt lt ch gt 3 lt ch gt lt target gt 2 lt target gt lt status gt USED lt status gt lt manufacturer gt HITACHI lt manufacturer gt lt model gt HDS7225SASUN250G lt model gt lt serial_number gt VNRJ9HC6CTWR3M lt serial_number gt lt product_revision gt A6DA lt product_revision gt lt wwnn gt 22E4000A33001C16 lt wwnn gt lt capacity gt 232 88GB lt capacity gt lt remaining_size gt 232 63GB lt remaining_size gt lt Speed gt 200M lt Speed gt ld id 200000000 1d id lt ld_idx gt N A lt 1d_idx gt lt disk gt lt disk gt lt ch gt 3 lt ch gt lt target gt 3 lt target gt lt status gt USED lt status gt lt manufacturer gt HITACHI lt manufacturer gt lt mo
226. me The ID number is generated from the Sun StorEdge CLI Use the show logical volumes command to find the number write policy Set the write policy for the logical volume Valid values write back write through default If you do not specify a write policy or if you specify default the logical volume uses the write policy specified for the controller If the write policy changes for the controller the write policy automatically changes for the logical volume as well To set the controller write policy use the set cache parameters command For details see set cache parameters on page 73 assignment Specify the controller assignment for the logical volume If no value is specified the logical volume is assigned to the primary controller by default Valid values primary secondary Examples The following example sets write policy for logical volume 4 to write back set logical volume lv4 write back Sun StorEdge 3000 Family CLI 2 4 User s Guide March 2007 show logical volumes Description The show logical volumes command displays information about all or a specified list of logical volumes Returned values include LV index LV ID logical volume count LD ID list size Mbyte or Gbyte write policy and assignment information For details on creating logical volumes see create logical volume on page 163 Caution Any time logical volumes are created or deleted the numbering of logical vo
227. me par quelque moyen que ce soit sans l autorisation pr alable et crite de Sun et de ses bailleurs de licence s il y en a Le logiciel d tenu par des tiers et qui comprend la technologie relative aux polices de caract res est prot g par un copyright et licenci par des fournisseurs de Sun Des parties de ce produit pourront tre d riv es des systemes Berkeley BSD licenci s par l Universit de Californie UNIX est une marque d pos e aux Etats Unis et dans d autres pays et licenci e exclusivement par X Open Company Ltd Sun Sun Microsystems le logo Sun Sun StorEdge AnswerBook2 docs sun com et Solaris sont des marques de fabrique ou des marques d pos es de Sun Microsystems Inc aux Etats Unis et dans d autres pays LA DOCUMENTATION EST FOURNIE EN L ETAT ET TOUTES AUTRES CONDITIONS DECLARATIONS ET GARANTIES EXPRESSES OU TACITES SONT FORMELLEMENT EXCLUES DANS LA MESURE AUTORISEE PAR LA LOI APPLICABLE Y COMPRIS NOTAMMENT TOUTE GARANTIE IMPLICITE RELATIVE A LA QUALITE MARCHANDE A L APTITUDE A UNE UTILISATION PARTICULIERE OU A L ABSENCE DE CONTREFACON CA Adobe PostScript Contents Preface xi Overview 1 Supported Communication Modes 1 Accessing the Sun StorEdge CLI 2 v To Access the Sun StorEdge CLI from UNIX Operating Systems 3 v To Access the Sun StorEdge CLI from the Microsoft Windows Operating System 4 Accessing the Man Page and Help 4 v To Access the Man Page from UNIX Operating Systems 4 v To Acces
228. me is omitted the Sun StorEdge CLI searches for any locally attached Sun StorEdge 3000 family arrays If one is found it is selected automatically If more than one device is found a list of choices is displayed If no device is found the Sun StorEdge CLI exits with an error In interactive mode specify the device on the command line For instance type sccli 206 1 111 111 Sccli selected se3000 206 1 111 111 58632 SUN StorEdge 3310 SN 000001 sccli gt show disks free sccli no free disks found To choose from a list of available devices do not specify a device on the command line For instance in Solaris type sccli Available devices 1 dev rdsk c1t0d0s2 SUN StorEdge 3310 SN 000001 Primary 2 dev rdsk c6t40d0s2 SUN StorEdge 3510 SN 003CE3 Primary Please enter selection 1 Sccli version sccli version 2 0 0 Note In interactive mode special characters must be enclosed in single or double quotes which are parsed and stripped off For example if you want to set your password to an empty string specify an empty string by typing two quote characters with nothing in between such as set password Chapter 1 Overview 5 6 Single Command Mode In single command mode the name of the target device and the command to execute are specified on the command line The Sun StorEdge CLI executes the command and exits To start single command mode type sccli o
229. mentation The following table contains a list of related software documentation For a complete list of all related documentation refer to the Sun StorEdge 3000 Family Installation Operation and Service Manual for your array Title Part Number Sun StorEdge 3120 SCSI Array Release Notes 816 7955 Sun StorEdge 3310 SCSI Array Release Notes 819 7109 Sun StorEdge 3320 SCSI Array Release Notes 817 7660 Sun StorEdge 3510 FC and 3511 SATA Array Release Notes 817 6597 Sun StorEdge 3000 Family 2 4 Software Installation Guide 817 3764 Sun StorEdge 3000 Family RAID Firmware 4 2 User s Guide 817 3711 Sun StorEdge 3000 Family Configuration Service 2 4 User s Guide 817 3337 Sun StorEdge 3000 Family Diagnostic Reporter 2 4 User s Guide 817 3338 Sun StorEdge 3000 Family RAID Controller Firmware Migration Guide 819 6573 xiv Sun StorEdge 3000 Family CLI 2 4 User s Guide March 2007 Accessing Sun Documentation All Sun StorEdge 3000 family documentation is available online in both PDF and HTML format at the following location http www sun com products n solutions hardware docs Network Storage Solutions Workgroup You can view print or purchase a broad selection of Sun documentation at http www sun com documentation Contacting Sun Technical Support For late breaking news and troubleshooting tips review the Release Notes for your array located in the appropriate directory http www sun com products n solutions hardware
230. mmand For details see show logical drives parity check on page 148 Syntax abort parity check ld index Id id Arguments TABLE 5 4 Arguments for abort parity check Argument Description ld index Specify the logical drive index number For example 143 Id id Specify the logical drive ID For example 71038221 Examples The following example stops the parity check on logical drive 0 sccli gt abort parity check 1d0 Chapter 5 Logical Drive Partition and Logical Volume Commands 125 abort rebuild Description The abort rebuild command stops the rebuilding of a logical drive To rebuild a logical drive use the rebuild command For details see rebuild on page 137 To view the progress of an expansion use the show logical drives rebuilding command For details see show logical drives rebuilding on page 149 Syntax abort rebuild ld index ld id Arguments TABLE 5 5 Arguments for abort rebuild Argument Description Id index Specify the logical drive index number For example 1d3 Id id Specify the logical drive ID For example 71038221 Examples The following example stops rebuilding logical drive 4 sccli gt abort rebuild 1d4 add disk Description The add disk command adds one disk or a list of disks to the specified logical drive The disks must not be members of a logical drive If you try to add a disk to an unsupported RAID level an e
231. mmand stops a media check on specified disks or all member disks of the specified logical drive For more information on the check media command see check media on page 127 Note The front panel LEDs for the drives being checked will blink until the media check is finished or aborted For more information about LEDs refer to the Sun StorEdge 3000 Family Installation Operation and Service Manual for your array Syntax abort media check disk list ld index ld id Arguments TABLE5 3 Arguments for abort media check Argument Description disk list Shows specific disks Use any of the following formats ch id ch idm n ch is physical device channel and id is the SCSI ID of the device and m to n represents a contiguous range of IDs on the same channel For example 2 0 2 3 or 2 2 5 Id index Specify the logical drive index number For example 1d3 Id id Specify the logical drive ID For example 71038221 124 Sun StorEdge 3000 Family CLI 2 4 User s Guide March 2007 Examples The following example stops the media check for all member disks of logical drive 5 sccli gt abort media check 1d5 abort parity check Description The abort parity check command stops the parity check on the specified logical drive To check parity use the check parity command For details see check parity on page 128 To view the progress of a parity check use the show logical drives parity check co
232. mware download failure on some targets Firmware download not performed Firmware type and unit type do not match Get events failure Get host wwn name list failed Get network protocol failed Get raid configuration error Get raid configuration from file error Get ses wdt status jbod failed Get slot status failed Getting network parameters failure Host wwn entry existing Host wwn entry not existing Host wwn name too long Illegal operation on mixed type of disk drive or unit Illegal operation while a logical drive exists Illegal request In service date not set in the battery Initializing Invalid command Invalid host wwn Invalid protocol name 202 Sun StorEdge 3000 Family CLI 2 4 User s Guide March 2007 TABLEB 1 Gun StorEdge CLI Error and Status Messages Continued Error and Status Messages Invalid request Invalid ses enclosure page length IO chl diagnostic command aborted by user IO chl diagnostic command bad target parameters IO chl diagnostic command busy IO chl diagnostic command completed with errors IO chl diagnostic command completed with no error IO chl diagnostic command failed IO chl diagnostic command in progress IO chl diagnostic command not ready IO chl diagnostic command not running IO chl diagnostic command not valid IO chl diagnostic command out of resource IO chl diagnostic command parameter error IO chl diagnostic command too much ops running Is member of logical volume
233. n of the IOM board that the router resides on router firmware revision number SATA router boot revision customer specified behavior CSB parameter structure revision number a collection of memory resident parameters that define operational behavior of the router hardware revision number and the self test revision number 172 SunStorEdge 3000 Family CLI 2 4 User s Guide March 2007 Syntax show sata router Examples The following example shows the data returned from a redundant configuration Two routers are assigned to the same chassis in a redundant configuration The Encl SN column displays the same chassis serial number for both routers sccli gt show sata router Encl ID Encl SN Ch Slot Rev Boot rev CSB HW rev ST rev 0 07ECCO 2 upper DP0553 0548 0500 11 0552 0 07ECCO 3 lower DP0553 0548 0500 11 0552 In the following example no valid path exists on the lower router so n a displays to indicate that no data was returned sccli 206 6 180 20 show sata router Sccli selected se3000 206 1 111 11 58632 SUN StorEdge 3511 SN 07ECDF Encl ID Encl SN Ch Slot Rev Boot rev CSB HW rev ST rev 0 O7ECDF 2 upper DP0548 0509 0500 00 0552 0 O7ECDF 3 lower n a n a n a n a n a show ses devices Description Sun StorEdge 3000 family FC and SATA devices only The show ses devices command displays a list of SCSI Enclosure Services SES devices visible to the selected array controller or JB
234. n page 165 specified logical volume set protocol on enable or disable the X X X X page 25 specified network protocol and set the Telnet inactivity timeout value Appendix A Summary of Sun StorEdge CLI Options and Commands 189 TABLEA 2 Platform support for RAID Array Commands Continued Sun Sun Sun Sun StorEdge StorEdge StorEdge StorEdge 3510 FC 3511SATA 3310 SCSI 3320 SCSI Command Page Number Function Array Array Array Array To remove an existing set the RS 232 interface baud X X X X password specify a rate zero length string with a pair of double quote characters For example on page 78 set unique set the subsystem s six digit X X X X identifier on hexadecimal serial number page 79 show access mode display the Sun StorEdgeCLI X X X X on page 33 access mode show auto write display the event trigger X X X X through trigger on status for the controller page 34 show battery display battery information X X status on page 35 including battery type manufacturing data in service date expiration date and status show bypass display the bypass status of X X device on page 51 all devices on a specified loop show bypass RAID display the hardware bypass X X on page 54 status of the RAID controllers on Loop A and Loop B show bypass SFP display the bypass status of X X on page 55 all SFPs on a specified loop show cache display cache policy X X X X parameters on page 81 show
235. nd 154 controller array name 77 component status 47 downloading configuration 69 downloading firmware 175 drive channel parameters 115 IP address 28 resetting 72 shutting down 86 88 supplying password 71 uploading configuration 89 viewing date 81 viewing event log 64 65 viewing name 82 create host wwn name command 23 create logical drive command 131 create logical volume command 163 287 D delete host wwn name command 24 delete logical drive command 134 delete logical volume command 164 device names inband communication 10 out of band communication 11 DHCP 22 26 31 50 disk option 8 disks adding 126 144 capacity 15 device syntax 12 downloading firmware 177 scanning 93 verifying data on 94 97 viewing 98 download controller configuration file command 69 download controller firmware command 175 download disk firmware command 177 download nvram command 49 download pld hardware command 179 download safte firmware command 180 download sata path controller firmware command 181 download sata router firmware command 182 download ses firmware command 183 drive parameters setting 108 viewing 108 DTD file 215 dynamic addressing configuring 22 Dynamic Host Configuration Protocol 22 26 31 50 E environmental sensors chassis components 38 controller components 47 error messages 197 event log clearing 63 viewing 64 65 exit code 6 exit command 18 expand comm
236. nd includes the following topics Supported Communication Modes on page 1 Accessing the Sun StorEdge CLI on page 2 Accessing the Man Page and Help on page 4 Interactive Command Mode on page 5 Single Command Mode on page 6 Command Keywords on page 7 a Device Names for Inband Communication on page 10 a Device Names for Out of Band Communication on page 11 Disk Device Syntax on page 12 Logical Drive Syntax on page 13 a a Logical Volume Syntax on page 14 Device Capacity on page 15 Supported Communication Modes The Sun StorEdge CLI provides the capability to monitor and configure Sun StorEdge 3000 family arrays from an operating system command line interface using inband or out of band interfaces Note All methods that involve accessing a local device require superuser privileges Only when an IP address is specified on the command line can the user invoke the Sun StorEdge CLI without being root The management mode is determined based on the following m If a host name or IP address is specified on the command line it is used This is out of band mode For more details see Device Names for Out of Band Communication on page 11 m If a local Fibre Channel FC or SCSI device is specified on the command line it is used This is inband mode For more details see Device Names for Inband Communication on page 10 m When no address or device is specified a
237. nd the number Examples The following example returns all logical drives with the logical volume ID of 12345678 sccli c2t0d0 show logical drives logical volume 12345678 The following example shows all logical drives in the logical volume with the ID of 0 sccli gt show ld lv 1v0 LD LD ID Size Assigned Type Disks Spare Failed Status 1d1 363F38D9 67 34GB Primary RAID3 3 2 0 Good Write Policy Default StripeSize 16KB Returned Values Returned values include LD index LD ID RAID level size GB status number of disks number of spares and number of failed disks Status values include Good in good condition Initing the logical drive is initializing Incomplete two or more drives failed Invalid wrong optimization setting Drv Failed drive failed Drv Absent drive not detected Chapter 5 Logical Drive Partition and Logical Volume Commands 147 148 show logical drives parity check Description The show logical drives check parity command displays the status of a parity check being performed on a logical drive Returned values include LD index LD ID and progress To cancel the parity check use the abort parity check command For details see abort parity check on page 125 Syntax show logical drives parity check Note The abbreviation 1d can be substituted for the keyword 1ogical drive Examples The following example returns the percent complete
238. necting the upper or lower controller s inter controller link on any given host channel breaks the internal connection between the two controllers and between the upper controller and the external connector on the lower controller and vice versa For the Sun StorEdge 3511 SATA array you must disconnect the upper and lower host channel to disconnect the inter controller link Disconnecting the inter controller link potentially doubles aggregate bandwidth because the controllers do not have to share bandwidth on each channel and it also prevents controller failover from working Examples The following example disconnects the port on lower channel 1 sccli c2t0d0 set inter controller link lower channel 1 disconnected The following example sets the port bypass circuit for channel 5 on the upper controller slot to enabled sccli c2t0dO set icl upper channel 5 connected show channels Description The show channels command displays information about host drive and RCCOM channels including the channel number channel mode primary and secondary ID speed and connection mode Chapter 4 Channel Commands 113 Syntax show channels channel list Arguments TABLE 4 5 Arguments for show channels Argument Description channel list Specify the channel The format for channel list is n m or a range format n m or n p m Valid channel numbers include 0
239. ned values include LD index LD ID size MB or GB controller assignment RAID level number of disks number of spares number of failed disks status write policy type block size KB and block status Status values include Good no reported failures m Good I online initialization or expansion in progress Good E offline expansion in progress Chapter 5 Logical Drive Partition and Logical Volume Commands 143 Initing initialization in progress Initing I offline initialization in progress Incomplete two or more drives failed Invalid wrong optimization setting Dead drive in a fatal fail state Drv Failed drive failed Drv Absent drive not detected Rebuilding rebuild in progress P parity check in progress E expand in progress I online initialization in progress A adding disk in progress AP adding disk paused show logical drives add disk Description The show logical drives add disk command displays the status of disks that are being added to a logical drive Returned values include LD index LD ID and progress For details on the add disk command see add disk on page 126 Syntax show logical drives add disk Note The abbreviation 1d can be substituted for the keyword 1ogical drive Examples The following example returns the completion percentage for the disks that are being added sccli c2t0d0 show logical drives add disk show logical drives expanding
240. not time out if it is not being used sccli gt show protocol Identifier priagentall snmp dhcp ping Status Port Parameters enabled 23 inactivity timeout disabled enabled 80 n a enabled 443 n a enabled 21 n a enabled 22 n a enabled 1 n a enabled 161 n a enabled 68 n a enabled n a n a Returned Values The returned protocol values include telnet Telnet access to the IP address enabled by default and the Inactivity timeout parameter which indicates the amount of time before the Telnet connection times out HTTP Hypertext Transport Protocol disabled by default HTTPS Hypertext Transport Protocol Secure disabled by default FTP File Transfer Protocol disabled by default SSH Secure Socket Handling disabled by default Pr Agent All Controller internal communication protocol enabled by default 30 Sun StorEdge 3000 Family CLI 2 4 User s Guide March 2007 m SNMP Simple Network Management Protocol enabled by default SNMP might be used to communicate with external management software m DHCP Dynamic Host Configuration Protocol enabled by default DHCP is used in some networks to dynamically assign IP addresses to systems on the network m ping Ping enables hosts in the network to determine if an array is online enabled by default show rs232 configuration Description The show rs232 configuration command displays the RS 232 connection configuration Returne
241. number fru status OK fru status fru channel lt idx gt 0 lt idx gt lt logch1 gt 0 lt logchl gt lt mode gt Host lt mode gt lt type gt Fiber lt type gt lt pid gt 40 lt pid gt lt sid gt N A lt sid gt lt term gt N A lt term gt lt defclk gt AUTO lt defclk gt lt curclk gt 2G lt curclk gt lt defwid gt Serial lt defwid gt lt curwid gt Serial lt curwid gt lt channel gt lt channel gt lt idx gt 1 lt idx gt logchl 1 logchl lt mode gt Host lt mode gt lt type gt Fiber lt type gt lt pid gt N A lt pid gt lt sid gt 42 lt sid gt lt term gt N A lt term gt Appendix C Show Configuration Command Output 243 lt defclk gt AUTO lt defclk gt lt curclk gt N A lt curclk gt lt defwid gt Serial lt defwid gt lt curwid gt N A lt curwid gt lt channel gt lt channel gt lt idx gt 2 lt idx gt lt logch1 gt 0 lt logchl gt lt mode gt DRV RCC lt mode gt lt type gt Fiber lt type gt lt pid gt 14 lt pid gt lt sid gt 15 lt sid gt lt term gt N A lt term gt lt defclk gt AUTO lt defclk gt lt curclk gt 2G lt curclk gt lt defwid gt Serial lt defwid gt lt curwid gt Serial lt curwid gt lt channel gt lt channel gt lt idx gt 3 lt idx gt lt logchl1 gt 1 lt logchl gt lt mode gt DRV RCC lt mode gt lt type gt Fiber lt type gt lt pid gt 14 lt pid gt lt sid gt 15 lt
242. ny time logical volumes are created or deleted the numbering of logical volume indexes might change After creating or deleting logical volumes issue a show logical volumes command to view an updated list of logical volume indexes Or use logical volume IDs which do not change over the lifetime of the logical volume rather than logical volume indexes For more information see Logical Volume Syntax on page 14 Note If no write policy is specified for the logical drive the write policy is set to the global controller setting and Default displays in the Write Policy field To view the controller write policy run the show cache parameters command For more information about the cache policy see set cache parameters on page 73 Syntax show logical drives logical volume lv index lv id Note The abbreviation 1d can be substituted for the keyword 1ogical drive The abbreviation 1v can be substituted for the keyword 1ogical volume 146 Sun StorEdge 3000 Family CLI 2 4 User s Guide March 2007 Arguments TABLE 5 18 Arguments for show logical drives logical volume Argument Description lo index Show specific drives in a logical volume The index number is generated from the Sun StorEdge CLI Use the show logical volumes command to find the number lo id Show specific drives in a logical volume The ID number is generated from the Sun StorEdge CLI Use the show logical volumes command to fi
243. o mix drive types in a logical drive by cloning a disk with a different drive type an error is displayed For more information refer to the Sun StorEdge 3000 Family RAID Firmware User s Guide Syntax clone source disk dest disk priority Chapter 3 Controller and Disk Commands 91 Arguments TABLE3 7 Arguments for clone Argument Description source disk Specify the disk to copy and replace For example specify the source disk with target ID 1 on channel 2 as 2 1 dest disk Specify the disk to use as the replacement For example specify the destination disk with target ID 3 on channel 2 as 2 3 priority Specify the priority of the disk replacement Valid values 1ow normal improved high The higher the priority selected the greater amount of system resources required to perform the clone For example specify 1ow to have the replacement occur using minimal system resources Examples The following example copies and replaces disk drive ID 5 on channel 2 with disk drive ID 0 on channel 3 sccli c2t0dO clone d2 5 d3 0 configure global spare Description The configure global spare command specifies a global spare disk The disk drive status is set to standby Note If you connect one or more Sun StorEdge 3511 SATA expansion units to a Sun StorEdge 3510 FC array configure an FC drive and a SATA drive as global spares Then if a drive fails in the RAID chassis a FC global spare is used to r
244. o the pair of controller units can also be part of the partner group Primary controller identifier number Programmable Logic Array Offers flexible features for more complex designs Programmable logic device A generic term for an integrated circuit that can be programmed in a laboratory to perform complex functions redundant array of independent disks An arrangement of two or more disk drives combined into a single virtual drive to provide more disk storage space better performance and reliability and redundant backup of data Various combinations of these features are described by defined RAID levels Arrays can support RAID 0 1 1 0 3 and 5 Various techniques using combinations of mirroring striping duplexing and parity to implement a RAID array are called RAID levels Each technique uses a distinct algorithm to offer a mix of performance reliability and cost Reverse Address Resolution Protocol Reliability Availability and Serviceability These headings refer to a variety of features and initiatives all designed to maximize equipment uptime and mean time between failures minimize downtime and the length of time necessary to repair failures and eliminate or decrease single points of failure in favor of redundancy A storage device parameter that determines whether the storage device holds data in cache before storing it to disk The ability to hold data in cache while it is being written to disk can increase storage d
245. oading and downloading the controller configuration see download controller configuration on page 68 and upload controller configuration on page 89 download nvram Description The download nvram command restores the NVRAM configuration from an NVRAM file to the RAID controller The binary NVRAM file contains information specific to the host device such as channel settings RAID controller parameters and so on The IP address password and controller name and unique ID are not downloaded from the NVRAM file to the host device since these settings differ for each controller After the download completes reset the controller for the NVRAM settings to take effect Note The saved NVRAM file is operating system dependent You must download the file to the same operating system that the file is saved on For instance if the file is saved to the Solaris operating system you must download it from a Solaris operating system Syntax download nvram filename r reset Chapter 2 System Function Commands 49 50 Arguments TABLE 2 16 Arguments for download nvram Argument Description filename Specify the file name for the file that you want to download r reset Reset the controller after the download completes Examples The following example downloads the NVRAM file tmpsn2 1 nvram and then resets the controller sccli 192 168 0 1download nvram tmpsn2 1 nvram r reset nvram Descr
246. ogical drive Argument Description Id index Specify the logical drive index number For example 1d3 Id id Specify the logical drive ID For example 71038221 Examples The following example deletes the logical drive with the logical drive index number 2 sccli c2t0d0 delete logical drive 1d2 The following example deletes the logical drive with the logical drive ID number 3C24554F sccli c2t0d0 delete logical drive 3C24554F Description The expand command expands a logical drive or logical volume by the specified size The size you specify is added for each available physical drive in the logical drive and is limited to the maximum available free disk space on the smallest physical drive The total capacity added is calculated automatically based on the RAID level RAID levels 0 1 3 and 5 support expansion For more information on how the expansion size is calculated refer to the Sun StorEdge 3000 Family RAID Firmware User s Guide Note To expand a logical volume you must first expand the logical drives that make up the logical volume Note To expand a logical drive with a local spare assigned you must remove the local spare and then expand the logical drive Since local spares are dedicated to a specific logical drive if you expand the logical drive size the spare drive can no longer accommodate the size of the expanded logical drive Chapter 5 Logical Drive Partition and Logical Vol
247. ogical drive or X X X X on page 160 logical volume partition from a host channel target LUN upload controller upload array controller X X X X configuration on binary configuration page 89 upload nvram on upload an NVRAM file X X X X page 62 version on page 20 display program version X X X X 194 Sun StorEdge 3000 Family CLI 2 4 User s Guide March 2007 An X in a product column in the following table indicates that the Sun StorEdge CLI command works with that product TABLE A 3 JBOD Commands Sun Sun Sun Sun StorEdge StorEdge StorEdge StorEdge 3310 3320 3120 3510 FC SCSI SCSI SCS Command Page Number Function JBOD JBOD JBOD JBOD about on page 18 display program version and X X X X copyright info download pld download PLD hardware into the X hardware on page 179 SES microprocessor in a FC JBOD device download safte download firmware into the X X X firmware on page 180 microprocessors within a SCSI JBOD download ses download enclosure SES firmware X firmware on page 183 exit on page 18 exit the Sun StorEdge CLI X X X X help on page 19 display help for commands X X X X quit on page 19 exit the program X X X X select on page 20 specify a storage device to monitor X X X X or configure set led on page 95 specify a name for a disk drive slot X X X in the array enclosure or expansion chassis show access mode display the access mode X X X X on page 33 show configuration displ
248. oller link command connects or disconnects an individual port on the upper of lower RAID controller in a redundant controller configuration For the Sun StorEdge 3510 FC array the two controllers are effectively disconnected on that channel if either one of the two inter controller links are disconnected because host channels on both Sun StorEdge 3510 FC controllers are controlled by the same port For the Sun StorEdge 3511 SATA array the command must be run for each individual channel and slot location because host channels on the primary and secondary controller are controlled by different ports Caution If the controllers are not connected host applications might not experience transparent failover in the event of a controller failure Syntax set inter controller link upper lower channel channel connected disconnected 112 Note icl can be substituted for the keywords inter controller link Sun StorEdge 3000 Family CLI 2 4 User s Guide March 2007 Arguments TABLE 4 4 Arguments for set inter controller link Argument Description upper lower Specify the location of the array controller slot upper or lower channel ch Specify the channel to modify Valid values 0 1 4 5 connected Specify the desired state for the port bypass circuit disconnected Usually all inter controller links on both the upper and lower controllers are connected For the Sun StorEdge 3510 FC array discon
249. omplete Write through cache has lower write operation and throughput performance than write back cache but it is the safer strategy with minimum risk of data loss on power failure worldwide name A globally unique hard coded and embedded number assigned by the manufacturer and registered under IEEE that is used to identify hardware Glossary 285 286 Sun StorEdge 3000 Family CLI 2 4 User s Guide March 2007 Index A abort clone command 90 abort create command 122 abort expand command 123 abort media check command 124 abort parity check command 125 abort rebuild command 126 about command 18 access mode displaying 33 add disk command 126 alarm muting for controller 71 silencing JBOD 71 B bad blocks finding 127 C cache settings 73 81 calculating maximum drive expand capacity 135 capacity calculating maximum drive expand capacity 135 channel configuring 106 drive parameters setting 108 host parameters setting 110 viewing host or drive 113 chassis component status 38 check media command 127 check parity command 128 checking parity 128 148 clear events command 63 clone command 91 cloning performing 91 stopping 90 viewing 97 command keywords 7 command parameters list of xii 185 communication modes 1 configure channel command 106 configure global spare command 92 configure local spare command 130 configure network interface command 21 configure partition comma
250. on gt lt Initial_Hardware_Dash_Level gt 01 lt Initial_Hardware_Dash_Level gt lt FRU_Shortname gt SATA I O JBOD lt FRU_Shortname gt lt manufacturing_date gt Sat Jun 26 18 32 29 2004 lt manufacturing_date gt manufacturing location Milpitas CA USA manufacturing location manufacturer jedec id 0x0301 manufacturer jedec id fru location UPPER FC JBOD IOM SLOT fru location chassis serial number 07ECEA4 chassis serial number fru status OK fru status fru fru lt idx gt 2 lt idx gt lt name gt AC_POWER_SUPPLY lt name gt lt description gt SE3310 SE3510 AC PWR SUPPLY w FAN lt description gt lt part_number gt 370 5398 lt part_number gt lt serial_number gt 114536 lt serial_number gt lt revision gt 02 lt revision gt lt Initial_Hardware_Dash_Level gt 02 lt Initial_Hardware_Dash_Level gt lt FRU_Shortname gt 370 5398 02 lt FRU_Shortname gt lt manufacturing_date gt Sat Nov 29 15 00 56 2003 lt manufacturing_date gt lt manufacturing_location gt Irvine California USA lt manufacturing_location gt lt manufacturer_jedec_id gt 0x048F lt manufacturer_jedec_id gt lt fru_location gt RIGHT AC PSU SLOT 1 RIGHT lt fru_location gt lt chassis_serial_number gt 07ECE4 lt chassis_serial_number gt lt fru_status gt OK lt fru_status gt lt fru gt lt fru gt lt idx gt 3 lt idx gt lt name gt AC_POWER_SUPPLY lt name gt lt description gt SE3310 SE3510 AC PWR SUPPLY w F
251. on page 138 You can also configure the write policy to automatically change from write back cache to write through cache when certain environmental events such as a fan failure occur For details see set auto write through trigger on page 32 For more information on cache policy refer to the Sun StorEdge 3000 Family RAID Firmware User s Guide Optimization Mode Before creating or modifying logical drives determine the appropriate optimization mode for the RAID array The controller supports two optimization modes sequential I O and random I O Sequential I O is the default mode The RAID array s cache optimization mode determines the cache block size used by the controller for all logical drives m For sequential optimization the cache block size is 128 Kbyte m For random optimization the cache block size is 32 Kbyte An appropriate cache block size improves performance when a particular application uses either large or small stripe sizes m Video playback multimedia post production audio and video editing and similar applications read and write large files in sequential order m Transaction based and database update applications read and write small files in random order Since the cache block size works in conjunction with the default stripe size set by the cache optimization mode for each logical drive you create these default stripe sizes are consistent with the cache block size setting You can however specify
252. onfiguration Command Output 277 278 Sun StorEdge 3000 Family CLI 2 4 Users Guide March 2007 Glossary The glossary lists acronyms and defines RAID terms found through the documentation It also includes definitions of the operational states for disk drives and logical drives active active controllers ANSI ARP automatic rebuild block striping block striping with dedicated parity caching A pair of components such as storage controllers in a failure tolerant RAID array that share a task or set of tasks when both are functioning normally When one component of the pair fails the other takes the entire load Dual active controllers are connected to the same set of devices and provide a combination of higher I O performance and greater failure tolerance than a single controller American National Standards Institute Address Resolution Protocol A process in which data is automatically reconstructed after a drive failure and written to a standby spare drive An automatic rebuild also occurs when a new drive is installed manually in place of a failed drive If the rebuild process is interrupted by a reset use the Manual Rebuild command from the firmware application to restart the rebuilding process See striping RAID 3 This technique breaks data into logical blocks the size of a disk block and then stripes these blocks across several drives One drive is dedicated to parity In the event that a disk fails th
253. onnection Bandwidth per node via a Fabric switch remains constant when more nodes are added and a node on a switch port uses a data path of up to 100 Mbyte sec to send or receive data A mode of operation for failure tolerant arrays in which a component has failed and its function has been assumed by a redundant component The capacity to cope with internal hardware problems without interrupting the array s data availability often by using backup systems brought online when a failure is detected Many arrays provide fault tolerance by using RAID architecture to give protection against loss of data when a single disk drive fails Using RAID 1 mirroring RAID 3 or RAID 5 striping with parity or RAID 1 0 mirroring and striping techniques the array controller can reconstruct data from a failed drive and write it to a standby or replacement drive A logical drive that provides protection of data in the event of a single drive failure by employing RAID 1 1 0 3 or 5 Fibre Channel Arbitrated Loop FC AL is implemented as either a loop or a Fabric A loop can contain up to 126 nodes accessible through only one or two servers A cost effective gigabit communications link deployed across a wide range of hardware Fibre channel adapters of a host computer server or workstation Sun StorEdge 3000 Family CLI 2 4 User s Guide March 2007 Fibre hubs FRU Gbyte GBIC global spare group HBA hot spare hot swappable
254. or show disks logical drive Argument Description Id index Show a specific logical drive The index number is generated from the Sun StorEdge CLI Values range from 0 to 31 Use the show logical drive command to find the number Id id Show a specific logical drive The ID is generated from the Sun StorEdge CLI Use the show logical drive command to find the number 140 Sun StorEdge 3000 Family CLI 2 4 User s Guide March 2007 Examples The following example returns all logical drive disks with the logical drive ID of 13843684 sccli gt show disks logical drive 13843684 Ch Id Size Speed LD LD ID Status IDs Rev 0 0 33 92GB 160MB 1d0 13843684 ONLINE SEAGATE ST336607LSUN36G 0307 S N 3JA1BJ2P00007338 0 d 33 92GB 160MB 1d0 13843684 ONLINE SEAGATE ST336607LSUN36G 0307 S N 3JA1C2E600007339 0 2 33 92GB 160MB 1d0 13843684 ONLINE SEAGATE ST336607LSUN36G 0307 S N 3JA22Z0A00007351 0 3 33 92GB 160MB 1d0 13843684 ONLINE SEAGATE ST336607LSUN36G 0307 S N 3JA230NL00007351 The following example returns all logical drive disks with a logical drive index of 0 sccli gt show disks 1d 1q0 Ch Id Size Speed LD LD ID Status IDs Rev 2 6 33 92GB 200MB 1d0 161637C1 ONLINE SEAGATE ST336753FSUN36G 0349 S N 3HX0YEJT00007349 2 7 33 92GB 200MB 1d0 161637C1 ONLINE SEAGATE ST336753FSUN36G 0349 S N 3HX0Y6J300007349 2 8 33 92GB 200MB 1d0 161637C1 ONLINE SEAGATE ST336753FSUN36G 0349 S N 3HX0YC1Y00007349 2 9 33 92GB 20
255. ory as the Sun StorEdge CLI you must specify the full path download controller firmware Description The download controller firmware command downloads firmware to the RAID controller Before the command is executed the firmware file is checked to ensure that it is appropriate for the target device In a dual controller configuration the failover capability of the redundant controller pair is used to activate the new Chapter 6 Firmware Show and Download Commands 175 firmware without requiring the array to be shut down in what is known as a live upgrade or hot firmware download operation In a single controller configuration the new firmware is activated by resetting the controller If the r or reset option is specified the controllers are always reset instead of performing a live upgrade This option is faster and is recommended when a live upgrade is not required Caution All reset commands cause the array to stop responding to I O requests from the host for a period of time This might result in data loss unless all I O activity is suspended by halting all applications that are accessing the array and unmounting any file systems that are mounted from the array In redundant controller configurations these commands affect all LUNs on both controllers Syntax download controller firmware filename r reset Arguments TABLE 6 1 Arguments for download controller firmware Argument Description fi
256. ote The primary controller location displays as N A for Sun StorEdge 3000 family SCSI arrays The controller location is provided only for Sun StorEdge 3510 FC arrays and Sun StorEdge 3511 SATA arrays Chapter 3 Controller and Disk Commands 85 86 show redundant controller Description The show redundant controller command displays the redundant controller information Syntax show redundant controller Examples The following example shows the redundant controller information sccli gt show redundant controller Cache Synchronization Host Channel Failover Mode Local Remote Redundant Mode Secondary RS 232 Port Status Communication Channel Type Redundant Controller Configuration Write Through Data Synchronization primary enabled shared local enabled disabled SCSI show shutdown status Description The show shutdown status command displays the controller shutdown status Syntax show shutdown status Sun StorEdge 3000 Family CLI 2 4 User s Guide March 2007 Examples The following example shows the controller shutdown is complete Sccli shutdown controller WARNING This is a potentially dangerous operation The array will remain offline until it is reset Data loss may occur if the controller is currently in use Do you want to reset the controller now y Sccli shutting down controller sccli controller is shut down sccli gt show shutd
257. ou set the cache policy to write back data corruption might occur in the event of a controller failure To avoid the possibility of data corruption set the write policy for single controller configurations to write through Examples The following example sets the write policy for logical drive 0 to write back sccli gt set logical drive 1d0 write back The following example resets the drive status to good for a failed non redundant RAID set sccli gt set logical drive status good Chapter 5 Logical Drive Partition and Logical Volume Commands 139 show disks logical drive Description The show disks command displays information about the disk drives in the specified logical drive Returned values include channel number SCSI ID size MB speed logical drive index logical drive ID that the disk is assigned to status vendor and revision Caution Any time logical drives are created or deleted the numbering of logical drive indexes might change After creating or deleting logical drives issue a show logical drive command to view an updated list of logical drive indexes Or use logical drive IDs which do not change over the lifetime of the logical drive rather than logical drive indexes For more information see Logical Drive Syntax on page 13 Syntax show disks logical drive ld index ld id Note 1d can be substituted for the keyword 1ogical drive Arguments TABLE 5 16 Arguments f
258. ow led status command 101 show logical drive command 142 290 Sun StorEdge 3000 Family CLI 2 4 Users Guide March 2007 show logical drives add disk command 144 show logical drives expanding command 144 show logical drives initializing command 145 show logical drives logical volume command 146 show logical drives parity check command 148 show logical drives rebuilding command 149 show logical volume command 167 show loop map command 60 show lun maps command 158 show luns command 117 show media check command 149 show network parameters command 28 show partitions command 159 show peripheral device status command 47 show persistent events command 65 show port wwn command 29 show protocol command 30 show redundancy mode command 84 show redundant controller command 86 show rs232 configuration command 31 show safte device command 170 show sata mux command 171 show sata router command 172 show ses devices command 173 show shutdown status command 86 show stripe size list command 150 show unique identifier command 87 shutdown controller command 88 shutdown logical drive command 151 single command mode 6 SNMP enabling 21 special characters using 5 starting CLI 3 static addressing configuring 22 stripe size random optimization 131 sequential optimization 131 stripe size reviewing 150 superuser privileges 1 T Telnet enabling 21 inactivity period timeout 25 viewing inactivity timeout va
259. own status Controller shutdown complete Status values include Controller online No pending or previously issued shutdown command Shutdown busy Busy with another shutdown command Shutdown in progress Shutdown in progress Shutdown complete Controller shutdown complete Unknown Unknown status show unique identifier Description The show unique identifier command displays the RAID controller unique identifier A valid controller unique identifier is a hexidecimal number from 0 to Oxfffff Itis displayed as a six digit value where the first digit is always 0 for consistency with the presentation of FRU serial numbers The default value for the unique ID is the FRU serial number of the midplane chassis in which the controller resides Syntax show unique identifier Examples The following example shows the unique identifier is 00476F sccli gt show unique identifier unique identifier 00476F Chapter 3 Controller and Disk Commands 87 88 shutdown controller Description The shutdown controller command shuts down the RAID controller and stops I O processing This temporarily causes the array to go offline which might affect applications running on any hosts connected to the array Data in the controller cache is flushed to logical drives After issuing this command issue the reset controller command Caution The shutdown command causes the array to stop responding to I O requests from the ho
260. p an HBA to a specified LUN This provides an individual server or multiple servers access to an individual drive or to multiple drives and prohibits unwanted server access to the same drives A low noise low power and low amplitude signaling technology that enables data communication between a supported server and storage devices LVD signaling uses two wires to drive one signal over copper wire and requires a cable that is no longer than 25 meters 82 feet The 10 100BASE T Ethernet port that is used to configure a RAID array Megabyte A background process that continuously checks physical drives for bad blocks or other media errors Data written to one disk drive is simultaneously written to another disk drive If one disk fails the other disk can be used to run the array and reconstruct the failed disk The primary advantage of disk mirroring is 100 percent data redundancy Since the disk is mirrored it does not matter if one of the disks fails Both disks contain the same data at all times and either can act as the operational disk Disk mirroring provides 100 percent redundancy but is expensive because each drive in the array is duplicated A RAID technique RAID 5 that offers redundancy with the parity information distributed across all disks in the logical drive Data and its parity are never stored on the same disk In the event that a disk fails the original data can be reconstructed using the parity information and the in
261. pare to rebuild a logical drive automatically without user intervention when a failing drive needs to be replaced 132 Sun StorEdge 3000 Family CLI 2 4 User s Guide March 2007 TABLE 5 11 Arguments for create logical drive Continued Argument Description stripe size max disk capacity nMB size nMB write policy mode Specify the stripe block size in a multiple of 4 Valid values 4k 8k 16k 32k 64k 128k 256k Depending on the RAID level and cache optimization setting some of the values may not be available for your configuration To view the valid values for a specific RAID level use the show stripe size list command For details see show stripe size list on page 150 If no stripe size is specified the default value is used Allocates only nMB of each drive instead of the entire drive the remaining space on the drives can be used to expand the logical drive later Include a MB or GB suffix with the specified parameter The default value is the maximum capacity of the logical drive An alternative to the max disk capacity keyword that specifies the total usable size of the resulting logical drive The logical drive can be expanded later until it fills the capacity of all the member drives Specify the logical drive cache policy Valid values write back write through If you do not specify a write policy the logical drive uses the write policy specified for the controller If the write policy ch
262. pended by halting all applications that are accessing the array and unmounting any file systems that are mounted from the array In redundant controller configurations these commands affect all LUNs on both controllers After running a reset command to stay in prompt mode run the select command to reselect the device Chapter 3 Controller and Disk Commands 69 70 fail Description The fai1 command simulates a controller failure and causes all the LUNs assigned to the specified controller to fail over to the redundant controller if it is configured for failover If the controller is configured for failover the inter controller link is not disconnected with this command Note Before running this command perform a show redundancy mode command to make sure a secondary controller exists For details see show redundancy mode on page 84 Note This command prompts the user to confirm the failure unless the yes option is specified Syntax fail primary secondary Arguments TABLE 3 2 Arguments for fail Argument Description primary Fails the logical drive to the primary controller secondary Fails the logical drive to the secondary controller Examples The following example fails the secondary controller if Y is specified at the prompt Specify N to cancel the failure Sccli fail secondary Are you sure Sun StorEdge 3000 Family CLI 2 4 User s Guide March 2007 mute Th
263. play the parity check X X X X drives parity progress for a logical drive check on page 148 show logical display the rebuilding X X X X drives rebuilding progress for all logical drives on page 149 show logical display logical volumes X X X X volumes on page 167 show loop map on display the FC loop X X page 60 positional map for a given channel show lun maps on display LUN maps for host X X X X page 158 channels 192 Sun StorEdge 3000 Family CLI 2 4 User s Guide March 2007 TABLEA 2 Platform support for RAID Array Commands Continued Sun Sun Sun Sun StorEdge StorEdge StorEdge StorEdge 3510 FC 3511SATA 3310 SCSI 3320 SCSI Command Page Number Function Array Array Array Array show media check display the progress of a X X X X on page 149 media check show network display controller network X X X X parameters on parameters page 28 show partitions display partitions of logical X X X X on page 159 drives show peripheral display the status for all X X X X device status on environmental sensors for page 47 the controller show port wwn on display host channel FC Port X X page 29 Name WWNs show protocol on display all possible network X X X X page 30 protocols supported by the controller or particular information of a specified protocol show redundancy display redundancy status X X X X mode on page 84 show redundant display the redundant X X X X controller on controller information
264. ple FC target IDs on a single physical hardware port Therefore if a target ID that is presented by an SR 1216 is bypassed the SR 1216 physical port is bypassed This causes the IDs of all SATA drives target IDs that are presented by the SR 1216 port to be removed from the loop Conversely if a target ID that is presented by an SR 1216 is unbypassed all SATA drives target IDs that are presented by the SR 1216 port are restored to the loop Note If one of the SATA disk drives is not installed or has suffered a catastrophic failure the target ID of the SATA disk drive does not appear in the loop map Syntax show loop map channel channel Arguments TABLE 2 20 Arguments for show 1oop map Argument Description channel ch Specify the drive channel number of the FC port from which the loop map information is to be obtained Valid values 0 5 Note The channel must be configured as a drive channel and there must be an SES device present on the channel Chapter 2 System Function Commands 61 62 upload Examples The following example displays the loop map on channel 2 sccli gt show loop map channel 2 14 devices found in loop map Channel Loop Map retrieved from CH 2 ID 12 AL PA SEL ID SEL ID TYPE ENCL ID SLOT hex hex dec CE OF 15 RAID N A N A DA OB AE DISK 0 11 DC 06 6 DISK 0 6 D5 0A 10 DISK 0 10 DA 07 7 DISK 0 7 D3 0C 12 SES 0 N A E8 01 1 DISK 0 1 El 04 4
265. plies the controller password test password Sccli password test password reset controller Description The reset controller command shuts down the controller flushes its cache to disk and then restarts the controller This temporarily causes the array to go offline which might affect applications running on any hosts connected to the array After running a reset command to stay in prompt mode run the select command to reselect the device Caution All reset commands are potentially dangerous Reset commands cause the array to stop responding to I O requests from the host for a period of time This might result in data loss unless all I O activity is suspended by halting all applications that are accessing the array and unmounting any file systems that are mounted from the array In redundant controller configurations these commands affect all LUNs on both controllers Syntax reset controller Examples The following example resets the controller for the specified device sccli dev rdsk c0t5d0s2 reset controller WARNING This is a potentially dangerous operation The controller will go offline for several minutes Data loss may occur if the controller is currently in use Do you want to reset the controller now y Sccli resetting controller sccli controller has been reset sccli dev rdsk c0t5d0s2 waiting for device to be ready sccli dev rdsk c0t5d0s2 device reset s
266. prompt mode run the select command to reselect the device Syntax set rs232 configuration port number speed Arguments TABLE3 5 Arguments for set rs232 configuration Argument Description port number Specify the controller RS 232 port number Port 1 is external Valid values 1 2 speed Specify the controller RS 232 baud rate parameter Valid values 2400 4800 9600 19200 38400 Examples In the following example the RAID controller RS 232 port 1 band rate is set to 38400 sccli c2t0d0 set rs232 configuration 1 38400 set unique identifier Description Caution This value is used to construct unique values for the Ethernet address FC WWNs and other identifiers and changing it unnecessarily might cause the logical units to become inaccessible to hosts Chapter 3 Controller and Disk Commands 79 80 The set unique identifier command specifies the unique identifier for the array subsystem as a six digit hexadecimal number from 0 to Oxfffff This identifier is initialized from the chassis serial number automatically and should not be changed unless the chassis is replaced The controller must be reset for this change to take effect Caution All reset commands cause the array to stop responding to I O requests from the host for a period of time This might result in data loss unless all I O activity is suspended by halting all applications that are accessing the array and unmounting any
267. ption device name host name port command parameters TABLE 1 1 Single Command Syntax Syntax Description device name Specify a native operating system device file name for a locally attached SCSI target host name Specify a controller name or the IP address for the host of the primary agent port Specify a port number for the primary agent on the specified controller or IP address In single command mode type the entire command on the command line For instance in Solaris type sccli dev rdsk c1t0d0s2 show events In single command mode in Windows type c gt secli PhysicalDrive3 show events When the Sun StorEdge CLI performs a single command an exit code indicates the success or failure of the command An exit code of 0 indicates success and any non zero code indicates the command failed Sun StorEdge 3000 Family CLI 2 4 User s Guide March 2007 Command Keywords Sun StorEdge CLI commands are case independent Uppercase lowercase or mixed case parameters commands and options can be used Options have a long form and a single letter form Options begin with a single dash for single letter form and with two dashes for long form In most cases you can abbreviate command keywords to the shortest unambiguous substring For example abbreviate the show disks command to sh d Or type show lds to execute the show logical drive command However to avoid ambiguity
268. r uu where the space To determine the disk inquiry string run the show disks command Examples The following example shows the disk product ID on channel 2 ID 6 and then downloads the disk firmware to that drive sccli gt show disks Ch Id Size 2 6 33 92GB 2 7 33 92GB 2 8 33 92GB 2 9 33 92GB 2 10 33 92GB Speed 200MB 200MB 200MB 1d1 1d1 Status IDs ONLINE SEAGATE S N ONLINE SEAGATE S N ONLINE SEAGATE S N ONLINE SEAGATE S N GLOBAL STAND BY SEAGATE S N S D LA LA D DA DD wm 3 XOYEJTOOO X0Y6J3000 XOYC1Y000 X0Y7W1000 XOYAOF000 sccli gt download disk firmware newfile ST336753FSUN36G T336753FSUN36G 0349 07349 T336753FSUN36G 0349 07349 T336753FSUN36G 0349 07349 T336753FSUN36G 0349 07349 T336753FSUN36G 0349 07349 The following example downloads the firmware to the disk in the JBOD unit dev rdsk c6t0d0s2 which is attached to a RAID controller sccli dev rdsk c6t0d0s2 download disk firmware new disk fw 178 Sun StorEdge 3000 Family CLI 2 4 User s Guide March 2007 download pld hardware Description Fibre Channel and SATA devices only The download pld hardware command downloads PLD hardware into the SES microprocessor in a Sun StorEdge 3000 family FC RAID or JBOD device To determine the PLD version on a device use the show ses devices command For details s
269. r the Ethernet address is also displayed A Serial Number field is also displayed this may contain a RAID controller unique ID value which defaults to the RAID enclosure s serial number or a JBOD serial number depending on the type of device selected Sun StorEdge 3000 Family CLI 2 4 User s Guide March 2007 When inband communication is used with the array additional data derived from Vital Product Data are also displayed The additional data may vary from one invocation to the next even if the same device is selected depending on the type of HBA that is used to communicate with the array whether HBA load balancing software is used and which LUN received the command Syntax show inquiry data Note The abbreviation inquiry can be substituted for the show inquiry data command Examples The following example shows an inband Sun StorEdge 3310 SCSI array inquiry sccli gt show inquiry data Vendor SUN Product StorEdge 3310 Revision 411G Peripheral Device Type 0x0 NVRAM Defaults 411G 3310 84158 Bootrecord version 1 31G Serial Number 000001 Page 80 Serial Number 000001250FF1DC00 Page 83 Logical Unit Device ID 600COFF000000000000001250FF1DC00 IP Address 206 1 111 111 Page DO Target ID 0 Ethernet Address 00 C0 FF 80 00 01 Device Type Primary Chapter 3 Controller and Disk Commands 83 84 The following example shows an inband Sun StorEdge 3510 FC array inquiry
270. r gt lt led gt off lt led gt 254 Sun StorEdge 3000 Family CLI 2 4 Users Guide March 2007 component component type diskslot unit 11 07ECE4 gt lt addr gt 11 lt addr gt lt led gt off lt led gt lt component gt lt enclosure gt lt ses gt lt idx gt 1 lt idx gt lt ch gt 3 lt ch gt lt id gt 12 lt id gt lt chassis gt 07ECE4 lt chassis gt Storl lt vendor_product_id gt SUN lt rev gt 0420 lt rev gt lt pld gt 1100 lt pld gt lt wwnn gt 205000COFFO7ECE4 lt wwnn gt lt wwpn gt 225000C0FF0O7ECE4 lt wwpn gt lt topology gt loopb lt topology gt lt ses gt lt port_wwns gt lt port_wwn gt lt idx gt 0 lt idx gt lt ch gt 0 lt ch gt lt id gt 40 lt id gt lt wwnn gt 216000C0FF8927C0 lt wwnn gt lt port_wwn gt lt port_wwn gt lt idx gt 0 lt idx gt lt ch gt 1 lt ch gt id 42 id wwnn 226000C0FFA927C0 wwnn lt port_wwn gt lt port_wwn gt lt idx gt 4 lt idx gt lt ch gt 4 lt ch gt lt id gt 44 lt id gt lt wwnn gt 256000COFFC927C0 lt wwnn gt lt port_wwn gt lt port_wwn gt lt idx gt 1 lt idx gt lt ch gt 5 lt ch gt lt id gt 46 lt id gt lt wmnn gt 266000C0FFE927C0 lt wwnn gt lt port_wwn gt status 0K fru pn 370 6775 fru sn Edge 3511F D lt vendor_product_id gt Appendix C Show Configuration Command Output 255 port w
271. revision number and PC150 boot revision Syntax show sata mux Examples The following example shows the MUX board information for the drives attached to the specified device When no serial number has been programmed for the MUX board n a displays in the MUX SN column Chapter 6 Firmware Show and Download Commands 171 sccli 206 111 111 111 show sata mux sccli selected se3000 206 111 111 111 58632 SUN StorEdge 3511 SN 07EEA0O 24 mux boards found Ch Id Mux SN Mux Type PC150 Rev PC150 Boot 2 0 00075D A A BB42 0300 2 1 00075E A A BB42 0300 2 2 00075F A A BB42 0300 2 3 000760 A A BB42 0300 2 4 000761 A A BB42 0300 2 5 000762 A A BB42 0300 2 6 000763 A A BB42 0300 2 7 000764 A A BB42 0300 2 8 000765 A A BB42 0300 2 9 000869 A A BB42 0300 2 10 000767 A A BB42 0300 2 11 000768 A A BB42 0300 2 16 000C9D A A BB42 0300 2 17 000C9E A A BB42 0300 2 18 000C9F A A BB42 0300 2 19 000CA0 A A BB42 0300 2 20 000CA1 A A BB42 0300 2 21 000CA2 A A BB42 0300 2 22 000CA3 A A BB42 0300 2 23 000CA4 A A BB42 0300 2 24 000CA5 A A BB42 0300 2 25 000CA6 A A BB42 0300 2 26 000CA7 A A BB42 0300 2 27 000CA8 A A BB42 0300 show sata router Description The show sata router command shows all accessible SATA routers behind the RAID controller The information displayed includes the enclosure ID and enclosure serial number of the chassis that the SATA router resides in the channel number that the router controls slot positio
272. rol the enabled disabled protocols that can be used to access the Sun StorEdge CLI For instance to prohibit data access through a protocol specify the protocol name and disabled The supported protocol values include TELNET Telnet access to the IP address enabled by default HTTP Hypertext Transport Protocol enabled by default HTTPS Hypertext Transport Protocol Secure disabled by default FTP File Transfer Protocol enabled by default SSH Secure Socket Handling disabled by default PriAgentAll Controller internal communication protocol enabled by default SNMP Simple Network Management Protocol disabled by default SNMP might be used to communicate with external management software DHCP Dynamic Host Configuration Protocol enabled by default DHCP is used in some networks to dynamically assign IP addresses to systems on the network Ping Ping enables hosts in the network to determine if an array is online enabled by default Valid values enabled disabled telnet Specify the amount of time before the telnet connection times out inactivity Valid values 0 disabled 60s 120s 300s 600s 1200s 1500s timeout s 1800s 2700s Examples The following example sets the telnet inactivity time period to 60 seconds sccli c2t0d0 set protocol telnet inactivity timeout 60s The following example disables FTP access sccli c2t0d0 set protocol ftp disabled
273. rror returns Syntax add disk ld index ld id disk list 126 Sun StorEdge 3000 Family CLI 2 4 User s Guide March 2007 Arguments TABLE 5 6 Arguments for add disk Argument Description disk list Adds specific disks Use any of the following formats ch id ch idm n ch is physical device channel id is the SCSI ID of the device and m to n represents a contiguous range of IDs on the same channel For example 2 0 2 3 or 2 2 5 ld index Specify the logical drive index number For example 143 Id id Specify the logical drive ID For example 71038221 Examples The following example adds two disks to logical drive 2 sccli gt add disk 1d2 d0 0 d0 1 check media Description The check media command sequentially checks each physical drive in a specified logical drive block by block for bad blocks If a bad block is encountered the controller rebuilds the data from the bad block onto a good block if one is available on the physical drive If no good blocks are available on the physical drive the controller designates the physical drive Bad generates an event message and if a spare drive is available begins rebuilding data from the bad physical drive onto the spare Use the show media check command to review the progress of a media check For details see show media check on page 149 It is useful to run a media scan if a drive has failed if drive errors are encountered or when a rebuild is
274. rt of a logical drive that no longer exists but the controller still recognizes the logical drive data format contained on it 100 Sun StorEdge 3000 Family CLI 2 4 User s Guide March 2007 m None not assigned m Good no operation in progress m M media check in progress show led status Description The show led status command displays the status of the LED adjacent to the specified disk drive slot in the array enclosure or expansion chassis Returned values include on and off If the value is on the LED of the specified drive is amber If the value is of f the LED of the specified drive is green if it is working properly Note This command does not support Sun StorEdge 3510 FC JBOD devices or Sun StorEdge 3511 SATA JBOD devices Syntax show led status To display the status of LEDs in LVD RAID enclosures use the following syntax show led status disk ch id To show the status of LVD JBOD enclosures use the following syntax show led status slotn disk sdn diskcXtYdZ Chapter 3 Controller and Disk Commands 101 Arguments TABLE3 13 Arguments for show led status Argument Description slotn Shows the status for the LED adjacent to the specified disk drive slot This argument is not accepted for RAID controllers disk sdn Shows the status for the LED adjacent to the specified Solaris disk drive slot This argument is not accepted for split bus configurations disk cXtYd
275. ry controller only the established connection to the primary controller is displayed As a result if a primary ID is not mapped to a channel and a secondary ID is mapped Async displays in the Speed field PID primary ID SID secondary ID values include m SCSI 0 15 m FC and SATA 0 125 When multiple IDs exist for the primary ID or secondary ID an asterisk displays in the PID or SID field show drive parameters Description The show drive parameters command displays the specified RAID controller parameters pertinent to the operation of disk drives and enclosure services connected to drive channels Chapter 4 Channel Commands 115 116 Syntax show drive parameters Examples The following example shows all drive parameters of the Sun StorEdge 3510 FC array sccli gt show drive parameters spin up disabled disk access delay 15s Scsi io timeout 30s queue depth 32 polling interval disabled enclosure polling interval 30s auto detect swap interval disabled smart disabled auto global spare disabled Returned Values The returned values for the show drive parameters command are described in the following table TABLE4 6 Output for show drive parameters Field Description spin up enabled disabled disk access delay Scsi io timeout queue depth polling interval Specifies whether the disk drive automatically spins up on power up Valid v
276. s Help from the Microsoft Windows Operating System 4 Interactive Command Mode 5 Single Command Mode 6 Command Keywords 7 Device Names for Inband Communication 10 Device Names for Out of Band Communication 11 Disk Device Syntax 12 Logical Drive Syntax 13 Logical Volume Syntax 14 Device Capacity 15 2 System Function Commands 17 Basic Commands 18 about 18 exit 18 help 19 quit 19 select 20 version 20 Network Commands 21 configure network interface 21 create host wwn name 23 delete host wwn name 24 set protocol 25 show host wwn names 27 show ip address 28 show network parameters 28 show port wwn 29 show protocol 30 show rs232 configuration 31 Component Status Commands 31 set auto write through trigger 32 show access mode 33 show auto write through trigger 34 show battery status 35 show enclosure status 38 show frus 45 show peripheral device status 47 iv Sun StorEdge 3000 Family CLI 2 4 User s Guide March 2007 Configuration Commands 49 download nvram 49 reset nvram 50 show bypass device 51 show bypass RAID 54 show bypass SFP 55 show configuration 57 show loop map 60 upload nvram 62 Event Message Commands 63 clear events 63 show events 64 show persistent events 65 3 Controller and Disk Commands 67 Controller Commands 68 download controller configuration 68 fail 70 mute 71 password 71 reset controller 72 set set set set
277. s are deleted Partitions of a logical drive or logical volume are made available to hosts by mapping each partition to a target ID and logical unit number on one or more channels of the array controller Commands with a lun parameter accept the physical channel number target ID and logical unit as three decimal numbers separated by periods For example 4 1 2 represents physical channel 4 target ID 1 logical unit number 2 A comma separated list of logical volume indexes for example 1v0 1v1 1v2 or a list of logical volume identifiers Note that these logical volume numbers do not necessarily correspond to the single digit logical volume identifiers in the firmware menu interface The Sun StorEdge CLI logical volume indexes might change when logical volumes are deleted Assumes a no response to any yes no prompts Use this option to prompt the user before running scripts Accesses the selected device using out of band communication rather than using the SCSI or Fibre Channel host bus adapter HBA with which the array is connected to the host This option accesses the device using a local HBA only briefly to retrieve the array s network address and all subsequent access is done over the network This can provide better performance when the array is processing large quantities of SCSI I O If the IP address for the array cannot be determined inband communication is used instead A logical drive or logical volume identifier
278. s gt 1 lt total_partitions gt Appendix C Show Configuration Command Output 249 partition lt idx gt 0 lt idx gt effective size 48 83GB effective size lt offset gt 0MB lt offset gt lt mapping gt N A lt mapping gt lt partition gt lt logical_drive gt lt logical_drive gt lt ld_id gt 64A046F7 lt 1d_id gt lt ld_idx gt 1 lt 1d_idx gt lt assignment gt Primary lt assignment gt lt status gt Good lt status gt lt raid_level gt RAID 5 lt raid_level gt write policy default write policy block size 128 KB block size number of drives 3 number of drives physical drive 3 17 3 18 3 19 physical drive lt size gt 48 83GB lt size gt lt total_partitions gt 1 lt total_partitions gt lt partition gt lt idx gt 0 lt idx gt effective size 48 83GB effective size lt offset gt 0MB lt offset gt lt mapping gt N A lt mapping gt lt partition gt lt logical_drive gt lt logical_drive gt 1d id 2460FDB54 ld id ld idx 2 ld idx lt assignment gt Primary lt assignment gt lt status gt Good lt status gt lt raid_level gt RAID 5 lt raid_level gt lt write_policy gt default lt write_policy gt lt block_size gt 128 KB lt block_size gt lt number_of_drives gt 6 lt number_of_drives gt lt physical_drive gt 3 20 3 21 3 22 3 9 3 23 3 24 lt physical_drive gt lt size gt 122 07GB lt size gt lt total_partitions gt 1 lt total
279. s2 clear events Chapter 2 System Function Commands 63 64 show events Description The show events command displays the events for the specified RAID controller Events are erased from the controller cache when the controller is reset or power cycled When the events are erased from the controller cache they are stored as persistent events For more information see show persistent events on page 65 Syntax show events last n a11 Y Arguments TABLE 2 21 Arguments for show events Argument Description last n Gets the latest 7 events for the controller latest n Gets the latest n events for the controller all Gets all the events for the controller v Specifying the v option displays more detailed information about event messages if you are using a 3 xx RAID controller If you are using a 4 xx RAID controller the default is without the v option Using this option with this controller results in messages that are not valid due to the fact that the 4 xx RAID controller uses a different interface than the 3 xx RAID controller Do not use the v option with this version of controller Sun StorEdge 3000 Family CLI 2 4 User s Guide March 2007 Examples If no option is specified the command shows all events sccli gt show events Wed Apr 9 05 45 55 2003 Primary Notification Controller Initialization Completed Wed Apr 9 05 45 54 2003 Secondary Notification
280. sata device statistics gata device statistics lt channel gt 3 lt channel gt Appendix C Show Configuration Command Output 273 id 3 id lt type gt SDISK lt type gt lt SignalLoss gt 0 lt SignalLoss gt lt InvalidTransWords gt 0 lt InvalidTransWords gt lt InvalidCRC gt 0 lt InvalidCRCc gt lt sata_device_statistics gt lt sata_device_statistics gt lt channel gt 3 lt channel gt lt id gt 4 lt id gt lt type gt SDISK lt type gt lt SignalLoss gt 0 lt SignalLoss gt lt InvalidTransWords gt 0 lt InvalidTransWords gt InvalidCRC 0 InvalidCRC sata device statistics sata device statistics lt channel gt 3 lt channel gt lt id gt 5 lt id gt lt type gt SDISK lt type gt lt SignalLoss gt 0 lt SignalLoss gt lt InvalidTransWords gt 0 lt InvalidTransWords gt InvalidCRC 0 InvalidCRC sata device statistics sata device statistics lt channel gt 3 lt channel gt lt id gt 6 lt id gt lt type gt SDISK lt type gt lt SignalLoss gt 0 lt SignalLoss gt lt InvalidTransWords gt 0 lt InvalidTransWords gt InvalidCRC 0 InvalidCRC sata device statistics sata device statistics channel 3 channel lt id gt 7 lt id gt lt type gt SDISK lt type gt lt SignalLoss gt 0 lt SignalLoss gt lt InvalidTransWords gt 0 lt InvalidTransWords gt InvalidCRC 0 InvalidCRC sata device statistics gata device statis
281. shows Verify On Initialization Verify On Rebuild Verify On Normal Rebuild Priority 214 Sun StorEdge 3000 Family CLI 2 4 User s Guide March 2007 XML DTD for the show configuration xml Command The show configuration xml command conforms to the following DTD xml version 1 0 gt E e EXAERERERERERERE ckok kk kk o kohckckck kck ck koh REN ERRE RRE RARE RAN RR gt lt Root element the RAID BaseView gt n enn KEK KEKE KKK KKK KKK KEK KKK KKK KEK KKK KKK KKK KKK KKK KKK k xk k x kk kkk c lt ELEMENT raidbaseview raidsystem gt lt KEK KKK K K V K IK H Ve K KEK K H KEK VV K KKK K K KKK KE H K H KEK k K K H Y H ck K Kk K K ko ko ko ko k K e gt lt raidsystem element The entire RAID system which gt 1 consists of 1 name The RAID System name gt status the system status gt 1 manufacturer gt model product model gt 1 firmware version Firmware version gt lt bootrecord_version Boot Record version gt lt mac_address network MAC address gt ip network IP address gt lt netmask network mask address gt lt gateway network gateway address gt 1 optional Ess primary sn Primary Serial Number gt lt secondary_sn Secondary Serial Number gt optional
282. shut down the controller as soon as the temperature limit is exceeded or after a configurable delay Valid values enabled disabled 2min 5min 10min 20min 30min 45min 1hour Examples The following example sets the temperature threshold time period to two minutes Sccli set auto write through trigger temperature exceeded delay 2min The following example disables the automatic write policy change on controller failure Sccli set auto write through trigger controller failure disabled show access mode Description The show access mode command displays whether the communication mode being used to manage the device uses data channels inband or an Ethernet connection out of band Returned values include inband and out of band Note If inband management access has been disabled by Sun StorEdge CLI the firmware application or Sun StorEdge Configuration Service and a user attempts to use inband management the message RAID controller not responding displays when a command is run If this occurs use out of band management to access Sun StorEdge CLI For details see Device Names for Out of Band Communication on page 11 Chapter 2 System Function Commands 33 34 Syntax show access mode Examples The following example shows the Sun StorEdge CLI communication mode is inband sccli gt show access mode access mode inband show auto write through trigger D
283. sid gt lt term gt N A lt term gt lt defclk gt AUTO lt defclk gt lt curclk gt 2G lt curclk gt lt defwid gt Serial lt defwid gt lt curwid gt Serial lt curwid gt lt channel gt lt channel gt lt idx gt 4 lt idx gt logchl 2 logchl lt mode gt Host lt mode gt lt type gt Fiber lt type gt lt pid gt 44 lt pid gt lt sid gt N A lt sid gt lt term gt N A lt term gt lt defclk gt AUTO lt defclk gt lt curclk gt 2G lt curclk gt lt defwid gt Serial lt defwid gt lt curwid gt Serial lt curwid gt lt channel gt 244 Sun StorEdge 3000 Family CLI 2 4 User s Guide March 2007 channel lt idx gt 5 lt idx gt logchl 3 logchl lt mode gt Host lt mode gt lt type gt Fiber lt type gt lt pid gt N A lt pid gt lt sid gt 46 lt sid gt lt term gt N A lt term gt lt defclk gt AUTO lt defclk gt lt curclk gt N A lt curclk gt lt defwid gt Serial lt defwid gt lt curwid gt N A lt curwid gt lt channel gt lt network gt lt idx gt 0 lt idx gt lt mac_address gt 00 c0 ff 09 27 c0 lt mac_address gt lt dynamic_address gt lt ip gt 10 1 74 212 lt ip gt lt netmask gt 255 255 255 0 lt netmask gt lt gateway gt 10 1 74 1 lt gateway gt lt dynamic_address gt lt dynamic_ip_assignment gt Enabled lt dynamic_ip assignment supported ip assignment mechanism RARP supported ip assignment_mechanism gt transfer speed configurable
284. sk and SAFTE device info gt 1 hostwwns host wwn info optional lt gt 1 boot time the controller boot time gt lt time_zone time zone gt lt access_mode the accesse mode can be inband or out of band gt lt controller_date the controller current time gt lt enclosure the enclosure information gt 1 network protocol one network protocol gt lt peripheral_device peripheral device configuration gt lt peripheral device status peripheral device status gt lt total_sata_mux total sata mux number gt lt total_sata_routers total sata router number gt lt KKK Kk X H k KKK KKK KKK KEK KEK KEK KKK KKK Yk k kkk KKK KKK ck ck KEKE ko ko ko ko k kk __ gt lt ELEMENT raidsystem name status manufacturer model firmware_version bootrecord_version mac_address ip netmask gateway 216 Sun StorEdge 3000 Family CLI 2 4 User s Guide March 2007 primary sn secondary sn controller name unique id id of nvram defaults total logical drives total partitions total physical drives total ses devices cache size cpu fru channel network com port cache param array param drive param host param redundant param logical volume logical drive ses port wwns inter controller link battery status config components hostwwns boot time time zone access mode
285. ss gt lt PrimitiveSequence gt 0 lt PrimitiveSequence gt lt InvalidTransWords gt 0 lt InvalidTransWords gt InvalidCRC 0 InvalidCRC device statistics device statistics lt channel gt 3 lt channel gt lt id gt 6 lt id gt lt type gt SDISK lt type gt lt reset gt 0 lt reset gt lt LinkFail gt 0 lt LinkFail gt lt SyncLoss gt 0 lt SyncLoss gt lt SignalLoss gt 0 lt SignalLoss gt lt PrimitiveSequence gt 0 lt PrimitiveSequence gt lt InvalidTransWords gt 0 lt InvalidTransWords gt InvalidCRC 0 InvalidCRC device statistics device statistics channel 3 channel lt id gt 7 lt id gt lt type gt SDISK lt type gt lt reset gt 0 lt reset gt lt LinkFail gt 0 lt LinkFail gt lt SyncLoss gt 0 lt SyncLoss gt lt SignalLoss gt 0 lt SignalLoss gt lt PrimitiveSequence gt 0 lt PrimitiveSequence gt lt InvalidTransWords gt 0 lt InvalidTransWords gt InvalidCRC 0 InvalidCRC device statistics 268 Sun StorEdge 3000 Family CLI 2 4 Users Guide March 2007 device statistics lt channel gt 3 lt channel gt lt id gt 8 lt id gt lt type gt SDISK lt type gt lt reset gt 0 lt reset gt lt LinkFail gt 0 lt LinkFail gt lt SyncLoss gt 0 lt SyncLoss gt lt SignalLoss gt 0 lt SignalLoss gt lt PrimitiveSequence gt 0 lt PrimitiveSequence gt lt InvalidTransWords gt 0 lt InvalidTransWords gt InvalidCRC 0 InvalidCRC
286. st This might result in data loss unless all I O activity is suspended by halting all applications that are accessing the array and unmounting any file systems that are mounted from the array In redundant controller configurations these commands affect all LUNs on both controllers Note Use this command whenever the RAID array is powered off It ensures that all data is written to disk and that the backup battery if present is not drained by the cache memory Note A controller shutdown does not generate an event message To view the status of the shutdown use the show shutdown status command For details see show shutdown status on page 86 Syntax shutdown controller Examples The following example shows the message prompts that are displayed when you run the shutdown controller command sccli dev rdsk c0t5d0s2 shutdown controller WARNING This is a potentially dangerous operation The controller will go offline for several minutes Data loss may occur if the controller is currently in use Do you want to reset the controller now y sccli shutting down controller Sccli controller is shut down Sun StorEdge 3000 Family CLI 2 4 User s Guide March 2007 unfail upload Description The unfai1 command restores the controller pair to redundant operation When a primary controller fails the secondary controller becomes the primary controller The unfail command makes
287. systems that are mounted from the array In redundant controller configurations these commands affect all LUNs on both controllers After running a reset command to stay in prompt mode run the select command to reselect the device Note If a primary ID is not mapped to a channel and a secondary ID is mapped Async displays in the Speed field when the show channels command is run For details see show channels on page 113 Syntax configure channel channel host drive RCCOM primary id target list secondary id target list r reset 106 Sun StorEdge 3000 Family CLI 2 4 User s Guide March 2007 Arguments TABLE 4 1 Arguments for configure channel Argument Description channel channel host drive RCCOM primary id target list secondary id target list r reset Specify the physical drive channel Use the following format p L q L n Valid values include 0 5 or 0 7 Specify whether the channel is used to interface with a host or disk drive or assigned to RCCOM If the channel is configured as a host channel multiple IDs can be applied However if the channel is configured as a drive channel only one ID can be applied Specify one or more comma separated target IDs for the primary controller on the specified channel Specify None if you do not want to configure a primary ID primary id can be abbreviated pid Valid values None no ID confi
288. t battery_backup_unit_failure element gt lt KEK KKK K KK Kk k V V KKK K Kk KEK KKK KKK KKK KK KKK KEK ck Hk Kk Kk k k Hk ko ko ko ko ko ko ko Leas lt ELEMENT battery_backup_unit_failure PCDATA gt lt EE a e a a A a a E e a e e a a o a aea a A r a e a I E E a A e E a r a a a e s e E e A A D aT gt UPS AC power loss element gt lt gt lt ELEMENT UPS AC power loss PCDATA gt Appendix C Show Configuration Command Output 239 Sample Show Configuration XML R N ies gt lt power_supply failure element gt Zl KKkKKYKkK kKKkK kK k Kk k K K k K ARE RENE KA RE K K k K k XY RARE K kok k xk K K kK ko kK k k kokokk gt lt ELEMENT power supply failure PCDATA gt lt e fan failure element C
289. t lt EERAREXARERARERA RE RA REA RRA kk Kk kkk RARA RE RARE AA ko oko ko kk lt ELEMENT model PCDATA gt lt KEK KKK KKK KEK KEKE KKK KEK KE Kk k K K k k kK Kk Kk KEK Kk Kk KEK k k K KKK KKK kx Kk k kk KEKE lt firmware_version element lt The RAID system Firmware version lt format is major minorEnginer KX kKkKk kHKKIHKk XY K k KH EF K H K K k H TF K I k K kK kH K K Y Kk K K K HK KHK k KE k k H KK k H K k KX lt ELEMENT firmware_version PCDATA gt lt KEKE KKK KKK KKK KKK KEK KEK k Kk K K K k kk XK Kk KEK KEK k Kk k kx Kk K KKK k k k Kk ko k ko ko KEKE lt bootrecord_version element lt The RAID system boot record version lt kokckckckckckckockokckckckck kokc ko VF Vo EXA RE RARE HV K EH T H kck V k o RARE RARE RAR k lt ELEMENT bootrecord version PCDATA gt 218 Sun StorEdge 3000 Family CLI 2 4 User s Guide March 2007 lt FER KK ERK K K K K KEK K K KK K K VK RE H K K V Kk K Y KK K ERR RARA HK K k RARA K K lt primary sn element gt lt The RAID system primary controller serial number gt lt ckckckok cc echok ckckckock ck ckchck ckokckok ck kchock ckckckock ck kchckckok kk ck kk k kk k Xk xk k k kx xk x kok k gt lt ELEMENT primary_sn PCDATA gt lt KEK KKK KKK KEK KEK KKK KKK KEK K K K KKK KH K V Y KKK KEK TK K X KKK F KK ko ko ko ko k K gt lt secondary_sn element gt
290. t lt type gt SDISK lt type gt lt reset gt 0 lt reset gt lt LinkFail gt 0 lt LinkFail gt lt SyncLoss gt 0 lt SyncLoss gt lt SignalLoss gt 0 lt SignalLoss gt lt PrimitiveSequence gt 0 lt PrimitiveSequence gt lt InvalidTransWords gt 0 lt InvalidTransWords gt InvalidCRC 0 InvalidCRC device statistics device statistics lt channel gt 3 lt channel gt lt id gt 3 lt id gt lt type gt SDISK lt type gt lt reset gt 0 lt reset gt lt LinkFail gt 0 lt LinkFail gt lt SyncLoss gt 0 lt SyncLoss gt lt SignalLoss gt 0 lt SignalLoss gt lt PrimitiveSequence gt 0 lt PrimitiveSequence gt lt InvalidTransWords gt 0 lt InvalidTransWords gt InvalidCRC 0 InvalidCRC device statistics device statistics channel 3 channel id 4 id lt type gt SDISK lt type gt lt reset gt 0 lt reset gt Appendix C Show Configuration Command Output 267 lt LinkFail gt 0 lt LinkFail gt lt SyncLoss gt 0 lt SyncLoss gt lt SignalLoss gt 0 lt SignalLoss gt lt PrimitiveSequence gt 0 lt PrimitiveSequence gt lt InvalidTransWords gt 0 lt InvalidTransWords gt InvalidCRC 0 InvalidCRC device statistics device statistics lt channel gt 3 lt channel gt lt id gt 5 lt id gt lt type gt SDISK lt type gt lt reset gt 0 lt reset gt lt LinkFail gt 0 lt LinkFail gt lt SyncLoss gt 0 lt SyncLoss gt lt SignalLoss gt 0 lt SignalLo
291. t Enclosure SAF TE revision number and status information m fan m power supply m temperature sensor m drive slot Note In split bus configurations on Sun StorEdge 3000 SCSI devices half the drives display a status of Unknown The drives are present but because of a SAF TE design limitation the information does not display Sun StorEdge 3510 FC arrays and Sun StorEdge 3511 SATA arrays display the status for the m SCSI Enclosure Services SES revision number and status information m fan m power supply m temperature sensor m drive slot m voltage sensors 16 sensors display for SATA devices and 12 sensors display for FC devices Note Sun StorEdge 3000 family FC and SATA enclosures contain two SES processors in a dual controller array and there can be more than one enclosure in a RAID subsystem Syntax show enclosure status 38 Sun StorEdge 3000 Family CLI 2 4 User s Guide March 2007 Examples The following example shows the enclosure status for a Sun StorEdge 3310 SCSI device Note The Enclosure SCSI channel type values include single bus and split bus Throughout the documentation and the Sun StorEdge CLL the term split bus is interchangeable with the term dual bus For details on configuring an array refer to the Sun StorEdge 3000 Family RAID Firmware User s Guide for your array sccli gt show enclosure status Ch Id Chassis Vendor Product ID Rev Package Status 0 14 002A4C
292. t where LD LV Index is the Logical Drive Volume Index number PP is a two digital hexidecimal number that represents the partition number Valid partition IDs for a logical drive for example are 3C2B1111 01 or 182 03 Valid partition IDs for a logical volume for example are 205FB9AC 01 or lv2 03 channel Specify a host channel number between 0 and 7 when unmapping a specific partition from only one channel channel target lun Specify the channel target and LUN to unmap This must be on the same controller as the logical volume or the logical drive that you are unmapping Specify a host channel number between 0 and 7 when unmapping a specific partition from only one channel Specify a host channel SCSI target number between 0 and 126 Since a host channel can have multiple SCSI IDs the user can map the partition to multiple SCSI IDs of a host channel Use the SCSI ID list format p L q L n Specify a host channel LUN number For example 4 1 2 represents physical channel 4 target ID 1 logical unit number 2 wwpn Sun StorEdge 3000 family FC and SATA devices only Specify a worldwide port name WWPN to unmap from the host bus adapter with the specified WWPN To review the available WWPN values run the show port wwn command For details see show port wwn on page 29 host wwn name Sun StorEdge 3000 family FC and SATA devices only Specify a host name to unmap from the host bus adapter with the specified worldwide name
293. t0d0 create host wwn name 210000e08b095562 sun hba 1 To see the existing WWNS use the show host wwn names command For details see show host wwn names on page 27 host wwn name Description Sun StorEdge 3000 family FC and SATA devices only The delete host wwn name command deletes a Host ID worldwide name WWN entry Syntax delete host wwn name name wwn Note Names that contain special characters such as spaces must be enclosed in double quotation marks Sun StorEdge 3000 Family CLI 2 4 User s Guide March 2007 Examples The following example deletes the alias test name 2 sccli gt delete host wwn name test name 2 set protocol Description The set protocol command enables or disables the specified network protocol and sets the telnet inactivity timeout value For security reasons you might want to disable the network protocols that you do not want to support This limits the ways security can be breached Syntax set protocol protocol name enabled disabled telnet inactivity timeout s Arguments Note The PriAgentAll protocol must remain enabled for Sun StorEdge Configuration Service and Sun StorEdge CLI to receive information from the controller firmware Do not disable this protocol Chapter 2 System Function Commands 25 TABLE 2 4 Arguments for set protocol Argument Description protocol name Specify the protocol name and enabled or disabled to cont
294. tage gt lt component gt lt component type voltage GG0045 gt voltage 2 530V voltage component component type voltage GG0045 gt lt voltage gt 3 330V lt voltage gt lt component gt lt component type voltage GG0045 gt lt voltage gt 5 170V lt voltage gt lt component gt lt component type voltage GG0045 gt lt voltage gt 4 770V lt voltage gt lt component gt lt component type voltage GG0045 gt lt voltage gt 12 190V lt voltage gt lt component gt lt component type diskslot 07ECE4 gt lt addr gt 0 lt addr gt lt led gt off lt led gt lt component gt lt component type diskslot 07ECE4 gt lt addr gt 1 lt addr gt lt led gt off lt led gt lt component gt lt component type diskslot 07ECE4 gt lt addr gt 2 lt addr gt lt led gt off lt led gt lt component gt unit 9 unit 10 unit 11 unit 12 unit 13 unit 14 unit 15 unit 0 unit 1 unit 2 status OK status 0K status 0K status 0K status 0K status 0K status 0K status 0K status 0K status 0K fru pn 370 6774 fru pn 370 6774 fru pn 370 6774 fru pn 370 6774 fru pn 370 6774 fru pn 370 6774 fru pn 370 6774 fru pn 370 6775 fru pn 370 6775 fru pn 370 6775 fru sn fru sn fru sn fru sn fru sn fru sn fru sn
295. te Fri Aug 11 20 18 02 2006 tery Expiration Status OK tery Type 1 tery Manufacturing Date Tue Mar 30 14 32 26 2004 tery Placed In Service Wed Sep 29 21 04 39 2004 tery Expiration Date Fri Sep 29 21 04 39 2006 tery Expiration Status OK tery Hardware Status OK tery Hardware Status OK Returned Values The returned expiration and hardware status values for the show battery status command are described in the tables below TABLE 2 9 Battery expiration status values for show battery status Value Description OK Battery is neither near nor at expiration Warning Three weeks or less to battery expiration Expired Battery expired TABLE2 10 Battery hardware status values for show battery status Value Description OK Battery fully charged and functioning Charging Battery slightly drained and charging Critical Battery almost drained and charging Missing Battery not installed BAD Battery completely drained or not functioning Chapter 2 System Function Commands 37 show enclosure status Description The show enclosure status command shows the status for all chassis components If the selected device is a RAID subsystem consisting of more than one chassis status displays for each chassis in the system For details on the controller environmental sensor status see show peripheral device status on page 47 Sun StorEdge 3000 family SCSI arrays display the status for the m SCSI Accessed Fault Toleran
296. terface Sun StorEdge CLI to manage Sun StorEdge 3000 family array controllers examine and configure Sun StorEdge 3000 family arrays save and restore configuration data and download new firmware to RAID controllers and Just a Bunch of Disks JBODs The Sun StorEdge CLI communicates with the storage subsystem using inband or out of band communication with the RAID controller over low voltage differential LVD SCSI Fibre Channel or Ethernet connections The commands in this document apply to the Sun StorEdge 3120 SCSI array Sun StorEdge 3310 SCSI array Sun StorEdge 3320 SCSI array Sun StorEdge 3510 FC array Sun StorEdge 3511 SATA array Note The Sun StorEdge 3120 SCSI array is a standalone JBOD It does not have a RAID controller to manage the disks For a list of the Sun StorEdge CLI commands that work with JBODs see JBOD Commands on page 195 For instructions on installing the Sun StorEdge CLI refer to the Sun StorEdge 3000 Family Software Installation Guide This guide is written for experienced system administrators who are familiar with Sun hardware and software products xi How This Book Is Organized This book covers the following topics Chapter 1 introduces the Sun StorEdge CLI and provides an overview Chapter 2 provides the available system function commands with sample code Chapter 3 provides the available controller and disk commands with sample code Chapter 4 provides the available host and dr
297. the abort parity check command For details see abort parity check on page 125 Syntax check parity ld index ld id check only verbose Arguments TABLE 5 8 Arguments for check parity Argument Description ld index Specify the logical drive index number For example 143 Id id Specify the logical drive ID For example 71038221 check only Specify check on1y to indicate that if an inconsistency is found parity regeneration is not performed verbose Specify verbose to generate events when an inconsistency is encountered Examples To check parity and view the parity status for logical drive 0 type sccli gt check parity 1d0 sccli gt show 1d parity check LD LD ID Status 1d0 627D800A 2 complete Chapter 5 Logical Drive Partition and Logical Volume Commands 129 configure local spare Description The configure local spare command specifies a local spare disk as a dedicated spare disk for the specified logical drive The disk drive status is set to standby Local spares can only be assigned to logical drives in RAID1 RAID3 and RAID5 arrays Note You cannot create a logical drive composed of Sun StorEdge 3510 FC drives and Sun StorEdge 3511 SATA drives If you try to mix drive types in a logical drive by configuring a local spare with a different drive type an error is displayed For more information refer to the Sun StorEdge 3000 Family RAID Firmware User s Guide Syntax
298. the check occur using minimal system resources continuous Specify continuous to run a media check at all times Examples The following example checks all member disks of logical drive 5 sccli gt check media 1d5 check parity Description The check parity command checks the integrity of redundant data on fault tolerant logical drives A qualified logical drive must be configured as a RAID1 RAID3 or RAID5 array For RAID 3 and 5 configurations the parity checking procedure on a logical drive recalculates the parity of data stripes in each of the logical drive s RAID stripe sets and compares it with the stored parity If a 128 Sun StorEdge 3000 Family CLI 2 4 User s Guide March 2007 discrepancy is found an error is reported and the new correct parity is substituted for the stored parity For RAID 1 configurations if an inconsistency is encountered data is copied from the master disk to the slave disk If a bad block is encountered when the parity is regenerated the data is copied from the other disk master or slave to the reporting disk drive reallocating the bad block Note You cannot check parity on multiple logical drives simultaneously If you try to run multiple parity checks at the same time an error is displayed To view the progress of a parity check use the show logical drives parity check command For details see Show logical drives parity check on page 148 To cancel the parity check use
299. the data to the disk drive before signaling the host OS that the process is complete Write through cache has lower write operation and throughput performance than write back cache but it is the safer strategy with minimum risk of data loss on power failure Because a battery module is installed power is supplied to the data cached in memory and the data can be written to disk when power is restored Using write back cache the controller receives the data to write to disk stores it in the memory buffer and immediately sends the host OS a signal that the write operation is complete before the data is actually written to the disk drive Write back caching improves the performance of write operations and the throughput of the controller card Write back cache is enabled by default Chapter 3 Controller and Disk Commands 73 74 The controller cache write policy is the default setting for all logical drives When you create a logical drive if you do not specify a write policy the logical drive uses the write policy specified by the set cache parameters command If the write policy changes for the controller the write policy automatically changes for the logical drive as well If you specify write back or write through for individual logical drives the write policy for those drives remains the same regardless of any changes to the global write policy For details about setting individual logical drive cache policy see set logical drive
300. the out of band interface Note If no command is entered on the command line the Sun StorEdge CLI enters an interactive mode prompting you to enter commands until the quit command is entered All commands operate on the currently selected device 67 68 Controller Commands The following commands are explained in this section download controller configuration fail mute password reset controller set cache parameters set controller date set controller name set controller password To remove an existing password specify a zero length string with a pair of double quote characters For example set unique identifier show cache parameters show controller date show controller name show inquiry data show redundancy mode show redundant controller show shutdown status show unique identifier shutdown controller unfail upload controller configuration For details on downloading controller firmware see download controller firmware on page 175 Note The secondary controller in dual controller configurations does not support any administrative functions In active active configurations where LUNs are assigned to both the primary and secondary controllers a Sun StorEdge CLI command can be used only with those LUNs assigned to the primary controller download controller configuration Description The download controller configuration command restores controller configuration informat
301. tics channel 3 channel lt id gt 8 lt id gt lt type gt SDISK lt type gt lt SignalLoss gt 0 lt SignalLoss gt lt InvalidTransWords gt 0 lt InvalidTransWords gt InvalidCRC 0 InvalidCRC sata device statistics 274 Sun StorEdge 3000 Family CLI 2 4 User s Guide March 2007 gata device statistics lt channel gt 3 lt channel gt lt id gt 9 lt id gt lt type gt SDISK lt type gt lt SignalLoss gt 0 lt SignalLoss gt lt InvalidTransWords gt 0 lt InvalidTransWords gt InvalidCRC 0 InvalidCRC sata device statistics gata device statistics lt channel gt 3 lt channel gt lt id gt 10 lt id gt lt type gt SDISK lt type gt lt SignalLoss gt 0 lt SignalLoss gt lt InvalidTransWords gt 0 lt InvalidTransWords gt InvalidCRC 0 InvalidCRC sata device statistics gata device statistics channel 3 channel lt id gt 11 lt id gt lt type gt SDISK lt type gt lt SignalLoss gt 0 lt SignalLoss gt lt InvalidTransWords gt 0 lt InvalidTransWords gt lt InvalidCRC gt 0 lt InvalidCRC gt lt sata_device_statistics gt lt sata_device_statistics gt lt channel gt 3 lt channel gt lt id gt 13 lt id gt lt type gt SDISK lt type gt lt SignalLoss gt 0 lt SignalLoss gt lt InvalidTransWords gt 0 lt InvalidTransWords gt InvalidCRC 0 InvalidCRC sata device statistics gata device statistics channel
302. tifier 03CE3 controller name network parameters ip address 206 1 111 111 netmask 255 255 255 0 gateway 206 1 111 2 mode static host parameters max luns per id queue depth 1024 fibre connection mode loop inband mgmt access enabled 32 00 C0 FF 00 3C E3 Chapter 2 System Function Commands 59 The following example writes the RAID configuration information to the myconfig xml file sccli c2t0d0 show configuration xml myconfig xml Returned Values Configuration values in the report include inquiry data network parameters host parameters drive parameters redundant controller configuration redundancy mode cache parameters RS 232 configuration channels disks logical drives logical volumes partitions LUN maps FRUs protocols automatic write through event triggers peripheral device status enclosure status access mode controller date and time disk array parameters host WWNs Sun StorEdge 3000 family FC and SATA devices only port WWNs Sun StorEdge 3000 family FC and SATA devices only intercontroller link Sun StorEdge 3000 family FC and SATA devices only battery status Sun StorEdge 3000 family FC and SATA devices only SATA router Sun StorEdge 3511 SATA devices only SATA MUX Sun StorEdge 3511 SATA devices only SES Sun StorEdge 3000 family FC and SATA devices only voltage sensors Sun StorEdge 3000 family FC and SATA devices only and SAF TE Sun StorE
303. tput 271 lt id gt 21 lt id gt lt type gt SDISK lt type gt lt reset gt 0 lt reset gt lt LinkFail gt 0 lt LinkFail gt lt SyncLoss gt 0 lt SyncLoss gt lt SignalLoss gt 0 lt SignalLoss gt lt PrimitiveSequence gt 0 lt PrimitiveSequence gt lt InvalidTransWords gt 0 lt InvalidTransWords gt InvalidCRC 0 InvalidCRC device statistics device statistics lt channel gt 3 lt channel gt id 22 id lt type gt SDISK lt type gt lt reset gt 0 lt reset gt lt LinkFail gt 0 lt LinkFail gt lt SyncLoss gt 0 lt SyncLoss gt lt SignalLoss gt 0 lt SignalLoss gt lt PrimitiveSequence gt 0 lt PrimitiveSequence gt lt InvalidTransWords gt 0 lt InvalidTransWords gt InvalidCRC 0 InvalidCRC device statistics device statistics lt channel gt 3 lt channel gt lt id gt 23 lt id gt lt type gt SDISK lt type gt lt reset gt 0 lt reset gt lt LinkFail gt 0 lt LinkFail gt lt SyncLoss gt 0 lt SyncLoss gt lt SignalLoss gt 0 lt SignalLoss gt lt PrimitiveSequence gt 0 lt PrimitiveSequence gt lt InvalidTransWords gt 0 lt InvalidTransWords gt InvalidCRC 0 InvalidCRC device statistics device statistics channel 3 channel id 14 id lt type gt RAID lt type gt lt reset gt 2 lt reset gt lt LinkFail gt 0 lt LinkFail gt lt SyncLoss gt 65562 lt SyncLoss gt lt SignalLoss gt 65600 lt SignalLoss gt lt PrimitiveSeq
304. tput includes one line for the RAID chassis and one line for each expansion chassis since each enclosure contains a separate SAF TE device The output includes the channel and target ID of the SAF TE device the serial number of the chassis in which it is installed the vendor and product IDs an A indicates a RAID device and an D indicates an expansion unit or JBOD SAF TE firmware revision and the SAF TE firmware package revision which refers to firmware for other microprocesses in the chassis that are managed by the SAF TE processor Syntax show safte device Examples The following example shows the SAF TE device information for a Sun StorEdge 3310 SCSI array sccli gt show safte device Ch Id Chassis Vendor Product ID Rev Package O 14 002A4C SUN StorEdge 3310 A 1170 1170 The following example shows the SAF TE device information for a Sun StorEdge 3120 SCSI array sccli gt show safte device Id Chassis Vendor Product ID Rev Package 5 0064CA SUN StorEdge 3120 D 1170 1170 170 Sun StorEdge 3000 Family CLI 2 4 User s Guide March 2007 show sata mux Description The show sata mux command shows the SATA multiplexer MUX board information for all drives Each drive has one MUX board The information for the MUX board includes the channel number and ID of the drive attached to the MUX board MUX board serial number MUX board type active passive or active active path controller PC150 firmware
305. uence gt 0 lt PrimitiveSequence gt 272 Sun StorEdge 3000 Family CLI 2 4 User s Guide March 2007 lt InvalidTransWords gt 874 lt InvalidTransWords gt InvalidCRC 0 InvalidCRC device statistics device statistics lt channel gt 3 lt channel gt lt id gt 15 lt id gt lt type gt RAID lt type gt lt reset gt 2 lt reset gt lt LinkFail gt 0 lt LinkFail gt lt SyncLoss gt 0 lt SyncLoss gt lt SignalLoss gt 0 lt SignalLoss gt lt PrimitiveSequence gt 0 lt PrimitiveSequence gt lt InvalidTransWords gt 0 lt InvalidTransWords gt InvalidCRC 0 InvalidCRC device statistics drive side statistics drive side statistics gata device statistics lt channel gt 3 lt channel gt lt id gt 0 lt id gt lt type gt SDISK lt type gt lt SignalLoss gt 0 lt SignalLoss gt lt InvalidTransWords gt 0 lt InvalidTransWords gt InvalidCRC 0 InvalidCRC sata device statistics gata device statistics lt channel gt 3 lt channel gt lt id gt 1 lt id gt lt type gt SDISK lt type gt lt SignalLoss gt 0 lt SignalLoss gt lt InvalidTransWords gt 0 lt InvalidTransWords gt InvalidCRC 0 InvalidCRC sata device statistics gata device statistics channel 3 channel id 2 id lt type gt SDISK lt type gt lt SignalLoss gt 0 lt SignalLoss gt lt InvalidTransWords gt 0 lt InvalidTransWords gt InvalidCRC 0 InvalidCRC
306. uide Note If you do not have usr sbin in your PATH environment variable you can run the Sun StorEdge CLI as usr sbin sccli Chapter 1 Overview 3 v To Access the Sun StorEdge CLI from the Microsoft Windows Operating System To access the Sun StorEdge CLL go to Start Programs Sun StorEdge CLI Family gt Command Line Interface This launches the file c program files sun sccli sccli bat You can modify this file if you want to change the command line options passed to the Sun StorEdge CLI You can also access the Sun StorEdge CLI from a command shell In the shell window type c program files sun sccli sccli exe Accessing the Man Page and Help Refer to the Sun StorEdge CLI man page and the Release Notes for the latest documentation updates v To Access the Man Page from UNIX Operating Systems For the Solaris operating system or Linux HP UX or AIX operating systems to access the man page type man sccli v To Access Help from the Microsoft Windows Operating System To access help in Windows go to Start Programs Sun StorEdge CLI Family gt Command Line Help 4 SunStorEdge 3000 Family CLI 2 4 User s Guide March 2007 Interactive Command Mode The Sun StorEdge CLI supports single command mode and interactive mode In interactive mode no command is specified on the command line Specifying the device name on the command line is optional If the device na
307. uild a specific logical drive The index number is generated from the Sun StorEdge CLI Use the show logical drive command to find the number Id id Rebuild a specific logical drive The ID is generated from the Sun StorEdge CLI Use the show logical drive command to find the number Chapter 5 Logical Drive Partition and Logical Volume Commands 137 138 Examples The following example rebuilds logical drive 0 sccli c2t0d0 rebuild 1d0 set logical drive Description The set logical drive command sets the write policy and controller assignment for the specified logical drive Before using this command you must create a logical drive For details see create logical drive on page 131 You can also use this command to reset the status of a previously failed drive After a logical drive experiences a fatal failure it will show as Dead when you view drive status using the show logical drive command When this occurs for non redundant RAID sets reset the controller and then reset the drive status to good When this occurs for redundant RAID sets reset the controller reset the drive status to degraded and then rebuild the logical drive Note Before resetting drive status to either good or degraded you must reset the controller After resetting the controller the drive status will still show as Dead For more information on resetting the controller refer to reset controller on page 72
308. ume Commands 135 Note All device capacity is displayed in powers of 1024 For details see Device Capacity on page 15 Syntax expand ld index lv index Id id lv id size online offline Arguments TABLE5 13 Arguments for expand Argument Description lo index Specify a comma separated list of logical volume indexes for example 1v0 1v1 1v2 ld index Specify the logical drive index number For example 143 lo id Specify a logical volumes using an eight digit hexadecimal logical volume ID for example 3C24554F Id id Specify the logical drive ID For example 71038221 size nMB Specify the total usable size per physical drive to be added to the online offline logical drive The capacity you specify is allocated from each available physical drive and cannot exceed the space available on the smallest drive Include an MB or GB suffix with the specified parameter Specify the expansion mode The default value is online Because logical drive expansion can take up to several hours you can choose to expand a logical drive online to immediately begin configuring and using the logical drive before expansion is complete However because the controller is expanding the logical drive while performing I O operations expanding a logical drive online requires more time than offline expansion Specify offline to configure and use the drive only after expansion is complete Because the controller is expan
309. vice In such configurations use the show enclosure status command and the disk documentation provided with your enclosure to determine the correct slot number instead Syntax To change a specific drive LED in a RAID array from green to amber use the following parameters set led disk chid on off To change a specific drive LED in a Sun StorEdge 3000 family SCSI JBOD from green to amber use the following parameters set led slotn disk sdn diskcXtYdZ on off Arguments TABLE 3 11 Arguments for set led Argument Description slotn Changes the drive LED from green to amber for the specified disk drive slot disk sdn Changes the drive LED from green to amber for the specified Solaris disk drive slot disk cXtYdZ Changes the drive LED from green to amber for the specified Solaris disk drive slot ch id Changes the drive LED from green to amber for the specified drive within a RAID subsystem lon off Specify whether to change the LED from green to amber 96 Sun StorEdge 3000 Family CLI 2 4 User s Guide March 2007 Examples The following example changes the drive with SCSI address 8 from green to amber in the enclosure associated with the enclosure device dev es ses0 sccli gt set led disk 0 8 on enclosure sn 005362 led slot 0 on show clone Description The show clone command displays the progress of disk cloning Syntax show clone Examples
310. vices from the back of the Sun StorEdge 3310 SCSI array as shown in FIGURE 2 2 Front of array Power supply 1 FIGURE 2 2 Sun StorEdge 3310 SCSI Array and Sun StorEdge 3320 SCSI Array Enclosure Device Orientation The returned values for Sun StorEdge 3310 SCSI arrays and Sun StorEdge 3320 SCSI arrays are described in the following table TABLE 2 12 Output for Sun StorEdge 3310 SCSI array and Sun StorEdge 3320 SCSI array show enclosure status Enclosure Types Description Fan 0 Left side power supply fan Fan 1 Right side power supply fan PS 0 Left side power supply PS 1 Right side power supply 42 SunStorEdge 3000 Family CLI 2 4 User s Guide March 2007 TABLE2 12 Output for Sun StorEdge 3310 SCSI array and Sun StorEdge 3320 SCSI array show enclosure status Continued Enclosure Types Description Temp 0 1 5 Temperature sensor on chassis Temp 2 Temperature sensor on left side power supply module Power supply 0 in FIGURE 2 2 Temp 3 Temperature sensor on left side event monitoring unit EMU module Temp 4 Temperature sensor on right side EMU module Temp 6 Temperature sensor on right side power supply module Power supply 1 in FIGURE 2 2 EMU 0 Left side event monitoring unit EMU 1 Right side event monitoring unit Disk Slot 0 11 Disk slot identifier refers to the backplane field replaceable unit FRU to which disks are connected The following table describes the location of the enclosure devi
311. with a suffix indicating a specific partition within the logical drive or volume for example 1d2 03 or 2CA48914 03 The suffix is a hexadecimal number ranging from 0 to 7F Chapter 1 Overview 9 TABLE1 2 Command Parameters and Options Continued Parameter or Option Short Form Description password password w password Specifies the password assigned to the array controller The user must supply the correct password when issuing potentially dangerous commands to the array over a network connection For security reasons it is preferable to supply this password using the Sun StorEdge CLI password command or enter the password interactively when prompted for it No password is required for commands which do not modify the state of the controller or commands issued using the inband communication mode target list A comma separated list of SCSI target ID numbers version v Displays the version number of the Sun StorEdge CLI and exits without processing any commands yes y Assumes a yes response to any yes no prompts Use this option to run scripts without prompting the user Device Names for Inband Communication For inband communication device names include one of the following m Native SCSI or FC disk device file names m Native device file names with the directory names and partitions removed For systems using the Solaris operating system the device name is typically specified as dev rdsk cXtYdZs2
312. wns inter controller link lt idx gt 0 lt idx gt lt slot gt upper lt slot gt lt ch gt 0 lt ch gt lt ch_mode gt host channel lt ch_mode gt lt bypass_status gt N A lt bypass_status gt lt inter_controller_link gt lt inter_controller_link gt lt idx gt 1 lt idx gt lt slot gt lower lt slot gt lt ch gt 0 lt ch gt lt ch_mode gt host channel lt ch_mode gt lt bypass_status gt N A lt bypass_status gt inter controller link inter controller link lt idx gt 2 lt idx gt lt slot gt upper lt slot gt lt ch gt 1 lt ch gt lt ch_mode gt host channel lt ch_mode gt lt bypass_status gt N A lt bypass_status gt lt inter_controller_link gt lt inter_controller_link gt lt idx gt 3 lt idx gt lt slot gt lower lt slot gt lt ch gt 1 lt ch gt lt ch_mode gt host channel lt ch_mode gt lt bypass_status gt N A lt bypass_status gt inter controller link inter controller link lt idx gt 4 lt idx gt lt slot gt upper lt slot gt lt ch gt 4 lt ch gt lt ch_mode gt host channel lt ch_mode gt lt bypass_status gt N A lt bypass_status gt lt inter_controller_link gt lt inter_controller_link gt lt idx gt 5 lt idx gt lt slot gt lower lt slot gt lt ch gt 4 lt ch gt lt ch_mode gt host channel lt ch_mode gt lt bypass_status gt N A lt bypass_status gt lt inter_controller_link gt 256 Sun StorEdge 3000 Family CLI 2 4 Users Guide March
313. y host channels Be sure to specify the secondary keyword if the underlying logical drives are mapped to the secondary controller Caution Any time logical volumes are created or deleted the numbering of logical volume indexes might change After creating or deleting logical volumes issue a show logical volumes command to view an updated list of logical volume indexes Or use logical volume IDs which do not change over the lifetime of the logical volume rather than logical volume indexes For more information Logical Volume Syntax on page 14 Syntax create logical volume ld list assignment write policy Chapter 5 Logical Drive Partition and Logical Volume Commands 163 Arguments TABLE 5 27 Arguments for create logical volume Argument Description Id list A comma separated list of logical drive indexes for example 1d0 1d1 1d2 or a list of logical drive identifiers such as 71038221 assignment Specify the controller assignment for the logical volume If no value is specified the logical volume is assigned to the primary controller by default Valid values primary secondary write policy Set the write policy for the logical volume Valid values write back write through If you do not specify a write policy the logical volume uses the write policy specified for the controller If the write policy changes for the controller the write policy automatically changes for the logical volume
314. y whether to perform Verify after Write during the rebuilding enabled process disabled init verify Specify whether to perform Verify after Write while initializing the enabled logical drive disabled rebuild Specify the priority of the logical drive rebuild process Valid values priority low normal improved high The higher the priority selected the greater amount of system resources required For example specify low to perform the rebuild after other firmware processes complete Examples The following example specifies that data is verified during the rebuilding process and when initializing logical drives Sccli set disk array rebuild verify enabled init verify enabled set led Description The set led command changes the drive LED for the specified disk or slot from green to amber For Sun StorEdge 3000 family SCSI JBODs specify a disk device using a Solaris device name such as sd31 or c1t0d0s2 or specify a slot number Use the show led status command to show the status of the identified disk drive Note This command does not support Sun StorEdge 3510 FC JBODs or Sun StorEdge 3511 SATA JBODs Chapter 3 Controller and Disk Commands 95 Note Selecting a slot by disk name is not supported in split bus enclosure configurations because the enclosure services processor resides on only one of the internal buses and the Sun StorEdge CLI might not be able to determine the slot location of a particular de
315. yntax download sata router firmware filename r reset 182 Sun StorEdge 3000 Family CLI 2 4 User s Guide March 2007 Arguments TABLE6 6 Arguments for download sata router firmware Argument Description filename Specify the firmware file name for the file that you want to download r reset Reset the controller after the download completes Examples The following example downloads SATA firmware to the specified device sccli 192 168 0 1 download sata router firmware FW DP0555 dlf download ses firmware Description Sun StorEdge 3000 family FC and SATA devices only The download ses firmware command downloads firmware to the SCSI Enclosure Services SES device in a FC or SATA RAID array or JBOD unit Syntax download ses firmware filename Arguments TABLE6 7 Arguments for download ses firmware Argument Description filename Specify the firmware file name for the file that you want to download Chapter 6 Firmware Show and Download Commands 183 Examples The following example downloads SES firmware to the SES device with device name c2t0d0 in the RAID controller sccli c2t0d0 download ses firmware ses 1103 s3r The following example downloads SES firmware to the SES device in the JBOD dev es ses4 sccli dev es ses4 download ses firmware sesfw sunfc 1046 s3r 184 Sun StorEdge 3000 Family CLI 2 4 User s Guide March 2007 AP

Sun StorEdge 3000 Family CLI 2.4 User`s Guide

Contents

Download Pdf Manuals

Related Search

Related Contents